Jeep® 2019 Wrangler Moab User Manual

All-New Wrangler

OWNER’S MANUAL

2019

Third Edition

Printed in the U.S.A.

19JL-126-AC

2019 All-New Wrangler

is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.

INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING

EQUIPMENT

Special design considerations are incorporated into this

vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio

frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone

equipment must be installed properly by trained person-

nel. The following must be observed during installation.

The positive power connection should be made directly

to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.

The negative power connection should be made to body

sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.

This connection should not be fused.

Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the

roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used

in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may

affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on

vehicles so equipped.

The antenna cable should be as short as practical and

routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use

only fully shielded coaxial cable.

Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to

ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).

Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than

normal may require special precautions.

All installations should be checked for possible interfer-

ence between the communications equipment and the

vehicle’s electronic systems.

WARNING:

Operating, servicing and maintaining a

passenger vehicle or off-road highway

motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals

including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,

phthalates, and lead, which are known to

the State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproductive harm.

To minimize exposure, avoid breathing

exhaust, do not idle the engine except as

necessary, service your vehicle in a

well-ventilated area and wear gloves or

wash your hands frequently when servicing

your vehicle. For more information go to

www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA

With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name

FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name

FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.

DRIVING AND ALCOHOL

Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of

accidents.

Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood

alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are

drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-

drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-

portation.

WARNING!

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.

Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are

slower, and your judgment is impaired when you

have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

This manual illustrates and describes the operation of

features and equipment that are either standard or op-

tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a

description of features and equipment that are no longer

available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please

disregard any features and equipment described in this

manual that are not on this vehicle.

FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design

and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-

ments to its products without imposing any obligation

upon itself to install them on products previously manu-

factured.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................................................................................12

2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ........

.................................................................................................................................16

3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ........

......................................................................................................189

4 SAFETY .................................................................................................................................................................................................219

5 STARTING

AND OPERATING ........

..............................................................................................................................................308

6 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ........

......................................................................................................................................................412

7 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ........

.....................................................................................................................................452

8 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ........

............................................................................................................................................528

9 MULTIMEDIA ........

............................................................................................................................................................................540

10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ........

.....................................................................................................................................................611

11 INDEX ....................................................................................................................................................................................................616

INTRODUCTION

 INTRODUCTION ..............................................................12

 ROLLOVER WARNING .......

............................................13

 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL .......

................................14

 Essential Information....................................................14

 Symbols...........................................................................14

 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS .......

................................15

 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS .......

....15

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

 VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED......................16

 KEYS .....................................................................................18

 Key Fob ...........................................................................18

 IGNITION SWITCH .......

..................................................22

 Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition...................................22

 Vehicle On Message .....................................................24

 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .......

.25

 How To Use Remote Start............................................26

 Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped...........27

 To Enter Remote Start Mode........................................27

 To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The

Vehicle ............................................................................27

 To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle ... 28

 Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped ........28

 General Information .....................................................28

 SENTRY KEY .......

................................................................29

 Replacement Keys ........................................................29

 General Information .....................................................30

 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED .......

..30

 To Arm The System ......................................................30

 To Disarm The System .................................................31

 Rearming Of The System..............................................31

 DOORS .................................................................................32

 Manual Door Locks .......................................................32

 Power Door Locks — If Equipped .............................33

 Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry

(If Equipped) .......

..........................................................34

 Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors.... 39

 Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped .....................40

 Front Door Removal ....................................................40

 Rear Door Removal (Four-Door Models) ..................44

 SEATS ...............................................................................47

 Manual Front Seats........................................................47

 Heated Seats — If Equipped........................................49

 Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat — Two Door

Models.............................................................................50

 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat — Four Door Models...51

 Fold And Tumble Rear Seat — Two Door Models...52

 Rear Seat Armrest — If Equipped...............................54

 HEAD RESTRAINTS .......

.................................................55

 Front Head Restraints...................................................55

 Rear Head Restraints — Two Door Models ..............57

 Rear Head Restraints — Four Door Models..............58

 STEERING WHEEL .......

.....................................................60

 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ...........................60

 Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ....................61

 MIRRORS .......

.....................................................................62

 Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped..................62

 Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped ............62

 Outside Mirrors ............................................................63

 Power Mirrors — If Equipped ...................................64

 Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .................................64

 Vanity Mirrors ..............................................................64

 EXTERIOR LIGHTS .......

...................................................65

 Headlight Switch ...........................................................65

 Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped ..................65

 High/Low Beam Switch .............................................66

 Flash-To-Pass ................................................................66

 Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .......................66

 Front Fog Lights — If Equipped..................................67

 Turn Signals....................................................................67

 Lane Change Assist — If Equipped............................67

 Lights-On Reminder......................................................67

 INTERIOR LIGHTS .......

.....................................................68

 Courtesy Lights..............................................................68

 Dimmer Controls ...........................................................69

 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS .......

.............69

 Windshield Wiper Operation ......................................70

 CLIMATE CONTROLS .......

...............................................73

 Manual Climate Control Overview ............................73

 Automatic Climate Controls Overview......................77

 Climate Control Functions ...........................................83

 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If

Equipped .......

................................................................84

 Operating Tips ..............................................................84

 POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED .......

....................86

 Auto-Down Feature ......................................................87

 Wind Buffeting ..............................................................88

 DUAL TOP FOUR DOOR MODELS —

IF EQUIPPED .......

.............................................................88

 Removing The Soft Top — Four Door Models .........89

 Installing The Soft Top — Four Door Models...........92

 FREEDOM TOP THREE-PIECE MODULAR HARD

TOP —

IF EQUIPPED .......

.................................................95

 Front Panel(s) Removal ................................................96

 Freedom Top Storage Bag ............................................97

 Front Panel(s) Installation ............................................99

 Rear Hard Top Removal...............................................99

 Rear Hard Top Installation ........................................104

 DOOR FRAME .......

..........................................................104

 Door Frame Removal..................................................105

 Door Frame Installation Four Door Models — If

Equipped.......................................................................106

 Door Frame Installation Two Door Models — If

Equipped.......................................................................109

 SOFT TOP TWO DOOR MODELS —

F EQUI

PPED .......

.............................................................110

 Lowering The Soft Top ...............................................112

 Soft Top Window Storage Bag ..................................123

 Raising The Soft Top ...................................................127

 SOFT TOP FOUR DOOR MODELS —

IF EQUI

PPED .......

.............................................................136

 Lowering The Soft Top ...............................................138

 Raising The Soft Top ...................................................149

 POWER SLIDING TOP — IF EQUIPPED .......

..........157

 Opening The Power Top.............................................159

 Closing The Power Top ..............................................159

 Wind Buffeting ............................................................159

 Pinch Protect Feature ..................................................160

 Power Top Maintenance.............................................160

 Ignition Off Operation ................................................160

 Relearn Procedure .......................................................161

 Rear Quarter Window Removal................................161

 FOLDING WINDSHIELD .......

........................................165

 Lowering The Windshield..........................................166

 Raising The Windshield..............................................168

 HOOD .............................................................................169

 Opening The Hood......................................................169

 Closing The Hood........................................................169

 REAR SWING GATE .......

...............................................170

 Cargo Area Features ...............................................171

 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED .......

.......171

 Before You Begin Programming HomeLink............172

 Canadian/Gate Operator Programming..................175

 Using HomeLink..........................................................176

 Security..........................................................................177

 Troubleshooting Tips ..................................................177

 General Information....................................................178

 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ...............................................178

 Storage...........................................................................178

 Cupholders...................................................................180

 Electrical Power Outlets .........................................182

 Power Inverter — If Equipped .................................184

 Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped ..........................185

 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED .......

.........187

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT

PANEL

 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ...............................................189

 Instrument Cluster Descriptions...............................190

 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY .......

......................193

 Instrument Cluster Display Location And

Controls.........................................................................193

 Oil Change Reset — If Equipped ..............................196

 Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ................196

 Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —

Electrical Load Reduction Actions —

If Equipped .

......

.........................................................201

 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES.......

..................203

 Red Warning Lights ....................................................203

 Yellow Warning Lights...............................................208

 Yellow Indicator Lights ..............................................212

 Green Indicator Lights ................................................213

 White Indicator Lights ................................................214

 Blue Indicator Lights...................................................215

 Gray Indicator Lights..................................................216

 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II .......

.216

 Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)

Cybersecurity .......

........................................................217

 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

PROGRAMS .

......

..............................................................217

SAFETY

 SAFETY FEATURES .........................................................219

 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................................219

 Electronic Brake Control System ..............................220

 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS.......

...........................231

 Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped ........231

 Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation —

If Equipped.......

............................................................239

 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ..................243

 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ...........................250

 Occupant Restraint Systems Features .....................250

 Important Safety Precautions ....................................250

 Seat Belt Systems ........................................................251

 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ....................261

 Child Restraints .........................................................282

 Transporting Pets .....................................................304

 SAFETY TIPS .......

...........................................................304

 Transporting Passengers ............................................304

 Exhaust Gas .............................................................304

 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The

Vehicle ..........................................................................305

 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The

Vehicle...........................................................................307

STARTING AND OPERATING

 STARTING THE ENGINE ..............................................308

 Manual Transmission — If Equipped .....................308

 Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ................309

 Normal Starting .......................................................309

 Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C) ...312

 If Engine Fails To Start ..............................................313

 After Starting................................................................313

 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED .......

.......314

 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS .......

......314

 PARKING BRAKE .......

...................................................315

 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED .......

...317

 Shifting ..........................................................................318

 Downshifting................................................................319

 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED ....321

 Ignition Park Interlock ................................................322

 Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System ...........322

 Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission .....................322

 FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION .......

....................330

 Four-Position Transfer Case.......................................330

 Five-Position Transfer Case .......................................333

 Trac-Lok Rear Axle — If Equipped ..........................337

 Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) — Rubicon Models ...............338

 Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect — If Equipped ....339

 ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING.......

......340

 STOP/START SYSTEM — AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED) .

......

...........................341

 Automatic Mode ..........................................................342

 Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop..343

 To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode........344

 To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System........345

 To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System........345

 System Malfunction.....................................................345

 STOP/START SYSTEM — MANUAL TRANSMISSION

(IF EQUIPPED).......

...........................................................346

 Automatic Mode..........................................................347

 Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop..348

 To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode........348

 To Manually Turn Off The Start/Stop System........349

 To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System........350

 System Malfunction ....................................................350

 SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED .......

....................350

 To Activate ...................................................................351

 To Set A Desired Speed ..............................................351

 To Vary The Speed Setting.........................................352

 To Accelerate For Passing .........................................353

 To Resume Speed .......................................................353

 To Deactivate ...............................................................353

 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —

IF EQUI

PPED .......

.............................................................354

 Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)............356

 To Activate/Deactivate ..............................................356

 To Set A Desired ACC Speed.....................................357

 To Cancel ......................................................................358

 To Turn Off...................................................................358

 To Resume ....................................................................358

 To Vary The Speed Setting ........................................359

 Setting The Following Distance In ACC ..................361

 Overtake Aid ................................................................364

 ACC Operation At A Stop (Automatic Transmission

Only)..............................................................................364

 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu.....................364

 Display Warnings And Maintenance .......................365

 Precautions While Driving With ACC .....................368

 General Information....................................................372

 Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode...........372

 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —

IF EQUI

PPED .......

............................................................375

 ParkSense Sensors........................................................375

 ParkSense Warning Display.......................................376

 ParkSense Display .......................................................376

 Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........................380

 Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System.....380

 Cleaning The ParkSense System................................381

 ParkSense System Usage Precautions.......................381

 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA .......

.............382

 REFUELING THE VEHICLE .......

...................................385

 Fuel Filler Cap ............................................................385

 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message .................................386

 VEHICLE LOADING ....................................................387

 Certification Label .......................................................387

 TRAILER TOWING .......

..................................................389

 Common Towing Definitions....................................389

 Trailer Hitch Classification ........................................391

 Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight

Ratings) ........................................................................392

 Trailer And Tongue Weight .....................................393

 Towing Tips..................................................................395

 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME,

ETC.) .

.................................................................................397

 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle........397

 Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive

Models...........................................................................398

 DRIVIN

G TIPS.......

............................................................400

 On-Road Driving Tips ................................................400

 Off-Road Driving Tips................................................401

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ..............................412

 ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED.......

.......412

 BULB REPLACEMENT .......

...........................................417

 Replacement Bulbs ..................................................417

 Bulb Replacement ......................................................419

 FUSES .................................................................................423

 General Information....................................................423

 Power Distribution Center (PDC) .............................424

 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING .......

........................432

 Jack Location ...............................................................433

 Spare Tire Removal ....................................................435

 Preparations For Jacking ............................................436

 Jacking Instructions ...................................................436

 Road Tire Installation..................................................440

 MANUAL PARK RELEASE .......

.....................................440

 JUMP STARTING .......

......................................................442

 Preparations For Jump Start.......................................443

 Jump Starting Procedure ............................................445

 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .......

...........................447

 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .......

...............................447

 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE .......

........................449

 Four–Wheel Drive Models .........................................450

 Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ...................450

 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM

(EARS)

................................................................................451

 EVENT

DATA RECORDER (EDR).......

..........................451

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

 SCHEDULED SERVICING .............................................452

 Maintenance Plan ........................................................453

 Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle ...............................457

 ENGINE COMPARTMENT .......

...................................458

 2.0L Engine ..................................................................458

 3.6L Engine ..................................................................459

 Checking Oil Level .....................................................460

 Adding Washer Fluid ...............................................460

 Maintenance-Free Battery .........................................461

 DEALER SERVICE .......

....................................................462

 Engine Oil ....................................................................462

 Engine Oil Filter .........................................................464

 Engine Air Cleaner Filter .........................................465

 Accessory Drive Belt Inspection................................467

 Air Conditioner Maintenance ..................................468

 Body Lubrication .......................................................472

 Windshield Wiper Blades .........................................472

 Exhaust System ...........................................................476

 Cooling System ............................................................478

 Brake System ...............................................................484

 Front/Rear Axle Fluid ...............................................485

 Transfer Case ...............................................................485

 Manual Transmission ................................................486

 Automatic Transmission ...........................................487

 RAISING THE VEHICLE .......

........................................488

 TIRES...................................................................................488

 Tire Safety Information ............................................488

 Tires — General Information ....................................498

 Tire Types .....................................................................504

 Spare Tires — If Equipped .......................................505

 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ..................................507

 Tire Chains (Traction Devices) .................................509

 Tire Rotation Recommendations ..............................510

 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM

TIRE QUALITY GRADES .

......

........................................511

 Treadwear.....................................................................511

 Traction Grades............................................................511

 Temperature Grades ...................................................511

 STORING THE VEHICLE .......

......................................512

 BODYWORK.......

...............................................................514

 Protection From Atmospheric Agents ....................514

 Body And Underbody Maintenance.........................514

 Preserving The Bodywork..........................................515

 INTERIORS .......

................................................................518

 Carpet Removal ...........................................................518

 Seats And Fabric Parts ................................................525

 Plastic And Coated Parts ............................................526

 Leather Parts.................................................................526

 Glass Surfaces ..............................................................527

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER .....................528

 BRAKE SYSTEM.......

.........................................................529

 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .....52

 Torque Specifications..................................................529

 FUEL REQUIREMENTS .....

...........................................531

 2.0L Engine ...................................................................531

 3.6L Engine ...................................................................531

 Reformulated Gasoline ..........................................532

 Materials Added To Fuel ..........................................532

 Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ....................................532

 Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles............533

 CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications................533

 MMT In Gasoline.........................................................533

 Fuel System Cautions..................................................533

 Carbon Monoxide Warnings ...................................534

 FLUID CAPACITIES .......

.............................................535

 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS.......

...................................536

 Engine ........................................................................536

 Chassis ........................................................................539

MULTIMEDIA

 UCONNECT SYSTEMS ...................................................540

 DRAG & DROP MENU BAR .......

..................................540

 CYBERSECURITY .......

.....................................................541

 UCONNECT SETTINGS .......

...........................................543

 Customer Programmable Features —

Uconnect 3 Settings .......

.............................................543

 Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 4

Settings .........................................................................554

 Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 4C/

4C NAV Settings.......

...................................................566

 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS .......

..........582

 Radio Operation...........................................................582

 Media Mode..................................................................582

 AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED .......

....583

 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES .......

..587

 Regulatory And Safety Information .........................587

 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS ....588

 Introducing Uconnect .................................................588

 Get Started ....................................................................590

 Basic Voice Commands ..............................................591

 Radio .............................................................................591

 Media.............................................................................593

 Phone.............................................................................595

 Voice Text Reply..........................................................597

 Climate ..........................................................................598

 Navigation (4C NAV) — If Equipped......................600

 SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV) — If Equipped ...601

 Register (4C/4C NAV) ...............................................602

 Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C NAV) ..........602

 Mobile App (4C/4C NAV).........................................602

 SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV)...............................603

 Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped ....................................604

 Using Do Not Disturb ................................................605

 Android Auto — If Equipped ...................................606

 Apple CarPlay — If Equipped ..................................607

 General Information....................................................609

 Additional Information ..............................................609

 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE .......

.........................610

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR

VEHICLE .......

....................................................................611

 Prepare For The Appointment...................................611

 Prepare A List...............................................................611

 Be Reasonable With Requests ....................................611

 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .......

..................................611

 FCA US LLC Customer Center..................................612

 FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........................612

 In Mexico Contact........................................................612

 Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands ........................612

 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech

Impaired (TDD/TTY) .......

..........................................613

 Service Contract ..........................................................613

 WARRANTY INFORMATION.......

................................614

 MOPAR PARTS.......

..........................................................614

 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS .......

............................614

 In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.......614

 In Canada......................................................................615

 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .......

............................615

INTRODUCTION

Dear Customer, congratulations on selecting your new

vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-

ship, distinctive styling, and high quality.

This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and

erform

tasks that are not intended for conventional

passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers differently

from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so

take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped,

the two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for

on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or

use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive

vehicle. Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the

Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle

controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, trans

mission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle

handles

on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will

improve with experience. When driving off-road, or

working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the

vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics. Always

observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever

you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to

operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or

a collision. Refer to the “Driving Tips” in “Starting and Oper

ating” for further information.

This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance

of servi

ce and engineering specialists to acquaint you with

the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supple

mented by Warranty Information, and customer oriented

document

s. In the attached Warranty Booklet you will find a

description of the services that FCA offers to its customers,

the Warranty Certificate and the details of the terms and

conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time

to read all of these publications carefully before driving your

vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recom

mendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual

will help

assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle.

Options

and equipment dedicated to specific markets or

versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore,

you should only consider the information which is related to

the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased.

Any content introduced throughout the Owner’s Informa

tion, that may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will

INTRODUCTION 13

be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data

contained in this publication are intended to help you use

your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA aims at a constant

improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it

reserves the right to make changes to the model described for

technical and/or commercial reasons. For further informa

tion, contact an authorized dealer.

If applicable, refer to the Owner’s Manual Supplement for

elated

information.

NOTE:

After reviewing the Owner’s Information, it should be stored

in the vehicle for convenient referencing, and remain with

the vehicle when sold.

When it comes to service, remember that your authorized

dealer kn

ows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techni-

cians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your

atisfac

tion.

ROLLOVER WARNING

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than

other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground

clearance and a higher center of gravity than many

passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a

wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe

manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the

higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may

roll over while some other vehicles may not.

Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe

driving

actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to

operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision, rollover of

the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.

14 INTRODUCTION

Rollover Warning Label

Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a

major ca

use of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S. govern-

ment notes that the universal use of existing seat belts could

ut the

highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and

could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually. In a

rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely

to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Essential Information

Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section

contains the information you desire.

Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items

of equi

pment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations

may differ from your vehicle's equipment.

The detailed index at the back of this Owner's Manual

contain

s a complete listing of all subjects.

Symbols

Some vehicle components have colored labels whose

symbols indicate precautions to be observed when using this

component. Refer to “Warning Lights and Messages” in

“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further infor

mation on the symbols used in your vehicle.

INTRODUCTION 15

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against oper-

ating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily injury

and/or d

eath. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-

dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do

ot rea

d this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss

important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!

Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could

seriousl

y affect its roadworthiness and safety and may

lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED

Access your Owner’s Information right through your Ucon-

nect 4C or 4C NAV touchscreen system — If Equipped.

To access the Vehicle User Guide on your Uconnect Touch-

screen: Press the Uconnect A

pps butt

on. From there, press

the Vehicle User Guide icon on your touchscreen. No Ucon-

nect registration is required.

Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Vehicle User

uide Tou

chscreen Icon

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17

NOTE:

Vehicle User Guide features are not available while the

vehicle

is moving. If you try to access while the vehicle is in

motion, the system will display: Feature not available while

the vehicle is in motion.

Pre-Installed Features

Once you launch your Vehicle User Guide, you will be able

o expl

ore your warranty information and radio manual

when and where you need them. Your Uconnect system

displays the Vehicle User Guide on your touchscreen radio

to assist in better understanding your vehicle. There’s no app

to download, no phone to connect and no external device

needed for playback. Plus, it’s updated throughout the year,

in real-time, so it never goes out of date.

Features/Benefits

• Pre-installed on your Uconnect touchscreen radio

• Enhanc

ed search and browsing capability

• Robust

NAV application — If Equipped

• Add se

lected topics to a fast-access Favorites category

• Icon a

nd symbol glossary

• Warran

ty information

• Crucia

l driver information and assistance:

Tip:

en viewing a topic, tap the star icon to add it to your

Favorite

s, for easy access in the future.

Your User Guide —

Updated

in real-time

Available when and where

you need it

Touchscreen convenience Customizable interface

Maintenance schedules and

informa

tion

Multilingual

Comprehensive icon &

symbol gl

ossary

Operating Instructions Maintenance Schedules

Warranty Information Emergency Procedures

Fluid Level Standards 911 Contact and More

18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS

Key Fob

Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The ignition

tem co

nsists of a key fob with Keyless Go and a START/

STOP push button ignition system. The Remote Keyless

Entry system consists of a key fob with a mechanical key and

Keyless Enter-N-Go feature if equipped.

NOTE:

The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle if it is located

next to

a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device;

these devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal.

1 — Flip Key Release Button

2 — Unlock Button

3 — Lock Button

4 — Remote Start Button

5 — Panic Button

WARNING!

Push the Mechanical Key Release Button only with the

key fob fa

cing away from your body, especially your

eyes and objects that may be damaged, such as clothing.

CAUTION!

The electrical components inside of the key fob may be

damaged i

f the key fob is subjected to strong electrical

shocks. In order to ensure complete efficiency of the

electronic devices inside of the key fob, avoid exposing

the key fob to direct sunlight.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19

The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the doors and swing

gate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) by

pressing

the appropriate button on the fob. The key fob does

not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.

NOTE:

With the ignition in ON/RUN position and with the vehicle

doors op

en, the lock button will be disabled, and only the

unlock button will be enabled. All RKE commands will be

disabled once the vehicle begins moving at 5

mph (8 km/h)

or above

Backup Mode Starting

In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of

a button

, the key fob may have a low or fully depleted

battery. A low key fob battery can be verified by referring to

the instrument cluster, which will display directions to

follow.

NOTE:

A low key fob battery condition may be indicated by a

message i

n the instrument cluster display, or by the LED

light on the key fob. If the LED key fob light no longer illu

minates from key fob button pushes, then the key fob battery

requires

replacement.

In this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the

ignition

switch. Put the nose side of the key fob against the

ENGINE START/STOP button, and push to operate the igni

tion switch.

Backup Starting Method

To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate

Push and release the key fob unlock button once to unlock

the driv

er's door only, or twice to unlock all the doors and

swing gate. When the key fob unlock button is pushed, the

Illuminated Entry will initiate, and the turn signal lights will

flash twice.

20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate

Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all

doors. T

he turn signals will flash, and the horn will chirp

once to acknowledge the lock signal.

Key Fob Battery Replacement

NOTE:

When a key fob battery is low, a warning will be indicated on

the vehi

cle’s instrument cluster, and the fob LED will no

longer illuminate with a button press.

The recommended replacement battery is CR2450.

NOTE:

Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply. See

www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate .

1. R

emove the back cover of the fob by inserting a flat-blade

screw dr

iver into the slot on the bottom of the fob. Pry

until the cover unsnaps being careful not to damage the

seal. Proceed counter-clockwise to pry the remaining

snaps until the battery cover can be removed.

1-3 – Back Cover Pry Points

2. Remove the depleted battery by inserting a small

flat-bl

ade screwdriver into the battery removal slot and

sliding the battery forward and up being careful not to

damage the electronic board underneath.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21

Battery Replacement

3. Install the new battery into the key fob, making sure the

positiv

e (+) side is facing up. Slide the battery until it is

seated securely below the tabs.

4. Reassemble the back cover making sure it is properly

aligned

before snapping it back in place.

Programming Additional Key Fobs

Programming the key fob may be performed by an autho-

rized dealer.

NOTE:

Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be

epurpos

ed and reprogrammed to another vehicle.

Request For Additional Key Fobs

NOTE:

Onl

y key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics

can be u

sed to start and operate the vehicle. Once a key fob

is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any

other vehicle.

Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized

dealer.

This procedure consists of programming a blank key

fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one that has

never been programmed.

WARNING!

• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock

all doors

when leaving the vehicle unattended.

• Always remember to place the ignition in the OFF

mode.

22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

• When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System

servic

ed, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized

dealer.

• Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to match the

vehicl

e locks.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all radio

requen

cy (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with

Industr

y Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This

device must accept any interference received,

includ

ing interference that may cause undesired opera-

tion.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the

arty re

sponsible for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

IGNITION SWITCH

Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition

This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch

with the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the

passenger compartment.

The Keyless Push Button Ignition has several operating

modes t

hat are labeled and will illuminate when in position.

These modes are OFF, ACC, RUN, and START.

NOTE:

In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of

a butto

n, the key fob may have a low or dead battery. In this

situation, a back up method can be used to operate the igni

tion switch. Put the nose side of the key fob (side opposite of

the Eme

rgency Key) against the ENGINE START/STOP

button and push to operate the ignition switch.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23

(Continued)

START/STOP Ignition Button

The push button ignition can be placed in the following

modes:

OFF

• T

e engine is stopped.

• Some el

ectrical devices (e.g. Central locking, alarm, etc.)

are ava

ilable.

ACC

• E

ngine is not started.

• Some el

ectrical devices are available.

RUN

• Driv

ing position.

• All ele

ctrical devices are available.

START

• Th

e engine will start.

WARNING!

• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob

from the

vehicle and lock your vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access

to an un

locked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is

dangerous

for a number of reasons. A child or others

could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should

be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a

locatio

n accessible to children, and do not leave the igni-

tion of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in

he ON/RUN

mode. A child could operate power

windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

(Continued)

NOTE:

Refer to "Starting The Engine," in "Starting And Operating"

for fur

ther information.

Vehicle On Message

When opening the driver's door when the ignition is in the

ON/RUN mode (engine not running), a chime will sound to

remind you to place the ignition in the OFF mode. In addi

tion to the chime, the message will display “Ignition Or

Accesso

ry On” in the cluster.

NOTE:

The power window switches will remain active up to ten

minutes

after the ignition is cycled to the OFF mode.

Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time

for this feature is programmable.

• Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles

in hot

weather. Interior heat build-up may cause

serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always

remove ke

y fob from the vehicle and lock all doors when

leaving the vehicle unattended.

WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING!

• Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop,

then s

hift the automatic transmission into PARK, apply

the parking brake, place the engine in the OFF position,

remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock your

vehicle. If equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always

make sure the keyless ignition is in “OFF” position,

remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access

to an u

nlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is

dangerou

s for a number of reasons. A child or others

could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should

be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

or the gear selector.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

This system uses the key fob to start the engine

conveniently from outside the vehicle while still

maintain

ing security. The system has a range of

328

ft (100 m).

The Remote Starting System also activates the Climate

Control,

vented seats (if equipped) in temperatures above

80° F (26.7° C), and the heated seats (if equipped), and heated

steering wheel (if equipped) in temperatures below 40° F

(4.4° C). Refer to “Seats” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle”

in this section for further information.

NOTE:

• T

he vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmis-

sion to

be equipped with Remote Start.

• O

bstructions between the vehicle and key fob may reduce

this ra

nge.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a

locatio

n accessible to children, and do not leave the igni-

tion of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in

he ON/RUN

mode. A child could operate power

windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

• Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles

in hot w

eather. Interior heat build-up may cause

serious injury or death.

• Never remove the mechanical key while the vehicle is

moving, as

the steering wheel will automatically lock

as soon as the key is turned. This also applies to vehi

cles that are being towed.

CAUTION!

An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always

emove key

fob from the vehicle and lock all doors when

leaving the vehicle unattended.

WARNING! (Continued)

26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

How To Use Remote Start

• Push Remote Start button on the key fob twice within five

seconds. Pushing the Remote Start button a third time

shuts the engine off.

• To drive the vehicle, push unlock button, and place the

ignitio

n in the ON/RUN position.

• With remote start, the engine will only run for 15 minut

(timeout) unless the ignition key is placed in the ON/RUN

position.

• The vehicle must be started with the key after two consec-

utive

timeouts.

All of the following conditions must be met before the engine

will rem

ote start:

• Gear Selector in PARK

• Doors

closed

• Hood c

losed

• Swing Ga

te closed

• Hazard

switch off

• Brake s

witch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)

• Batte

ry at an acceptable charge level

• PANIC

button not pushed

• System

not disabled from previous remote start event

• Vehicl

e alarm system indicator flashing

• Ignitio

n in STOP/OFF position

• Fuel le

vel meets minimum requirement

• All re

movable doors must not be removed

• Malfun

ction indicator light not illuminated

WARNING!

• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or

confine

d area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide

(CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon

Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or

death when inhaled.

• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the

Remote

Start System, windows, door locks or other

controls could cause serious injury or death.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27

Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped

The following messages will display in the instrument

cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start

prematurely:

• Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open

• Remote

Start Cancelled — Hood Open

• Remote

Start Cancelled — Fuel Low

• Remote

Start Cancelled — Swing Gate Open

• Remote

Start Cancelled — Time Expired

• Remote

Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset

The me

ssage will stay active until the ignition is placed in the

ON/RUN p

osition.

To Enter Remote Start Mode

Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob

twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the

turn signals will flash twice, and the horn will chirp twice.

Then the engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the

Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.

NOTE:

• I

f an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the vehicle

will st

art and then shut down in 10 seconds.

• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote

Start

mode.

• For security, power window operation is disabled when

the ve

hicle is in the Remote Start mode.

• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two

15-min

ute cycles) with the key fob. However, the ignition

must be placed in the ON/RUN position before you can

repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.

To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The

Vehicle

Push and release the Remote Start button one time or allow

the remote start cycle to complete the entire 15-minute cycle.

NOTE:

To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will disable

he one

time push of the Remote Start button for two seconds

after receiving a valid Remote Start request.

28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle

Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the

unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock

the vehicle using Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry via

the door handles, and disarm the vehicle security alarm (if

equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,

push and release the START/STOP button.

NOTE:

For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go —

assive

Entry feature, the message “Remote Start Active —

Push Start Button” will display in the instrument cluster

display until you push the ignition START button.

Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped

When Remote Start is activated, the Climate Controls may

activate the heated seats (if equipped) and heated steering

wheel (if equipped) in temperatures below 40° F (4.4° C).

These features will stay on through the duration of Remote

Start or until the ignition switch is cycled to the ON/RUN

position.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all radio

frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with

Industr

y Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This

device must accept any interference received,

includ

ing interference that may cause undesired opera-

tion.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the

arty re

sponsible for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29

SENTRY KEY

The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized

vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does

not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic,

regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.

The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition and

a RF rec

eiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.

Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle

can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system

cannot reprogram a key fob obtained from another vehicle.

After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position,

the veh

icle security light will turn on for three seconds for a

bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it

indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In addi-

tion, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indi-

cates that someone attempted to start the engine with an

nvalid

key fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used to

start the engine but there is an issue with the vehicle elec-

tronics, the engine will start and shut off after two seconds.

If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle

operati

on (vehicle running for longer than ten seconds), it

indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this

occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an

authorized dealer.

All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have

been pr

ogrammed to the vehicle electronics.

Replacement Keys

NOTE:

Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics

can be

used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a key fob

is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any

other vehicle.

CAUTION!

The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible

with som

e aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of

these systems may result in vehicle starting problems

and loss of security protection.

CAUTION!

• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock

all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —

Ignition

, always remember to place the ignition in the

OFF position.

30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized

dealer.

This procedure consists of programming a blank key

fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one that has

never been programmed.

When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced,

bring al

l vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all radio

frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with

Industr

y Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This

device must accept any interference received,

includ

ing interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the

party re

sponsible for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED

The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors for

unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized

operation. When the alarm is activated, the interior switches

for door locks are disabled. The vehicle security alarm

provides both audible and visible signals. If something trig

gers the alarm, the vehicle security alarm will provide the

followin

g audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the

park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the vehicle

security light in the instrument cluster will flash.

To Arm The System

Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm:

1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the “OFF”

positi

on (refer to "Starting The Engine" in "Starting And

Operating" for further information).

2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle:

• Push l

ock on the interior power door lock switch with

the dr

iver and/or passenger door open.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31

• Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry Door

Handle with a valid key fob available in the same exte-

rior zone (refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive

ntry" i

n "Getting To Know Your Vehicle" for further

information).

• Push the lock button on the key fob.

3. If a

ny doors are open, close them.

To Disarm The System

The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using any of the

following methods:

• Push the unlock button on the key fob.

• Grasp

the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if equipped,

refer

to "Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry" in "Getting

To Know Your Vehicle" for further information).

• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position.

NOTE:

• T

he driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or disarm the

vehicl

e security alarm.

• When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the interior

power d

oor lock switches will not unlock the doors.

The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your

vehicle

. However, you can create conditions where the

system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously

described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle secu

rity alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the

ehicle

or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door,

the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle secu

rity alarm.

If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery

becomes

disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will

remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior

lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,

disarm the vehicle security alarm.

Rearming Of The System

If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to

disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will turn the horn off

after 29 seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to 8 cycles if

the trigger remains active and then the vehicle security alarm

will rearm itself.

32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

DOORS

Manual Door Locks

All doors are equipped with an interior rocker-type door

lock lever. To lock a door when leaving your vehicle, push

the rocker lever forward to the lock position and close the

door. To unlock the door, push the rocker lever rearward.

Manual Door Lock

NOTE:

The mechanical flip key can be used to lock or unlock the

oors, s

wing gate, glove compartment, and console storage.

CAUTION!

Careless handling and storage of the removable door

panels m

ay damage the seals, causing water to leak into

the vehicle’s interior.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33

Power Door Locks — If Equipped

The power door lock switch is located on each front door

panel. Push the switch forward to lock the doors, and rear-

ward to unlock the doors.

Power Door Lock Switch

WARNING!

• For personal security reasons and safety in a collision,

lock the

vehicle doors when you drive, as well as when

you park and exit the vehicle.

• When exiting the vehicle, always switch off the ignition

and rem

ove the key from the vehicle. Unsupervised use

of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal inju

ries and death.

• N

ever leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access

to an un

locked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is

dangerous

for a number of reasons. A child or others

could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should

be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a

location

accessible to children. A child could operate

power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

1 — Lock Button

2 — Unlock Button

34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry (If Equipped)

The Passive Entry system is a feature that allows you to lock

and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) and swing gate without

having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.

NOTE:

• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to “Ucon-

nect Set

tings” in “Multimedia” for further information.

• T

he key fob may not be detected by the vehicle passive

entry s

ystem if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop,

or other electronic device; these devices may interfere with

the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the passive entry

system from locking/unlocking the vehicle.

• Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated approach (Low

Beams,

License Plate Lamp, Position Lamps) for which-

ever time duration is set between 0, 30 (default), 60 or 90

econds

. Passive Entry Unlock also initiates two flashes of

the turn signal lamps.

• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been raining/

snowin

g on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensi-

tivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.

• I

f the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door is

opened

within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and if

equipped will arm the security alarm.

WARNING!

• For personal security reasons and safety in a collision,

lock th

e vehicle doors when you drive, as well as when

you park and exit the vehicle.

• When exiting the vehicle, always switch off the ignition

and re

move the key from the vehicle. Unsupervised use

of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal inju

ries and death.

• N

ever leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access

to an u

nlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is

dangerou

s for a number of reasons. A child or others

could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should

be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a

location

accessible to children. A child could operate

power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35

To Unlock From The Driver Side

With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the

driver's

door handle, grab the front driver door handle to

unlock the driver's door automatically.

Grab The Door Handle To Unlock

NOTE:

If “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlock” is programmed all doors

will unlo

ck when you grab hold of the front driver’s door

handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press”

and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect

Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.

To Unlock From The Passenger Side

With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the

passenger

door handle, grab the front passenger door handle

to unlock all doors and the swing gate automatically.

NOTE:

All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle

is grabbe

d regardless of the driver’s door unlock preference

setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All

Doors 1st Press”).

Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key Fob

In Vehic

le (FOBIK-Safe)

To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a

Passive

Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry

system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature

which will function only if the ignition switch is in the OFF

position.

36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry.

There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in

any passive entry vehicle:

• A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key fob

while a

door is open.

• A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door handle

while a

door is open.

• A lock request is made by the door panel switch while the

door is

open.

When any of these situations occur, after all open doors are

shut, th

e FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a

Passive Entry key fob inside the car, the car will unlock and

alert the customer. If Passive Entry is disabled using Ucon

nect System, the key protection described in "Preventing

nadvert

ent Locking of Passive Entry Key Fob in Vehicle"

remains active/functional.

NOTE:

The vehicle will only unlock the doors during a FOBIK-Safe

operatio

n when a valid Passive Entry key fob is detected

inside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors

when any of the following conditions are true:

• A second valid passive entry key fob is detected outside of

the veh

icle (within 5ft of a passive entry door handle).

• The doors are manually locked using the door lock knobs.

• Three a

ttempts are made to lock the doors using the door

panel s

witch and then close the doors.

To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Swing Gate

With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft

(1.5 m) o

f the driver or passenger front door handles,

pushing t

he passive entry lock button will lock the vehicle

doors and the swing gate.

Push The Door Handle Button To Lock

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37

NOTE:

DO NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door

handle l

ock button. This could unlock the door(s).

DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking

The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the lock button

located

on the vehicle’s interior door panel.

To Unlock/Enter The Swing Gate

The Swing Gate passive entry unlock feature is built into the

Swing Gate

handle. With a valid Passive Entry key fob

within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the Swing Gate handle, grab the Swing

Gate han

dle to unlock the Swing Gate automatically, and

pull the Swing Gate to open.

NOTE:

If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed all doors &

the swing

gate will unlock when you grab hold of the swing

gate handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st

Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect

Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.

Swing Gate Passive Entry Location

38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

To Lock The Swing Gate

With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the

Swing Gat

e handle, pushing the passive entry lock button

will lock the vehicle doors and the swing gate.

NOTE:

• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait two

second

s before you can lock or unlock the doors, using any

Passive Entry door handle. This is done to allow you to

check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle

without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.

• If Passive Entry is disabled using Uconnect System, the

key prot

ection described in "Preventing Inadvertent

Locking of Passive Entry Key Fob in Vehicle" remains

active/functional.

• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob

batter

y is dead.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all radio

frequen

cy (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with

dustr

y Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This

device must accept any interference received,

includ

ing interference that may cause undesired opera-

tion.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the

arty re

sponsible for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39

Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors

To provide a safer environment for small children riding in

the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a

Child-Protection Door Lock system.

To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade

screwdriv

er (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to the

lock or unlock position.

Child Protection Door Lock Function

NOTE:

• When the child lock system is engaged, the door can be

opened

only by using the outside door handle even

though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.

• After engaging or disengaging the Child-Protection Door

Lock syst

em, always test the door from the inside to make

certain it is in the desired position.

• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the lock

lever rear

ward (located on the door trim panel), roll down the

window and open the door with the outside door handle.

NOTE:

Always use this device when carrying children. After

ngaging th

e child lock on both rear doors, check for effec-

tive engagement by trying to open a door with the internal

handle.

Once the Child-Protection Door Lock system is

engaged, it is impossible to open the doors from inside the

vehicle. Before getting out of the car, be sure to check that

there is no one left inside.

WARNING!

Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.

Remember

that the rear doors can only be opened from the

outside when the Child-Protection locks are engaged

(locked).

40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped

The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.

When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when

the vehicle's speed exceeds 15

mph (24 km/h). The auto door

lock feat

ure can be enabled or disabled by an authorized

dealer per written request of the customer. Please see an

authorized dealer for service.

Front Door Removal

Door Removal Warning Label

WARNING!

Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the doors

removed as

you will lose the protection they can provide.

This procedure is furnished for use during off-road

operation only.

WARNING!

• All occupants must wear seat belts during off-road

operation

with doors removed. Refer to “Off-Road

Driving Tips” in “Starting And Operating” for further

information.

• Do not store detached doors inside of the vehicle, as

they may

cause personal injury in the event of an acci-

dent.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41

NOTE:

• Doors are heavy; use caution when removing them.

• Hinge pi

n can break if overtightened during door reinstall

(Max To

rque: 7.5 ft· lb / 10 N·m). Refer to “Off-Road

Driving

Tips” in “Starting And Operating” for further

information.

• When front doors are removed, the message “Blind Spot

Alert T

emporarily Unavailable” will display in the instru-

ment cluster display. Power Mirrors and Power Door

ocks will

also be unavailable.

1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage.

2. Remov

e the hinge pin screws from the upper and lower

outside

hinges (using a #T50 Torx head driver).

NOTE:

The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in the rear

argo tra

y located under the rear loadfloor.

Hinge Pin Screw

42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

3. Remove the plastic wiring access door under the instru-

ment panel by sliding the plastic panel along the door

frame to

ward the seats until the tabs are detached.

Wiring Access Door

NOTE:

Do not pry back to open, as this will break the plastic cover.

4. P

ull up on the red locking tab to unlock the wiring

harness

Closed Wiring Harness

1 – Locking Tab

2 – Wiring Harness

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43

5. Push and hold down the black security tab under the

wiring harness, and lift the harness into the open posi-

tion.

Open Wiring Harness

6. W

ith the wiring harness open, pull downward on the

wiring co

nnector to unplug. Store wiring connector in the

lower door basket.

7. Remove the check screw from the center door check

(using a

#T40 Torx head driver).

Door Check (Detached)

8. W

ith the door open, lift the door with the help of another

person,

to clear the hinge pins from their hinges and

remove the door.

To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous steps in the

opposite

order.

NOTE:

The upper hinge has a longer pin, which can be used to assist

n guidin

g the door into place when reinstalling.

1 – Wiring Harness

2 – Security Tab

44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Door Removal (Four-Door Models)

Door Removal Warning Label

NOTE:

• Doors are heavy; use caution when removing them.

• Hinge pi

n can break if overtightened during door reinstall

(Max To

rque: 7.5 ft· lb / 10 N·m). Refer to “Off-Road

Driving T

ips” in “Starting And Operating” for further

information.

1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage.

2. Remov

e the hinge pin screws from the upper and lower

outside

hinges (using a #T50 Torx head driver).

WARNING!

Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the doors

removed as

you will lose the protection they can provide.

This procedure is furnished for use during off-road

operation only.

WARNING!

• All occupants must wear seat belts during off-road

operation

with doors removed. Refer to “Off-Road

Driving Tips” in “Starting And Operating” for further

information.

• Do not store detached doors inside of the vehicle, as they

may cau

se personal injury in the event of an accident.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45

NOTE:

The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in the rear

cargo tra

y located under the rear load floor.

Hinge Pin Screw

3. Slide the front seat(s) fully forward.

4. Pry op

en and remove the plastic wiring access door from

the bot

tom of the B-pillar.

Wiring Access Door

46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

5. Unplug the wiring connector.

NOTE:

Squeeze the tab on the base of the wiring harness. This will

nlock th

e connector tab, allowing the wiring connector to be

unplugged.

Wiring Connector

6. Remove the check screw from the center door check

(using a

#T40 Torx head driver).

Door Check (Attached)

7. With the door open, lift the door with the help of another

person,

to clear the hinge pins from their hinges and

remove the door.

To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous steps in the

reverse

order.

NOTE:

The upper hinge has a longer pin, which can be used to assist

n guidin

g the door into place when reinstalling.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47

SEATS

Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle.

Manual Front Seats

Front Seat Adjustment

The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward by using a bar

located

by the front of the seat cushion, near the floor. While

sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under the seat

cushion and move the seat forward or rearward. Release the

bar once you have reached the desired position. Then, using

body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be

sure that the seat adjusters have latched.

Adjustment Bar Location

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside

of a vehi

cle. In a collision, people riding in these areas

are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle

that is

not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a colli-

sion, people riding in these areas are more likely to be

eriously

injured or killed.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using

a seat

belt properly.

WARNING!

• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.

Moving a s

eat while driving could result in loss of

control which could cause a collision and serious injury

or death.

• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts

and whi

le the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death

could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.

48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Manual Seat Height Adjustment

The driver's seat height can be raised or lowered by using the

ratcheti

ng handle, located on the outboard side of the seat.

Pull upward on the handle to raise the seat, push downward

on the handle to lower the seat. Several strokes may be neces

sary to achieve the desired position.

Seat Height Adjustment

Front Seatback Recline

To recline the seat, pull on the recline strap and lean forward

r backward, depending on the direction you would like the

seatback to move. Release the strap when the desired posi

tion is reached and the seatback will lock into place.

Recline Strap

WARNING!

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the

shoulder

belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a

collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could

result in serious injury or death.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49

Lumbar Support

The lumbar control knob is located on the outboard side of

the fron

t driver seat. Rotate the control forward to increase

and rearward to decrease the desired amount of lumbar

support.

Lumbar Control Knob

Heated Seats — If Equipped

The heated seats control buttons are located on the center

instrument panel below the touchscreen, and are also located

within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.

Heated Seat Buttons

• Push the heated seat button once to

turn the HI setting on.

• Push the heated seat button a seco

nd time to turn the

MED setting on.

• P

ush the heated seat button a thir

d time to turn the LO

setting on.

50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

(Continued)

• Push the heated seat button a fourth time to turn the

heating elements off.

NOTE:

• T

he engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.

• The lev

el of heat selected will stay on until the operator

changes

it.

Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start

On models that are equipped with remote start, the driver’s

eat can

be programmed to come on during a remote start.

This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect

system. R

efer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for

further information.

Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat — Two Door Models

Pull upward on the easy entry lever located on the outboard

side of the seat back, and slide the entire seat forward.

Easy Entry Lever

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because

of advanc

ed age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord

injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other

physical condition must exercise care when using the

seat heater. It may cause burns even at low tempera

tures, especially if used for long periods of time.

• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insu-

lates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This

may cause

the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat

that has been overheated could cause serious burns due

to the increased surface temperature of the seat.

WARNING! (Continued)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51

To return the seat to a sitting position, fold the seatback

upright until it locks and push the seat rearward until the

track locks.

NOTE:

• The front passenger seats have a track memory, which

return

s the seat to its original position.

• The recline strap and easy entry lever should not be used

during

the automatic returning of the seat to its sitting

position.

60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat — Four Door Models

To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be

folded flat to allow for extended cargo space.

NOTE:

• B

e sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned

forward

. This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily.

• The center head restraints must be in the lowest position to

avoid

contact with the center console when folding the

seat.

To Fold Down The Rear Seat

There are two release levers located on each upper outboard

side of

the rear seat. The larger of the two release levers folds

down the seat and the head restraint simultaneously. The

smaller lever folds down the head restraint independently

for improved visibility.

WARNING!

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside

or outsi

de of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in

these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or

killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle

that i

s not equipped with seats and seat belts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using

a seat

belt properly.

52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

To fold the seat, lift upward on the large release lever and

slowly fold down the seatback. The head restraint will fold

automatically with the seat when this lever is pulled.

Seatback Release Lever

NOTE:

You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from

the seat

belt buckles if the seats are left folded for an

extended period of time. This is normal. By simply opening

the seats to the open position, the seat cushion will return to

its normal shape over time.

To Raise The Rear Seat

Raise the seatback and lock it into place. Then, raise the head

restrain

t until it locks into place. If interference from the

cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking, you will

have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position.

Fold And Tumble Rear Seat — Two Door Models

NOTE:

• Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to repo-

sition

the front seats.

• B

e sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned

forward.

This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily.

WARNING!

Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into

position.

If the seatback is not securely locked into

position the seat will not provide the proper stability for

child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched

seat could cause serious injury.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53

Folding The Rear Seat

1. Lift the seatback release lever and fold the seatback

forward.

ear Seatback Release Lever

2. Slowly flip the entire seat forward.

Using Th

e Retention Straps

1. There are two retention straps located on the back of the

rear se

at and two corresponding wire loops located on

the back of each b-pillar. Open the hook-and-loop

fastener on the strap and thread through the wire loop.

Fold the hook-and-loop fastener over to keep the seat in

the folded position. This should be done on both sides.

Rear Seat Tumble Position Retention Strap

2. To return the seat to its normal upright position, reverse

these s

teps.

54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Removing The Rear Seat

1. Push down on the release bar on each side, and pull the

seat ou

t and away from the lower bracket.

Release Bar Location

2. Remove the seat from the vehicle.

3. To re

install the rear seat, just reverse these steps.

NOTE:

not drive the vehicle without reattaching the rear seat

atches.

Rear Seat Armrest — If Equipped

The center part of the rear seat can also be used as a rear

armrest with cupholders. To unfold it, grab the pull strap

under the head restraint and pull it forward.

WARNING!

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside

or outsid

e of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in

these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or

killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle

that is

not equipped with seats and seat belts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using

a seat

belt properly.

• In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be

injured

if seats are not properly latched to their floor

attachments. Always be sure that the seats are fully

latched.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55

Rear Seat Armrest

NOTE:

The cupholder liner can be removed for cleaning.

HEAD RESTRAINTS

Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by

restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.

Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head

restraint is located above the top of your ear.

Front Head Restraints

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head

restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment

button located on the base of the head restraint, and push

downward on the head restraint. The release button does not

need to be pushed to adjust the head restraint.

WARNING!

Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into

position.

If the seatback is not securely locked into

position the seat will not provide the proper stability for

child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched

seat could cause serious injury.

WARNING!

• All occupants, including the driver, should not operate

a vehicl

e or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head

restraints are placed in their proper positions in order

to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a

crash.

• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the

vehicle

is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head

restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause

serious injury or death in the event of a collision.

56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go then

push the adjustment button and the release button at the

base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. To rein

stall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the

holes an

d push downward. Then adjust it to the appropriate

height.

Front Head Restraint

NOTE:

Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the incor-

rect position in an attempt to gain additional clearance to the

back of t

he head.

1 — Release Button

2 — Adjustment Button

WARNING!

• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or

hard st

op could cause serious injury or death to occu-

pants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed

ead res

traints in a location outside the occupant

compartment.

• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the

vehicle

to properly protect the occupants. Follow the

re-installation instructions above prior to operating the

vehicle or occupying a seat.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57

Rear Head Restraints — Two Door Models

The rear seat is equipped with non-adjustable, but foldable

head restraints.

To fold the outboard head restraint, pull on the release strap

located

on the upper outboard side of each rear seat.

Rear Head Restraint Folding Strap Location

Rear Head Restraints Folded

To return the head restraint to its upward position, lift up on

the head

restraint until it locks into place.

Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for infor-

mation on child seat tether routing.

58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Head Restraints — Four Door Models

The rear seat is equipped with nonadjustable, but foldable,

outboard head restraints, as well as an adjustable, removable

center head restraint.

To fold the outboard head restraint, pull on the inner release

lever, l

ocated on the upper part of the rear seat.

Rear Head Restraint Lever

WARNING!

• Do not drive the vehicle without the rear seat head

restrai

nts installed while passengers are occupying the

rear seat. In a collision, people riding in this area

without the head restraints installed are more likely to

be seriously injured or killed.

• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or

hard st

op could cause serious injury or death to occu-

pants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head

estrain

ts in a location outside the occupant compart-

ment.

• A

LL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the

vehicle

to properly protect the occupants. Follow the

reinstallation instructions above prior to operating the

vehicle or occupying a seat.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59

Rear Head Restraint Folded

To return the head restraint to its upward position, lift up on

the head

restraint until it locks into place.

To raise the center head restraint, lift up on the head

restrain

t. To lower the center head restraint, push the adjust-

ment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and

ush down

on the head restraint.

To remove the center head restraint, push the release button,

located

on the base of the head restraint, and pull upward on

the head restraint.

To install the head restraint, hold the release button while

pushing d

ownward on the head restraint. Refer to “Occu-

pant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for information on child

eat tet

her routing.

NOTE:

Lower the center head restraint to avoid contact with the

enter c

onsole when folding the seat down.

WARNING!

• Do not drive the vehicle without the rear seat head

restrai

nts installed while passengers are occupying the

rear seat. In a collision, people riding in this area

without the head restraints installed are more likely to

be seriously injured or killed.

• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or

hard st

op could cause serious injury or death to occu-

pants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed

ead res

traints in a location outside the occupant

compartment.

• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the

vehicle

to properly protect the occupants. Follow the

reinstallation instructions above prior to operating the

vehicle or occupying a seat.

60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

STEERING WHEEL

Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or

downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the

steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located on the

steering column, below the turn signal lever.

Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Lever

To unlock the steering column, push the control handle

downward (

toward the floor). To tilt the steering column,

move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired.

To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering

wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the

steering column in position, push the control handle upward

until fully engaged.

WARNING!

Do not adjust the steering column while driving.

Adjustin

g the steering column while driving or driving

with the steering column unlocked, could cause the

driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this

warning may result in serious injury or death.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61

Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped

The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps

warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering wheel

has only one temperature setting. Once the heated steering

wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until the operator

turns it off. The heated steering wheel may not turn on when

it is already warm.

The heated steering wheel control button is located on the

center

of the instrument panel below the touchscreen and

within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.

• Push the heated steering wheel button once

to turn the

heating element on.

• Push the heated steering wheel button a sec

ond time to

turn the heating element off.

NOTE:

The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to

perate

Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start

On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated

steerin

g wheel can be programmed to come on during a

remote start.

This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect

system.

Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for

further information.

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because

of advan

ced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord

injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other

physical conditions must exercise care when using the

steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low

temperatures, especially if used for long periods.

• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insu-

lates

against heat, such as a blanket or steering wheel

covers of

any type and material. This may cause the

steering wheel heater to overheat.

62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

MIRRORS

Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped

The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for

various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on

the view through the rear window.

Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by

moving th

e small control under the mirror to the night posi-

tion (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be

djusted

while set in the day position (toward the wind-

shield).

Adjusting Rearview Mirror

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped

The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for

various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on

the view through the rear window.

The mirror automatically adjusts to headlight glare from

vehicles

behind you.

NOTE:

The Automatic Dimming feature is disabled when the

ehicle

is in REVERSE to improve the driver’s view.

Automatic Dimming Mirror

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63

The Automatic Dimming feature can be turn on or off

through the touchscreen.

• Press the mirror dimmer button once to turn the feature

on.

• Pres

s the mirror dimmer button a second time to turn the

feature

off.

Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further

informat

ion.

Outside Mirrors

To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to

center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of

the view obtained on the inside mirror.

Outside Rearview Mirror

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never

spray any

cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.

Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the

mirror clean.

WARNING!

Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side

convex m

irror will look smaller and farther away than they

really are. Relying too much on your passenger side mirror

could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other

object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or

distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side mirror.

64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Power Mirrors — If Equipped

The power mirror controls are located on the door panel next

to the door handle.

Power Mirror Switch

The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons

and a fo

ur-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror,

push either the L (left) or R (right) button to select the mirror

that you want to adjust.

Using the mirror control switch, push any of the four arrows

for the

direction that you want the mirror to move.

Heated Mirrors — If Equipped

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This

feature will be activated whenever you turn on the

rear wind

ow defroster (if equipped). Refer to

“Climate Controls” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for

further information.

Vanity Mirrors

Vanity mirrors are located on the sun visors. To use the

mirrors, rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror

cover upward.

Vanity Mirror

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65

EXTERIOR LIGHTS

Headlight Switch

The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instru-

ment panel. This switch controls the operation of the head-

lights, parking lights, automatic headlights — if equipped,

nstrume

nt panel lights, instrument panel light dimming,

interior lights, and fog lights — if equipped.

Headlight Switch

Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for

arking li

ght and instrument panel light operation. Rotate

the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight,

parking light, and instrument panel light operation.

Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped

The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) are in a dedicated posi-

tion below the headlight assembly. DRLs are active when the

Low Beams

are not and when the vehicle is shifted into any

position other than PARK (auto transmission), or when the

vehicle begins to move (manual transmission).

NOTE:

The Daytime Running Lights, on the same side of the vehicle

s the a

ctive turn signal, will turn off automatically when a

turn signal is in operation and turn on again when the turn

signal is not operating.

66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

High/Low Beam Switch

Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to

switch the headlights to high beams. The lever will return to

the centered position. To return the headlights to low beam,

pull the lever toward the steering wheel, or push the lever

toward the instrument panel.

Multifunction Lever

Flash-To-Pass

You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by

lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will

cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain on,

until the lever is released.

Automatic Headlights — If Equipped

This system automatically turns the headlights on or off

according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,

rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the last detent for

automatic headlight operation. When the system is on, the

headlight time delay feature is also on. This means the head

lights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the

ignition

into the OFF position. To turn the automatic system

off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position.

NOTE:

The engine must be running before the headlights will come

on in th

e automatic mode.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67

Front Fog Lights — If Equipped

To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or

low beam headlights and push in the center of the headlight

switch control knob. Pushing the headlight switch control

knob a second time will turn the front fog lights off.

Front Fog Light Switch

Turn Signals

Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on

each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper oper-

ation of the front and rear turn signal lights.

NOTE:

If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very

ast fla

sh rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. If an

indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would

suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.

Lane Change Assist — If Equipped

Tap the multifunction lever up or down once, without

moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left)

will flash three times then automatically turn off.

Lights-On Reminder

If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on

after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when the

driver’s door is opened.

68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

INTERIOR LIGHTS

Courtesy Lights

The courtesy lights will turn on when the front doors are

opened, by rotating the dimmer controls on the headlight

switch fully upward, or, if equipped, when the unlock

button is pushed on the key fob.

The interior courtesy lights are located in the center of the

vehicle’s

sport bar, and consist of one large center light and

four smaller reading lights. Each reading light can be turned

on by pushing the lens. Pushing the lens a second time will

turn the light off.

Dome Lights

When a door is open and the interior lights are on, rotating

the dimm

er control to the extreme bottom position will cause

all the interior lights to turn off. This is also known as “Party”

mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended

periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69

Dimmer Controls

The dimmer controls are part of the headlight switch and are

located on the left side of the instrument panel.

Dimmer Controls

With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the right

dimmer c

ontrol upward will increase the brightness of the

instrument panel lights. Rotating the left dimmer control will

adjust the interior and ambient light levels.

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on the

right side of the steering column. The front wipers are oper-

ated by rotating a switch, located at the end of the lever.

Refer to “Rear Window Wiper/Washer” in this section for

urther

information on using the rear window wiper/

washer.

Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever

70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Windshield Wiper Operation

Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent past

the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation.

Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third detent past

the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation.

Front Wiper Control

Intermittent Wiper System

Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a

ingle wip

ing cycle, with a variable pause between cycles,

desirable. Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent posi

tion for one of four intermittent settings. The delay cycle can

be set a

nywhere between 1 to 18 seconds.

Front Wiper Control

NOTE:

The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed. If the

ehicle

is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay times

will be d

oubled.

CAUTION!

In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and

allow the

wipers to return to the park position before

turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on and

the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to the wiper

motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71

Windshield Washers

To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold while

spray is

desired. If the lever is pulled while in the delay

range, the wiper will start and continue to operate for two or

three wipe cycles after the lever is released. Then, the inter

mittent interval previously selected will resume.

If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers will

perate

for two or three wipe cycles. Then, the wipers will

turn off.

Mist Feature

Push upward on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to

clear of

f road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. As long

as the lever is held up, the wipers will continue to operate.

NOTE:

The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; there-

fore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield. The

sh func

tion must be used in order to spray the windshield

with washer fluid.

Mist Control

WARNING!

Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could

lead to a

collision. You might not see other vehicles or

other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield

during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the

defroster before and during windshield washer use.

72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Equipped

A rotary switch on the center portion of the windshield

wiper/washe

r lever controls the operation of the rear

wiper/washer function.

Rear Wiper/Washer Control

Rotate the switch upward to the first detent position

for intermittent operation and to the second detent

for cont

inuous rear wiper operation.

Push the wiper lever toward the instrument panel to

activate the rear washer. The washer pump and wiper

ill con

tinue to operate as long as the lever is held.

If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is placed in

the OFF po

sition, the wiper will automatically return to the

“park” position. When the vehicle is restarted, the wiper will

resume function at whichever position the switch is set at.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73

CLIMATE CONTROLS

The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the

temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating

throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the

touchscreen (if equipped) and on the instrument panel

below the radio.

Manual Climate Control Overview

The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make

you comfortable in all types of weather.

Manual Climate Controls

Manual Climate Controls – Heater Only

74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Manual Climate Control Descriptions

Icon Description

A/C Button — If Equipped

Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). An LED illuminates when the A/C

system is

engaged.

MAX A/C Setting — If Equipped

Turn the temperature control knob to the MAX Air Conditioning (A/C) setting to engage MAX Air

onditio

ning (A/C). This is the coldest setting.

Recirculation Button

Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the

ystem be

tween recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside

conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all

modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may be unavailable if conditions exist that could create

fogging on the inside of the windshield.

The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the

mode con

trol selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and

window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.

Rear Defrost Button

Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated

outside

mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The

rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75

Heater Only

Temperature Control

Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the

knob coun

terclockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale, indicates cooler temperatures.

Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures.

Heater Only

Rotating clockwise increases the heating temperature and rotating counter clockwise decreases

eating t

emperature.

Blower Control

Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select. The

lower sp

eed increases as you move the control clockwise from the off position.

Modes Control

Turn the knob to adjust airflow distribution. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air

omes fr

om the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.

Panel Mode

Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted

o direc

t the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and

down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.

Icon Description

76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Bi-Level Mode

Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed

hrough t

he defrost and side window demister outlets.

NOTE:

Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and

rmer ai

r from the floor outlets.

Floor Mode

Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side

ndow dem

ister outlets.

Mix Mode

Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in

old or

snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for

maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.

Front Defrost Mode

Turn the Knob to the Front Defrost position. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist

outlets.

Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window

defrosting and defogging.

Icon Description

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77

Automatic Climate Controls Overview

Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls

78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79

Automatic Control Descriptions

Icon Description

MAX A/C Button

Press to change to the coldest setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the

button a

gain causes the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C

indicator turns off.

NOTE:

The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.

A/C Button

Press and release to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when A/C is on.

Recirculation Button

Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the

ystem be

tween recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside

conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all

modes. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist

that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually

without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make

the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.

AUTO Button

Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount.

Toggling th

is button causes the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes.

Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.

80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Front Defrost Button

Press and release the touchscreen button, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to change

the curr

ent airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is on. Air

comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the

blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best

windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode

button, the climate system returns to the previous setting.

Rear Defrost Button

Press and release the button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to

urn on

the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator

illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off

after ten minutes.

Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons

Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the

aceplat

e or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the

touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or

press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler

temperature settings.

Icon Description

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81

SYNC Button

Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is

illumina

ted when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger temperature

setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger’s temperature setting while in

SYNC will automatically exit this feature.

NOTE:

The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.

Faceplate Knob

Touchscreen

uttons

Blow

er Control

Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are

even bl

ower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the

faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.

• Faceplate: The bl

ower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the

lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counter-

clockwise.

• T

ouchscreen: Use th

e small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to

increase the blower setting. The blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between

the icons.

Modes Control

Press the button to adjust airflow distribution. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air

comes fr

om the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.

Icon Description

82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Panel Mode

Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted

o direc

t the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and

down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air

vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.

Bi-Level Mode

Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed

hrough t

he defrost and side window demister outlets.

NOTE:

Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and

rmer ai

r from the floor outlets.

Floor Mode

Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side

ndow dem

ister outlets.

Mix Mode

Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in

old or

snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for

maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.

Climate Control OFF Button

This button turns the Climate Control System off.

Icon Description

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83

Climate Control Functions

A/C (Air Conditioning)

The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to

manuall

y activate or deactivate the air conditioning system.

When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool dehu

midified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin. For

improve

d fuel economy, press the A/C button to turn off the

air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow

mode settings. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level,

or Floor modes.

NOTE:

• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix, Floor

or Def

rost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but the A/C

system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the

windows.

• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,

select

Defrost mode, and increase blower speed if needed.

• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than

expect

ed, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in

front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects.

Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of the radi

ator and through the condenser.

MAX A/C

MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-

mance.

Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the prior

ettings

. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is on.

In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be

adjuste

d to desired user settings. Pressing other settings will

cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected

setting and MAX A/C to exit.

Recirculation

In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to

excessi

ve window fogging. The Recirculation feature may be

unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if condi

tions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the

windshie

ld.

On systems with Manual Climate Controls, if equipped, the

Recircu

lation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to

improve window clearing operation. Recirculation is

disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting

to use Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED in the

control button to blink and then turns off.

84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped

Automatic Operation

1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO

button

on the touchscreen on the Automatic Temperature

Control (ATC) Panel.

2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would like the

system

to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger

temperature control buttons. Once the desired tempera-

ture is displayed, the system will achieve and automati-

cally maintain that comfort level.

3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not

necess

ary to change the settings. You will experience the

greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to func-

tion automatically.

NOTE:

• I

t is not necessary to move the temperature settings for

cold o

r hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts the

temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide comfort

as quickly as possible.

• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units

by sele

cting the US/Metric customer-programmable

feature. Refer to the “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”

for further information.

To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic

mode du

ring cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on

low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in

speed and transition into Auto mode.

Manual Operation Override

This system offers a full complement of manual override

feature

s. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be

turned off when the system is being used in the manual

mode.

Operating Tips

NOTE:

Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested

control

settings for various weather conditions.

Summer Operation

The engine cooling system must be protected with a

gh-qua

lity antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion

protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT

coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85

Winter Operation

To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-

mance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning

properl

y and the proper amount, type, and concentration of

coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during

Winter months is not recommended, because it may cause

window fogging.

Vacation/Storage

Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e.,

vacatio

n) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning

system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air with the

blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system

lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor

damage when the system is started again.

Window Fogging

Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,

and/or h

umid weather. To clear the windows, select Defrost

or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do not use

the Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods, as

fogging may occur.

Outside Air Intake

Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the wind-

shield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves collected

in the

air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the

plenum, they could plug the water drains. In Winter months,

make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the

heating

elements:

• Use care when washing the inside of the rear window.

Do not u

se abrasive window cleaners on the interior

surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild

washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating

elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with

warm water.

• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive

window

cleaners on the interior surface of the window.

• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Cabin Air Filter

The climate control system filters out dust and pollen from

the air

. Contact an authorized dealer to service your cabin air

filter, and to have it replaced when needed.

Operating Tips Chart

POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED

The power window switches are located on the instrument

panel below the climate controls. Push the switch downward

to open the window and upward to close the window.

The top left switch controls the left front window and the top

right swi

tch controls the right front window.

WARNING!

Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not

let chi

ldren play with power windows. Do not leave the

key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible

to children. Occupants, particularly unattended children,

can become entrapped by the windows while operating

the power window switches. Such entrapment may

result in serious injury or death.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87

Power Window Switches

NOTE:

The power window switches will remain active for up to

10 minute

s after ignition is switched to the OFF position.

Opening e

ither front door will cancel this feature.

Four-Door Models

The lower left switch controls the left rear passenger

window, an

d the lower right switch controls the right rear

passenger window.

NOTE:

There are window switches located on the rear of the center

console

for the rear passenger windows in the four-door

model.

Auto-Down Feature

The driver door power window switch and the passenger

door power window switches have an Auto-Down feature.

Push the window switch down, for a short period of time,

and release and the window will go down automatically.

To open the window part way, push the window switch

down brie

fly and release it when you want the window to

stop.

To stop the window from going all the way down during the

Auto-Down

operation, pull up on the switch briefly.

1 — Driver Side Front Window Switch

2 — Passenger Side Front Window Switch

3 — Passenger Side Rear Window Switch

4 — Window Lockout Switch

5 — Driver Side Rear Window Switch

88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pres-

sure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your

vehicle

may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down

in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal

occurrence and can be minimized by adjusting the window

opening.

DUAL TOP FOUR DOOR MODELS — IF EQUIPPED

If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top, the soft top

system will be provided in a separate box located in the rear

of the vehicle for shipping purposes only. The soft top and

the hard top are to be used independently. Your vehicle

warranty will not cover damage resulting from both tops

being installed at the same time.

For your convenience, a tool kit is provided with your

vehicle

located in the center console. This kit includes the

necessary tools required for the operations described in the

following sections. All pieces fit into the ratchet for easy use.

Provided Tools

WARNING!

There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is

almost cl

osed. Be sure to clear all objects from the

window before closing.

1 — #50 Torx Head Driver

2 — #40 Torx Head Driver

3 — 15mm Socket

4 — Ratchet

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89

Removing The Soft Top — Four Door Models

1. Fully lower the soft top. Refer to “Soft Top — Four Door

Models” in this section.

2. Make sure the lift assist mechanism on both the left and

right si

des are in the “lock” position, and an audible

“click” is heard when pushing down on the #1 bow from

each of the lift assist mechanisms before removing.

Lock Position

CAUTION!

Failure to follow the next steps could result in damage to

the Soft

Top or vehicle.

90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

3. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver and ratchet,

unscrew the two Torx head screws on each lift assist

mechanism, then lift the mechanism up and away from

the vehicle.

Lift Assist Mechanism

4. Pull the release lever on top of the rail rearward to release

the side link from the track.

Release Lever Location

1 — Lock Position

2 — Torx Head Screw

3 — Torx Head Screw

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91

Pull To Release Top From Track

5. Repeat on the opposite side.

6. Utili

zing two people, lift the soft top up and away from

the veh

icle, careful to avoid the vehicle’s sport bar, trim,

and tire carrier. Store the soft top in a safe, clean, and dry

location.

Utilize Two People To Remove Soft Top

92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

7. Using the provided #50 Torx head driver and ratchet,

unscrew the Torx screw on both rear corners of the

vehicle, removing the retainers.

Remove Rear Retainers

Installing The Soft Top — Four Door Models

NOTE:

The following procedures are for first time set up only. For

future s

oft top procedures, refer to “Soft Top” in this section.

1. Locate and remove the following items prior to hard top

removal

• Right and left side door rails

• Eight d

oor frame attachment Torx head screws

• Right a

nd left side quarter windows

• Rear wi

ndow

• Swing gat

e bar

2. Remov

e the hard top. Refer to “Rear Hard Top Removal”

in this

section.

3. Install the door rails, starting with the front, followed by the

rear on

each side. Refer to “Door Frame Installation — Four

Door Models” in this section for instructions and appro

priate torque specifications for the door rail Torx screws.

4. I

nstall the rear retainers on each side of the rear of the

vehicle

using the provided #50 Torx head driver and

ratchet.

Refer to the table below for recommended torque

specifications.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93

Installing Rear Retainers

5. Making sure the lift assist mechanism is in the “lock”

positio

n, lift the soft top into the rear of the vehicle with

the side links pointing toward the front. Lower the lift

assist mechanisms onto its retainers on both sides (on the

inside of the sport bar).

Lock Position

CAUTION!

Do not over tighten Torx screws. Damage to the retainers

ill occu

Torque

Specific

ation For

Torx Screw

Maximum Minimum

119.5 In-lbs 150.5 In-lbs 106.2 In-lbs

13.5 N·m 17.0 N·m 12.0 N·m

CAUTION!

Failure to follow the next steps could result in damage to

the Soft

Top or vehicle.

94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Soft Top In Place

6. Using the provided #40 Torx h

ead driver and ratchet,

tighten the Torx screws by turning them clockwise.

Secure them until they are snug (refer to the table below

for recommended torque specifications), being careful

not to cross-thread the screws or overtighten. Repeat on

the opposite side.

Lift Assist Mechanism In Place

1 — Lock Position

2 — Torx Head Screw

3 — Torx Head Screw

Torque

Specification For

Torx Screws

Maximum Minimum

119.5 In-lbs 150.5 In-lbs 106.2 In-lbs

13.5 N·m 17.0 N·m 12.0 N·m

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95

(Continued)

7. While pulling the release lever on the top of the rail rear-

ward, place the side link into the guide track on the top of

the rail

then release the lever.

Step Seven

8. Unsnap and remove the black boot cover. This cover

should

be discarded. It was intended as a protective cover

for shipping only.

NOTE:

A visual instruction sheet is included with the vehicle.

9. Raise the soft top. Refer to “Raising The Soft Top” in this

section

NOTE:

Be sure the wire harness in the left rear corner is not tangled

in the s

oft top bows before you lift the top.

FREEDOM TOP THREE-PIECE MODULAR HARD

TOP — IF EQUIPPED

CAUTION!

Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip the screws if

they are

overtightened.

CAUTION!

• The hard top is not designed to carry any additional

loads, s

uch as after-market roof racks, spare tires,

building materials, hunting or camping supplies, etc.

For optional Mopar accessory roof racks, refer to the

Roof Luggage Rack portion of this Owner’s Manual for

additional information.

• Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either

fully at

tached to the front header, sport bar, and body

side or fully removed.

96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Front Panel(s) Removal

NOTE:

The left side panel must be removed before removing the

right sid

e panel.

1. Fold down the sun visor against the windshield.

2. Turn

the three L-shaped locks on the left side panel (one

at the

front, the rear, and outside), unlocking them from

the roof.

Roof Panel Lock Locations

3. Unlatch the left side header panel latch located at the top

of the

windshield.

Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water

damage, s

tains or mildew:

• It is recommended that the top be free of water prior to

panel r

emoval. Removing the top, opening a door or

lowering a window while the top is wet may allow

water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.

• The hard top assembly must be positioned properly to

ensure

sealing. Improper installation can cause water to

leak into the vehicle’s interior.

• Careless handling and storage of the removable roof

panels

may damage the seals, causing water to leak into

the vehicle’s interior.

• The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to

ensure

sealing. Improper installation can cause water to

leak into the vehicle’s interior.

CAUTION! (Continued)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97

Header Panel Latch Locations

4. Remove the left side panel.

5. Repea

t the steps above to remove the right side panel.

Freedom Top Storage Bag

Vehicles equipped with a Freedom Top Modular Hard Top,

come with a Freedom Top storage bag that allows you to

store your Freedom Top panels. The storage bag contains

two compartments and fits behind the rear seat.

Lay the bag for the Freedom Top panels down so the loops

and hooks

are facing upward. Unzip the bag and fold back

the outer flap.

NOTE:

Ensure the front Freedom Top panel latch is closed prior to

insertin

g the panel into the Freedom Top bag.

1. Insert the left side Freedom Top panel into the bag with

the lat

ches facing upward.

Left Panel — Latches Facing Upward

1 — Header Panel Latches

2 — Unlatched Position

98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

2. Unfold the black panel divider (ensure the divider is

laying flat).

Fold Divider Over Left Panel

3. Insert the right side Freedom Top panel into the bag with

the lat

ches facing downward.

Right Panel — Latches Facing Downward

NOTE:

Ensure the front Freedom Top panel latch is closed prior to

nsertin

g the panel into the bag.

4. Unfold the outer flap and zip the Freedom Top bag

closed.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99

Storage Bag Closed

5. Lift the Freedom Top bag into the vehicle with the hooks

and str

aps facing the back of the rear seat. Attach the clip

at the bottom of the bag to the child restraint anchorage,

located at the base of the rear seat.

6. Wrap the upper strap around the rear head restraints and

loop th

e strap through the buckle. Pull on the strap to

tighten the Freedom Top bag securely against the rear

seat.

Front Panel(s) Installation

1. Set the right side panel on the windshield frame with the

locating pin in the front receiver mounting hole followed

by the left side panel, making sure there is no overhang.

Also, make sure that the panels are sitting flush with the

body.

2. Reinstall the panel(s) using the same steps for removal in

reverse

order.

NOTE:

To prevent water leaks, the seals and Freedom Top Panels

should b

e clear of any dust and debris prior to reinstallation.

Rear Hard Top Removal

1. Remove both front panels. Refer to “Front Panel(s)

Removal” in this section.

2. Open both doors.

100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

3. Using the provided #50 Torx head driver and ratchet,

remove the two Torx head screws that secure the hard top

at the B-pillar (near the top of the front doors).

Step Three

4. Remove the six Torx head screws that secure the hard top

to the vehicle (along the interior bodyside — three screws

on each side) using the #50

Torx head driver.

Step Four

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101

5. Open the swing gate all the way to ensure clearance of the

rear window glass. Lift the rear window glass.

Step Five

6. Locate the wire harness and washer hose on the left rear

inside corner of the vehicle.

Wire Harness

102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

7. Release the locking tab by pushing it downward.

Push Locking Tab Downward

8. To remove the wiring harness, push the tab inward while

pulling downward to disconnect.

Push Tab Inward

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103

Pull Wiring Harness To Separate

9. To remove the washer hose, push the release button on

hose c

onnector, and pull downward.

Release Button On Hose

10. Lower the rear window, and close the swing gate.

11. Remove the hard top from the vehicle. Place the hard top

on a s

oft surface to prevent damage.

CAUTION!

The removal of the Freedom Top requires four adults

located

on each corner. Failure to follow this caution

could damage the Freedom Top.

104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Hard Top Installation

NOTE:

If the door frames are installed from soft top usage, they

must be

removed prior to installation of the hard top. Refer

to “Door Frame” in this section for installation procedures.

1. Inspect the hard top seals for damage and replace if

necess

ary.

2. Install the hard top using the same steps for removal in

revers

e order.

Make sure that the hard top is sitting flush with the body

at the

sides and check to ensure that there is a uniform

gap between the lift glass and hard top.

NOTE:

The Torx fasteners that attach the hard top to the body

should

be torqued as follows using the provided #50 Torx

head dr

iver and ratchet:

• Hard top to B-pillar: 119 in-lb

+/- 23 in-lb (13.5 N·m +/

- 2.7 N·m)

• Hard top to J-rail: 154 in-lb

+/- 30 in-lb (17.5 N·m +/-

3.5 N·m)

DOOR FRAME

WARNING!

• Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the door

frame(

s) removed as you will lose the protection that

they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use

during off-road operation only.

• Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the

doors re

moved as you will lose the protection that they

can provide. This procedure is furnished for use during

off-road operation only.

CAUTION!

• O

pening a door or lowering a window while the top is

wet ma

y allow water to drip into the vehicle's interior.

• Careless handling and storage of the removable door

frame(

s) may damage the seals, causing water to leak

into the vehicle's interior.

• The door frame(s) must be positioned properly to

ensure

sealing. Improper installation can cause water to

leak into the vehicle's interior.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105

Door Frame Removal

NOTE:

In four door models, the rear door frames must be removed

first, f

ollowed by the front door frames.

1. Using the provided #40 Torx h

ead driver and ratchet,

loosen the Torx screws located on the underside of each

door frame (two per door).

Door Frame Screw Locations

2. Once all the way loosened, remove the screws by pulling

downward.

OTE:

Screws will not fall out once completely loose, as they are

held in

place by an internal mechanism.

Remove Screws From Below Frame

106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

(Continued)

3. Lift the frame upward, removing it from the vehicle.

Step Three

4. Store screws in a secure location.

5. Repea

t procedure on the front door frame (four door

models)

Door Frame Installation Four Door Models — If

Equipped

1. Install the front door rail first.

2. Carefully place the front door rail in the rubber seal at the

top of

the windshield, and line up the holes for the Torx

head screws (two for each door).

3. Swing the frame bracket around the side of the rail, and

insert

the screws from underneath. Tighten with #40 Torx

head dri

ver until they are snug, being careful not to

cross-thread the screws or overtighten. Refer to the table

below for the appropriate torque specifications for the

door rail screws.

WARNING!

• Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the door

frame(s

) removed as you will lose the protection that

they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use

during off-road operation only.

• Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with the

doors removed as you will lose the protection that they

can provide. This procedure is furnished for use during

off-road operation only.

WARNING! (Continued)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 107

Step Three

4. Set the rear door frame pin into the hole on top of the

body sid

e, just behind the rear door opening.

Step Four

Torque

pecific

ation For

Torx Screws

Maximum Minimum

8.8 In-lbs 11.0 In-lbs 6.6 In-lbs

12 N·m 15 N·m 9 N·m

CAUTION!

Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip the screws if

they are

overtightened.

108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

5. Carefully position the top of the door frame onto the rear

of the front door rail, making sure rubber seals lay flat.

Ensure the seals are installed correctly to avoid water

leaks.

Position Of Frame Above Door

6. Swing the frame bracket around the side of the rail, and

insert the screws from underneath. Tighten with #40 Torx

head dri

ver until they are snug, being careful not to

cross-thread the screws or overtighten. Refer to the table

above for the appropriate torque specifications for the

door rail screws.

Step Six

1 — Front Door Rail

2 — Rear Door Frame

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 109

Door Frame Installation Two Door Models — If

Equipped

1. Carefully place the front door rail in the rubber seal at the

top of the windshield, and line up the holes for the Torx

head screws (two for each door).

2. Swing the frame bracket around the side of the rail, and

insert

the screws from underneath. Tighten with #40 Torx

head dri

ver until they are snug, being careful not to

cross-thread the screws or overtighten. Refer to the table

below for the appropriate torque specifications for the

door rail screws.

Step Two

Torque

Specific

ation For

Torx Screws

Maximum Minimum

8.8 In-lbs 11.0 In-lbs 6.6 In-lbs

12 N·m 15 N·m 9 N·m

CAUTION!

Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip the screws if

they are

overtightened.

110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

SOFT TOP TWO DOOR MODELS — IF EQUIPPED

If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or the top has

been folded down for a period of time, the top will appear to

have shrunk when you raise it, making it difficult to put up.

This is caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl or acrylic

materials of the fabric top.

Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily on the top

fabric.

The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and the

top can then be installed. If the temperature is 41°F (5°C) or

below, do not attempt to put the top down or roll the rear

or side curtains.

WARNING!

• Do not drive the vehicle with the rear window up/

removed

unless the quarter windows are also removed.

Dangerous exhaust gases could enter the vehicle

causing harm to the driver and passengers.

• The fabric quarter windows and fabric top are designed

only for

protection against the elements. Do not rely on

them to contain occupants within the vehicle or to

protect against injury during an accident. Remember,

always wear seat belts.

• Make sure hands and fingers are clear of all pinch

points

when installing and removing the soft tops. The

lift assist mechanism and side bows may cause serious

injury if fingers or hands get caught in between.

CAUTION!

The soft top is not designed to carry any additional loads

such as

roof racks, spare tires, building, hunting, or

camping supplies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it was not

designed as a structural member of the vehicle and, thus,

cannot properly carry any additional loads other than

environmental (rain, snow, etc.).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 111

(Continued)

CAUTION!

• Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car wash.

Window

scratches and wax build up may result.

• Do not lower the top when the temperature is below

41°F (5

°C). Damage to the top may result.

• Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either

fully a

ttached to the windshield frame, or fully

lowered.

• Do not lower the top with the windows installed.

Window

and top damage may occur.

• Refer to “Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models” in

“Bodywork

” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for

further information. It contains important information

on cleaning and caring for your vehicle's fabric top.

• Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to pry or force

any of t

he clamps, clips, or retainers securing the soft

top. Do not force or pry the soft top framework when

opening or closing. Damage to the top may result.

Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water

damage, stains or mildew on the top material:

• It is recommended that the top be free of water prior to

opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or

lowering a window while the top is wet may allow

water to drip into the vehicle's interior.

• Careless handling and storage of the soft top may

damage

the seals, causing water to leak into the

vehicle's interior.

• The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure

sealin

g. Improper installation can cause water to leak

into the vehicle's interior.

CAUTION! (Continued)

112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Lowering The Soft Top

Side View Top And Components

1 — #1 Bow 6 — #6 Bow

2 — #2 Bow 7 — Rear Quarter Window

3 — #3 Bow 8 — Lower Window Retainer

4 — #4 Bow 9 — Front Window Retainer

5 — #5 Bow

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 113

Rear View Top And Components

1 — Rear Window Retainer Attachment Points

2 — Quarter Window Pillars

3 — Swing Gate Bar Retainers

114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

The rear window and rear quarter windows must be r

emoved

before lowering the soft top to prevent damage to the top.

Clean the side and rear windows before removal to assist in

preventing scratching during removal of the soft top. If the

plastic retainers are difficult to operate due to road dust, etc.,

clean them with a mild soap solution and a small brush.

Cleaning products are available through an authorized dealer.

Remove The Rear Window:

1. With the swing gate open, remove the rear window’s

plastic

retainers from the lower right and left corners.

Step One

2. G

rasp the swing gate bar, rotate it outward and upward

releasi

ng it from both the right and left retainers. Store in

a safe location.

Step Two (Left Side Shown)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 115

3. While holding the window in place, slide the tailgate bar

to the left separating it from the rear window. Store

windows in soft top window bag, or a safe location.

Step Three

4. Remove the plastic retainers from both quarter window

pillars.

Step Four

116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

5. While keeping the rear window level, slide to the left

until it is completely separate from its retainer. Do not

pull downward while removing the rear window.

Damage to the retainer could result.

Step Five

Remove The Right And Left Quarter Windows:

1. Through the rear opening, push the bottom corner

outward

and release tab from the bottom of the window

pillar.

Step One

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 117

2. Undo the hook-and-loop fastener located at the upper

front corner of each quarter window.

Hook-And-Loop Fastener Location

3. Starting at the rear of the vehicle, remove plastic retainer

from along the bottom of the window moving toward the

front of the vehicle.

Step Three

118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

4. Remove plastic retainer from bottom to top of the

window.

Step Four

5. While keeping the window level, slide rearward until it is

complet

ely separate from its retainer. Do not pull down-

ward while removing the window. Damage to the

etainer

could result.

Step Five

6. Store in soft window bag or a safe location.

NOTE:

Ref

er to “Soft Top Window Storage Bag” in this section for

nformat

ion on the use of the storage bag.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 119

Lowering The Soft Top Into Sunrider Position

1. After removing the rear window and quarter panel

windows,

move to the front of the vehicle.

2. Fo

ld both sun visors forward against the windshield.

. Relea

se the header latches from the crossbar by pulling

the han

dle downward. Make sure the hook is disengaged

from its receiver.

Step Three

4. From both the left and right sides, lift up on the #1 Bow

of the

soft top to start the operation.

Step Four

120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

5. Move to the side of the vehicle and use the side link to

fold the soft top rearward into the Sunrider position.

Step Five

NOTE:

If leaving the soft top in the Sunrider position, secure the top

by using t

he two hook-and-loop fasteners provided in the

center console.

Secured Top When In Sunrider Position

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 121

Lowering The Soft Top Into Fully Lowered Position

1. From the Sunrider position, remove straps if previously

secured

and move to the rear of the vehicle.

2. L

ocate the Sunrider latch beneath the #6 Bow of the soft

op on

the left side.

Sunrider Latch Beneath #6 Bow

3. P

ull the latch downward to release the top, and allow the

soft to

p to slide rearward freely in the guide tracks to the

stowed position.

Step Three

CAUTION!

Failure to follow the next steps could result in damage to

the Soft

Top or vehicle.

122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

4. While pushing downward slightly on the folded soft top,

slide the lock lever on the left and right side lift assist

mechanisms to the “lock” position.

Step Four

Lock Position

5. Once the lock is in the “lock” position, push downward

on each

side of the folded soft top to ensure it is secure.

An audible “click” may be heard.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 123

NOTE:

Secure the top by using the two hook-and-loop fasteners

provided

in the center console.

Secured Top When In Fully Lowered Position

Soft Top Window Storage Bag

To safely store the soft top rear window, and rear quarter

windows, proceed as follows:

NOTE:

The swing gate bar, once removed from the rear window,

oes not st

ore in the soft window storage bag.

1. With the bag opened completely, fold both fabric dividers

downward

and lay the first quarter window all the way

to the right side with the inside of the window facing

downward and the window pillar to the outside.

NOTE:

The quarter windows are marked “1” and “2” on the inside

f the wi

ndow pillar.

Window Pillar Number Location

124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Step One

2. Fold the first divider upward, covering the first quarter

window.

Ste

p Two

1 — Quarter Window Facing Downward

2 — Both Dividers Folded Down

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 125

3. Lay the second quarter window on top of the first divider

all the way to the left side with the inside of the window

facing downward and the window pillar to the outside.

Step Three

4. Fold the second divider upward, covering the second

quarter window.

Step Four

1 — Quarter Window Facing Downward

2 — Second Divider Folded Down

126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

5. Lay the rear window on top of the second divider.

Step Five

6. Close the storage bag and store in a safe location.

Step Six

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 127

Raising The Soft Top

Raising The Soft Top From The Fully Lowered Position

1. From the fully lowered position, remove straps if previ-

ously se

cured.

2. W

hile pushing down on the rear of the top, slide the lock

lever o

n the left and right side Lift Assist Mechanisms to

the “unlock” position.

Push Down While Unlocking

Unlocked Position

CAUTION!

Failure to follow the next steps could result in damage to

he Soft

Top or vehicle.

128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

3. Push up and forward from the #5 Bow along the guide

track until it locks into the Sunrider position with an

audible “click”.

Step Three

4. Gently pull rearward on the #6 Bow to ensure the top is

locked i

n the Sunrider position.

5. Using the side link, lift and push the soft top toward the

front o

f the vehicle guiding the top into the closed posi-

tion.

Side Link Location

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 129

Lower Top Into Closed Position

6. From inside the vehicle, pull the handle on the header

latch d

ownward to engage the hook into its receiver.

Repeat on the other side.

Step Six

130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

7. Pull the handle back upward while squeezing the latch

plate, locking the latch into place.

Step Seven

Install The Right And Left Quarter Windows

1. From the rear of the vehicle, guide the top of the window

into th

e retainer and slide forward while keeping the

window level. Repeat on the other side.

Step One

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 131

2. Place the top of the quarter window pillar into the top

cover, and insert the bottom tab into the clip.

Step Two

CAUTION!

Failure to follow all Quarter Window Install steps could

result i

n damage to the Soft Top or vehicle.

132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

3. Engage the retainers on the front of the windows,

ensuring they are fully engaged, followed by the retainers

along the bottom of the windows.

Fully Engage Quarter Window Retainers

NOTE:

It is critical that t

he retainers are fully engaged before the

vehicle resumes motion.

4. Tuck Flap 1 between Flap 2 and Flap 3 on Soft Top Cover.

Flaps On

Soft Top Cover

1 — Retainer At Front Of Quarter Window

2 — Retainer At Bottom Of Quarter Window

1 — Flap 1

2 — Flap 2

3 — Flap 3

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 133

5. Secure the hook-and-loop fastener at the upper front

corner of each quarter window by pressing firmly.

Firmly Secure Hook-And-Loop Fastener

Install The Rear Window

1. Guide the rear window into the retainer from left to right

while kee

ping the window level.

Step One

134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

2. Insert the tailgate bar into the retainers at the bottom of

the window from left to the right.

Step Two

3. Rotate the swing gate bar into the left and right side

retainers.

Step Three

4. Line up the rear window to the right si

de quarter

window first, and engage the plastic retainers.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 135

5. Repeat with the left side quarter window.

Step Five

6. Engage the rear window retainers in the lower right and

left corners.

Step Six

136 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

SOFT TOP FOUR DOOR MODELS — IF EQUIPPED

If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or the top has

been folded down for a period of time, the top will appear to

have shrunk when you raise it, making it difficult to put up.

This is caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl or acrylic

materials of the fabric top.

Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily on the top

fabric.

The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and the

top can then be installed. If the temperature is 41°F (5°C) or

below, do not attempt to put the top down or roll the rear

or side curtains.

WARNING!

• Do not drive the vehicle with the rear window up/

removed

unless the quarter windows are also removed.

Dangerous exhaust gases could enter the vehicle

causing harm to the driver and passengers.

• The fabric quarter windows and fabric top are designed

only for

protection against the elements. Do not rely on

them to contain occupants within the vehicle or to

protect against injury during an accident. Remember,

always wear seat belts.

• Make sure hands and fingers are clear of all pinch

points

when installing and removing the soft tops. The

lift assist mechanism and side bows may cause serious

injury if fingers or hands get caught in between.

CAUTION!

The soft top is not designed to carry any additional loads

such as

roof racks, spare tires, building, hunting, or

camping supplies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it was not

designed as a structural member of the vehicle and, thus,

cannot properly carry any additional loads other than

environmental (rain, snow, etc.).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 137

(Continued)

CAUTION!

• Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car wash.

Window

scratches and wax build up may result.

• Do not lower the top when the temperature is below

41°F (5

°C). Damage to the top may result.

• Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either

fully a

ttached to the windshield frame, or fully

lowered.

• Do not lower the top with the windows installed.

Window

and top damage may occur.

• Refer to “Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models” in

“Bodywork

” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for

further information. It contains important information

on cleaning and caring for your vehicle's fabric top.

• Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to pry or force

any of t

he clamps, clips, or retainers securing the soft

top. Do not force or pry the soft top framework when

opening or closing. Damage to the top may result.

Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water

damage, stains or mildew on the top material:

• It is recommended that the top be free of water prior to

opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or

lowering a window while the top is wet may allow

water to drip into the vehicle's interior.

• Careless handling and storage of the soft top may

damage

the seals, causing water to leak into the

vehicle's interior.

• The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure

sealin

g. Improper installation can cause water to leak

into the vehicle's interior.

CAUTION! (Continued)

138 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Lowering The Soft Top

Side View Top And Components

1 — #1 Bow 6 — #6 Bow

2 — #2 Bow 7 — Rear Quarter Window

3 — #3 Bow 8 — Lower Window Retainer

4 — #4 Bow 9 — Front Window Retainer

5 — #5 Bow

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 139

Rear View Top And Components

1 — Rear Window Retainer Attachment Points

2 — Quarter Window Pillars

3 — Swing Gate Bar Retainers

140 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

The rear window and rear quarter windows must be rem

oved

before lowering the soft top to prevent damage to the top. Clean

side and rear windows before removal to assist in preventing

scratching during removal of the soft top. If the plastic retainers

are difficult to operate due to road dust, etc., clean them with a

mild soap solution and a small brush. Cleaning products are

available through your authorized dealer.

Remove The Rear Window:

1. With the swing gate open, remove the rear window’s

plastic

retainers from the lower right and left corners.

Step One

2. G

rasp the swing gate bar, rotate it outward and upward

releasi

ng it from both the right and left retainers.

Step Two (Left Side Shown)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 141

3. While holding the window in place, slide the tailgate bar

to the left separating it from the rear window. Store in soft

window bag, or a safe location.

Step Three

4. Remove the plastic retainers from both quarter window

pillars.

Step Four

142 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

5. While keeping the rear window level, slide to the left

until it is completely separate from its retainer. Do not

pull downward while removing the rear window.

Damage to the retainer could result.

Step Five

Remove The Right And Left Quarter Windows:

1. Through the rear opening, push the bottom corner

outward

and release tab from the bottom of the window

pillar.

Step One

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 143

2. Undo the hook-and-loop fastener located at the upper

front corner of each quarter window.

Hook-And-Loop Fastener Location

3. Starting at the rear of the vehicle, remove plastic retainer

from along the bottom of the window moving toward the

front of the vehicle.

Step Three

144 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

4. Remove plastic retainer from the bottom to the top of the

front window.

Step Four

5. While keeping the window level, slide rearward until it is

complet

ely separate from its retainer. Do not pull down-

ward while removing the window. Damage to the

etainer

could result.

Step Five

6. Store in soft window bag or a safe location.

NOTE:

Ref

er to “Soft Top Window Storage Bag” in this section for

nformat

ion on the use of the storage bag.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 145

Lowering The Soft Top Into Sunrider Position

1. After removing the rear window and quarter panel

windows,

move to the front of the vehicle.

2. Fo

ld both sun visors forward against the windshield.

. Relea

se the header latches from the crossbar by pulling

the han

dle downward. Make sure the hook is disengaged

from its receiver.

Step Three

4. From both the left and right sides, lift up on the #1 Bow

of the

soft top to start the operation.

Step Four

146 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

5. Move to the side of the vehicle and use the side link to

fold the soft top rearward into the Sunrider position.

Step Five

NOTE:

If leaving the soft top in the Sunrider position, secure the top

by using t

he two hook-and-loop fasteners provided in the

center console.

Secured Top When In Sunrider Position

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 147

Lowering The Soft Top Into Fully Lowered Position

1. From the Sunrider position, remove straps if previously

secured

and move to the rear of the vehicle.

2. L

ocate the Sunrider latch beneath the #6 Bow of the soft

op on

the left side.

Sunrider Latch Beneath #6 Bow

3. P

ull the latch to release the top, and allow the soft top to

slide r

earward freely in the guide tracks to the stowed

position.

Step Three

CAUTION!

Failure to follow the next steps could result in damage to

the Soft

Top or vehicle.

148 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

4. While pushing downward slightly on the folded soft top,

slide the lock lever on the left and right side lift assist

mechanisms to the “lock” position.

Step Four (Locked Position)

5. Once the lock is in the “lock” position, push downward

on each side of the folded soft top to ensure it is secure.

An audible “click” may be heard.

Step Five

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 149

NOTE:

Secure the top by using the two hook-and-loop fasteners

provided

in the center console.

Secured Top When In Fully Lowered Position

Raising The Soft Top

Raising The Soft Top From The Fully Lowered Position

1. From the fully lowered position, remove straps if previ-

ously se

cured.

2. W

hile pushing down on the rear of the top, slide the lock

lever o

n the left and right side Lift Assist Mechanisms to

the “unlock” position.

Unlocked Lift Assist Mechanism

CAUTION!

Failure to follow the next steps could result in damage to

the Soft

Top or vehicle.

150 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

3. Push up and forward from the #5 Bow along the guide

track until it locks into the Sunrider position with an

audible “click”.

Step Three

4. Gently pull rearward on the #6 Bow to ensure the top is

locked i

n the Sunrider position.

5. Using the side link, lift and push the soft top toward the

front o

f the vehicle manually guiding the top into the

closed position.

Lift From Side Link

1 — Unlocked Position

2 — #5 Bow Location

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 151

Lower Top Into Closed Position

6. From inside the vehicle, pull the handle on the header

latch d

ownward to engage the hook into its receiver.

Repeat on the other side.

Step Six

152 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

7. Pull the handle back upward while squeezing the hook,

locking the latch into place.

Step Seven

Install The Right And Left Quarter Windows

1. From the rear of the vehicle, guide the top of the window

into th

e retainer and slide forward while keeping the

window level. Repeat on the other side.

Step One

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 153

2. Place the top of the quarter window pillar into the top

cover, and insert the bottom tab into the clip.

Step Two

CAUTION!

Failure to follow all Quarter Window Install steps could

result i

n damage to the Soft Top or vehicle.

154 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

3. Engage the retainers on the front of the windows,

ensuring they are fully engaged, followed by the retainers

along the bottom of the windows.

Fully Engage Quarter Window Retainers

NOTE:

It is critical that t

he retainers are fully engaged before the

vehicle resumes motion.

4. Secure the hook-and-loop fastener at the upper front

corner

of each quarter window by pressing firmly.

Firmly Secure Hook-And-Loop Fastener

1 — Retainer At Front Of Quarter Window

2 — Retainer At Bottom Of Quarter Window

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 155

Install The Rear Window

1. Guide the rear window into the retainer from left to right

while kee

ping the window level.

Step One

2. Insert the tailgate bar into the retainers at the bottom of

the wind

ow from left to the right.

Step Two

156 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

3. Rotate the swing gate bar into the left and right side

retainers.

Step Three

4. Line up the rear window to the right si

de quarter

window first, and engage the plastic retainers.

5. Repeat with the left side quarter window.

Step Five

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 157

6. Engage the rear window retainers in the lower right and

left corners.

Step Six

NOTE:

For information on removing your soft top, refer to

“Removin

g The Soft Top — Four Door Models” in “Getting

To Know Your Vehicle”.

POWER SLIDING TOP — IF EQUIPPED

If your vehicle is equipped with a Power Sliding Top, the

control switch can be found on the front trim panel, to the

right of the driver’s side sun visor.

Power Sliding Top Control Switch

CAUTION!

Lowering of the windshield is NOT recommended in

vehicles

equipped with a Power Sliding Top. Damage

will occur to the top as well as the header seal.

1 — Open Switch

2 — Close Switch

158 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

• The Power Top is non-removable. If desired, the rear

quarte

r windows can be removed and stored in provided

storage bags. Refer to “Quarter Window Removal” in this

section for further information.

• The Power Top will not open in temperatures below –4°F

(-20°C

). However, if it is opened at a higher temperature, it

can be closed at temperatures above –40°F (-40°C).

• The Power Top will not operate at vehicle speeds above

60 mph

(96 km/h).

NOTE:

A slight pause in audio may be heard when opening and

losing

the Power Sliding Top as a result of the Uconnect

system switching between Power Top Closed and Power

Top Open audio modes.

WARNING!

• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with

access

to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key fob

in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil

dren. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped

with Ke

yless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN

mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children,

can become entrapped by the power top while oper

ating the power top switch. Such entrapment may

esult

in serious injury or death.

• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown

from a

vehicle with an open power top. You could also

be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat

belt properly and make sure all passengers are also

properly secured.

• Do not allow small children to operate the power top.

Never a

llow your fingers, other body parts, or any

object, to project through the power top opening.

Injury may result.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 159

Opening The Power Top

Express Mode

Push the open switch and release it within one-half second.

The powe

r top will open automatically to the open position.

This is called “Express Open”. During Express Open opera

tion, any movement of the switch will stop the power top.

Manual Mode

To open the power top manually, push and hold the open

switch.

The power top will stop automatically at the open

position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement.

The power top will remain in a partially opened position

until the switch is pushed and held again.

Closing The Power Top

Express Mode

Push the close switch and release it within one-half second.

The power top will close fully and stop automatically. This is

called “Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any

movement of the switch will stop the power top.

Manual Mode

To close the power top manually, push and hold the close

switch.

The power top will move forward and automatically

stop at the fully closed position. Any release of the switch

will stop the movement. The power top will remain in a

partially closed position until the switch is pushed and held

again.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pres-

sure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your

vehicle

may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down,

or the power top in certain open or partially open positions.

This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the

buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then open the

front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting.

If the buffeting occurs with the power top open, adjust the

power top opening to minimize the buffeting or open any

window.

160 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Pinch Protect Feature

This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the

power top during Express Close operation. If an obstruction

in the path of the power top is detected, the power top will

automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.

Next, push the close switch and release to Express Close.

NOTE:

• T

he Power Sliding Top may reverse motion if closing

during

a severe headwind. If this occurs, push the Power

Sliding Top switch again to close the top completely.

• If three consecutive power top close attempts result in

Pinch

Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the

power top must be closed in Manual Mode.

Power Top Maintenance

Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the

quarter window glass panel.

Refer to “Bodywork” in Servicing And Maintenance” for

further

information. It contains important information on

cleaning and caring for your vehicle.

Ignition Off Operation

The power top switch can remain active in Accessory Delay

for up to approximately 10 minutes after the vehicle’s igni-

tion is placed to the Off position. Opening either front door

ll can

cel this feature.

NOTE:

Ignition Off time is programmable through the Uconnect

ystem.

Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer Program-

mable Features” in “Multimedia” for further information.

WARNING!

There is no anti-pinch protection when the power top is

almost c

losed. To avoid personal injury be sure to clear

your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the top’s

path before closing.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 161

Relearn Procedure

For vehicles equipped with a power top, there is a relearn

procedure that allows you to calibrate the power top when

the “Express Mode” stops working. To reset the power top,

follow these steps:

1. Place the ignition in the RUN position, and start the

vehicl

NOTE:

The engine must be running to perform the relearn proce-

dure.

2. E

nsure the power top is in the fully closed position.

3. Push

and hold the Close switch for 10 seconds. This will

put th

e power top into calibration mode.

4. Continue holding down the close button while the top

goes fu

lly open and then back to fully close.

5. Once the power top has stopped in the fully closed posi-

tion,

release the close button. The power top is now reset

and rea

dy to use.

NOTE:

If the close button is released anytime during the relearning

rocess

, the relearn may not be complete, and the procedure

must be repeated.

Rear Quarter Window Removal

On vehicles equipped with a Power Sliding Top, the rear

quarter windows can be removed. To remove these

windows, follow the procedure below:

1. Open the swing gate, and lift the rear window.

2. Open

both side doors nearest the quarter windows.

3. Loca

te the rear quarter window latches (two on each

window)

on the interior of the windows.

4. Rotate the left hand side latch clockwi

se to release.

162 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

5. Rotate the right hand side latch counterclockwise to

release.

Rear Quarter Window Release Latches

6. Fr

om the outside of the vehicle, lift each window upward

and away

from the vehicle.

NOTE:

Do not pull down or apply any weight to the windows after

the latc

hes are released. Damage could result to the pins

holding the windows in place.

Lift Quarter Window Upward And Outward

1 — Rotate Left Handle Clockwise

2 — Rotate Right Handle Counterclockwise

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 163

Quarter Window Pins Location

7. Store the rear quarter windows in the provided storage

bag and

keep in a safe location, or securely fasten the bag

to the rear seat.

Quarter Window Storage Bag

To use the storage bags for the rear quarter windows,

proceed

as follows:

1. W

ith the bag completely open and the fabric divider

aised,

place the first quarter window with the latches

facing outward into the foam insert. Fold divider over the

window once placed inside.

Step One

1 — Bag Open With Divider Raised

2 — Lower Divider Over Window (Latches Facing Outward)

164 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

2. Place the second window into the foam insert with the

latches facing outward. Fully close the bag.

NOTE:

Once both windows are placed inside the bag, the outside of

the windo

ws will be facing each other with all latches facing

the outside of the bag.

Step Two

3. Store the bag in a safe location, or in the cargo area of the

vehicle

by securing the bag in the vehicle’s cargo area.

This is done by attaching the straps at the top of the bag

to the rear head restraints, as well as attaching the clips at

the bottom of the bag to the forward most cargo hooks on

the load floor.

Step Three

1 — Second Window Placed Over Divider

2 — Fully Closed Bag

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 165

(Continued)

FOLDING WINDSHIELD

The fold-down windshield on your vehicle is a structural

element that can provide some protection in some accidents.

The windshield also provides some protection against

weather, road debris and intrusion of small branches and

other objects.

Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the windshield

down, as

you lose the protection this structural element can

provide.

If required for certain off-road uses, the windshield can be

folded

down. However, the protection afforded by the wind-

shield is then lost. If you fold down the windshield, drive

lowly an

d cautiously. It is recommended that the speed of

the vehicle be limited to 10

mph (16 km/h), with low range

operati

on preferred if you are driving off-road with the

windshield folded down.

Raise the windshield as soon as the task that required its

removal

is completed and before you return to on-road

driving. Both you and your passengers should wear seat

belts at all times, on-road and off-road, regardless of whether

the windshield is raised or folded down.

Outside rearview mirrors are mounted on the doors. If you

choose

to remove the doors, see an authorized dealer for a

replacement cowl-mounted outside mirror. Federal law

requires outside mirrors on vehicles for on-road use.

CAUTION!

Lowering of the windshield is NOT recommended in

vehicles

equipped with a Power Sliding Top. Damage

will occur to the top as well as the header seal.

WARNING!

• Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the windshield

down.

• Do

not drive your vehicle unless the windshield is

secure

ly fastened, either up or down.

• Eye protection, such as goggles, should be worn at all

times

when the windshield is down.

• Be sure that you carefully follow the instructions for

raisin

g the windshield. Make sure that the folding

windshield, windshield wipers, side bars, and all asso

ciated hardware and fasteners are correctly and tightly

assembl

ed before driving your vehicle. Failure to

follow these instructions may prevent your vehicle

from providing you and your passengers’ protection in

some accidents.

166 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Lowering The Windshield

1. Before completing the steps below:

• If your vehicle is equipped with a Soft Top, the top

MUST be

lowered, and the door rails must be removed

prior to lowering the windshield.

• If your vehicle is equipped with a Hard Top, the

Freedom

Panels MUST be removed prior to lowering

the windshield.

• Refer to the “Soft Top,” “Door Frame,” and “Freedom

Top” in

structions in this section for more information.

2. Manually remove the protective caps over the windshield

wiper he

x bolts.

Protective Cap Over Wiper Bolt

3. Using the provided 15mm socket, remove the two hex

bolts a

nd remove the wiper arms.

4. Move to the inside of the vehicle and lower both sun

visors.

•

If you remove the doors, store them outside the vehicle.

In the

event of an accident, a loose door may cause

personal injury.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow this step will cause damage to the

vehicle’s

header seal.

WARNING! (Continued)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 167

5. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver, remove the

four Torx screws located along the interior of the wind-

shield.

Interior Torx Screw Locations

NOTE:

Store all of the mounting bolts in their original threaded

oles an

d tighten for safekeeping.

6. Lower the windshield gently until it contacts the footman

loop bu

mpers (if equipped).

Footman Loop Bumpers

7. Secure the windshield by passing a cinch strap through

the foo

tman loops on either side of the hood and on the

windshield frame. Tighten the strap to secure the wind

shield in place.

1 — Bumper

2 — Footman Loop

3 — Washer Nozzle

CAUTION!

Do Not Overtighten! Damage to the windshield could result.

168 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Raising The Windshield

1. Release the strap that secured the windshield in the

lowered position.

2. Raise the windshield.

3. Using

the provided #40 Torx h

ead driver, reinstall the

four Torx screws located along the interior of the wind-

shield. Secure them until they are snug, being careful not

o cross

-thread the screws or overtighten.

Interior Torx Screw Locations

4. Reinstall the windshield wiper arms using the provided

15 mm so

cket. First, align the tips of the blade to the “T”

mark in t

he glass. Then, while holding the arm in that

position, reinstall the hex nut and tighten until snug. Be

careful not to over-tighten. Repeat for the other arm.

5. Replace the protective caps over the wiper arm hex bolts

and pus

h gently until they snap into place.

Protective Cap Over Wiper Bolt

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 169

6. After completing the steps above:

• If your vehicle is equipped with a Soft Top, reinstall the

Door Ra

ils and raise the top.

• If your vehicle is equipped with a Hard Top, reinstall

the Free

dom Panels.

HOOD

Opening The Hood

Release both the hood latches.

Hood Latch Locations

Raise the hood and locate the safety latch, located in the

middle o

f the hood opening. Push the safety latch to the left

side of the vehicle, to open the hood. You may have to push

down slightly on the hood before pushing the safety latch.

Insert the support rod into the slot on the hood.

Closing The Hood

To close the hood, remove the support rod from the hood

panel and place it in the retaining clip. Lower the hood

slowly. Secure both of the hood latches.

WARNING!

Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your

vehicle.

If the hood is not fully latched, it could open

when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.

Failure to follow this warning could result in serious

injury or death.

170 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

REAR SWING GATE

The rear swing gate can be unlocked by using the key,

Remote Keyless Entry key fob, by activating the power door

lock switches located on the front doors, or grabbing the

handle if equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go.

To open the swing gate, pull on the gate handle.

Swing Gate Handle

NOTE:

Close the rear flip-up window before attempting to close the

wing gate

(hard top models only).

NOTE:

The swing gate hinges and check strap may require cleaning

f a squ

eak can be heard when opening the swing gate. For

further information on vehicle cleaning procedures, refer to

“Interiors” in Servicing And Maintenance”.

WARNING!

Driving with the flip-up window open can allow

poisonous e

xhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your

passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the

flip-up window closed when you are operating the

vehicle.

CAUTION!

Do not push on rear wiper blade when closing the rear

flip-up window, as damage to the blade will result.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 171

Cargo Area Features

Trail Rail Cargo Organizer — If Equipped

If your vehicle is equipped with the Trail Rail system, a rail

will be f

ound built into the floor on either side of the cargo

area. Each rail contains an adjustable anchor loop that can be

used to secure cargo. The position of the adjustable anchor

loop can be adjusted by sliding the loop along the rail.

To adjust the anchor loop, push down on the center button

while sli

ding the loop along the rail to the desired position.

Release the button and move the loop slightly to the next

fixed position in the notches of the rail.

Adjustable Anchor Loop

Lift the loop to use.

Lift Adjustable Anchor Loop

GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED

HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that

operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized

gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink unit

is powered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.

The HomeLink buttons, located on the sun visor or the over-

head console, designate the three different HomeLink chan-

nels. The HomeLink indicator is located above the center

utton.

172 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

HomeLink Buttons/Overhead Console

NOTE:

HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is

tive.

Before You Begin Programming HomeLink

Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage

before you begin programming.

For more efficient programming and accurate transmission

of the r

adio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new

battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device

that is being programmed to the HomeLink system.

To erase the channels, place the ignition in the ON/RUN

position

, and push and hold the two outside HomeLink

buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds or until the orange

indicator flashes.

NOTE:

• E

rasing all channels should only be performed when

programm

ing HomeLink for the first time. Do not erase

channels when programming additional buttons.

• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call

toll-fr

ee 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com

for information or assistance.

Programming A Rolling Code

For programming garage door openers that were manufac-

tured after 1995. These garage door openers can be identified

by the “L

EARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the

hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener.

NOTE:

It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close

the door

. The name and color of the button may vary by

manufacturer.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 173

Training The Garage Door Opener

1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

2. Plac

e the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inche

s (3 to 8 cm)

away from the HomeLink button you wish to program

while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.

3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to

program

while you push and hold the hand-held trans-

mitter button.

4. C

ontinue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator

light.

The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and then

rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal

from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons

after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid.

5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate

the “L

EARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can usually

be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to

the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and

release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some

garage door openers/devices there may be a light that

blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the

LEARN/TRAIN mode.

NOTE:

You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after

the LEA

RN button has been pushed.

6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed Home-

Link bu

tton twice (holding the button for two seconds

each ti

me). If the garage door opener/device activates,

programming is complete.

1 — Door Opener

2 — Training Button

174 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

If the garage door opener/device does not activate, push the

button

a third time (for two seconds) to complete the

training.

To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat

each st

ep for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the

channels.

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Rolling

Code)

To r

eprogram a channel that has been previously trained,

follow t

hese steps:

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

2. Push

and hold the desired HomeLink button until the

indica

tor light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not

release the button.

3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-

ming A

Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining

steps."

rogramming A Non-Rolling Code

For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured

before

1995.

1. C

ycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

. Plac

e the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inche

s (3 to 8 cm)

away from the HomeLink button you wish to program

while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.

3. Press and hold the HomeLink button you want to

program

while you press and hold the hand-held trans-

mitter button.

4. C

ontinue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator

light.

The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and then

rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal

from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons

after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 175

5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and

observe the indicator light.

• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming

is com

plete and the garage door/device should acti-

vate when the HomeLink button is pressed.

• T

o program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,

repeat

each step for each remaining button. DO NOT

erase the channels.

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Non-Rolling

Code)

To r

eprogram a channel that has been previously trained,

follow t

hese steps:

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

2. Pres

s and hold the desired HomeLink button until the

indica

tor light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not

release the button.

3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Program-

ming A

Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all

remaini

ng steps.

Canadian/Gate Operator Programming

For programming transmitters in Canada/United States that

require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after several

seconds of transmission.

Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to

time-ou

t (or quit) after several seconds of transmission –

which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the

signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law,

some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the

same manner.

It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling

process

to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or

gate motor.

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

2. Plac

e the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inche

s (3 to 8 cm)

away from the HomeLink button you wish to program

while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.

176 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button, while

you press and release (“cycle”) your hand-held trans-

mitter every two seconds until HomeLink has success-

fully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light

ll fla

sh slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.

4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash

rates.

When it changes, it is programmed. It may take

up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage

door may open and close while you are programming.

5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and

observ

e the indicator light.

NOTE:

• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is

comple

te and the garage door/device should activate

when the HomeLink button is pressed.

• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons, repeat

each s

tep for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the

channels.

If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for

programm

ing, plug it back in at this time.

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Canadian/

Gate Op

erator)

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,

follow t

hese steps:

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

2. Pres

s and hold the desired HomeLink button until the

indica

tor light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not

release the button.

3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Canadian/

Gate O

perator Programming” step 2 and follow all

remaining steps.

Using HomeLink

To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink

button. Activation will now occur for the programmed

device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security

system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The

hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any

time.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 177

Security

It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in

your vehicle.

To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds

until t

he orange indicator flashes. Note that all channels will be

erased. Individual channels cannot be erased.

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the

Vehicle

Security Alarm is active.

NOTE:

The universal garage door opener only operates when the

ngine i

s running for security reasons associated with

removable tops and doors.

Troubleshooting Tips

If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here are

some of the most common solutions:

• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener hand-held

transm

itter.

• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to

comple

te the training for a Rolling Code.

• Did you unplug the device for programming and

rememb

er to plug it back in?

If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call

toll-fr

ee 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com

for information or assistance.

WARNING!

• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a

dangerou

s gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage

while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can

cause serious injury or death.

• Your motorized door or gate will open and close while

you are

programming the universal transceiver. Do not

program the transceiver if people, pets or other objects

are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this trans

ceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop and

everse”

feature as required by Federal safety stan-

dards. This includes most garage door opener models

anufac

tured after 1982. Do not use a garage door

opener without these safety features. Call toll-free

1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at

HomeLink.com for

safety information or assistance.

178 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio

Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with

Innovati

on, Science and Economic Development Canada

license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This

device must accept any interference received,

includi

ng interference that may cause undesired opera-

tion.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the

arty res

ponsible for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

INTERNAL EQUIPMENT

Storage

Glove Compartment

The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of

the inst

rument panel.

To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.

Glove Compartment

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 179

Console Storage Compartment

The center console has both an upper and lower storage

compartment.

To open the upper storage compartment, lift the top latch.

Upper Console Storage Latch

To access the lower storage compartment, lift the bottom

latch.

Lowe

r Console Storage Latch

WARNING!

Do not operate this vehicle with a glove compartment in

the open

position. Driving with the glove compartment

open may result in injury in a collision.

180 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Storage Compartment — If Equipped

The rear cargo area storage compartment is located under-

neath the load floor.

To access the storage compartment, lift up on the cover

utout a

t the rear of the cargo area.

Rear Storage Cover

Cupholders

The front cupholders are located in the center console.

Front Cupholders

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 181

The rear cupholders are located on the back of the center

console, near the floor.

Rear Cupholders

NOTE:

Cupholders located in the front center console, as well as the

ack of t

he center console are not removable.

There are also cupholders located in the rear seat armrest, if

equipped

. These cupholders can be removed for cleaning.

Rear Seat Armrest Cupholders

182 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Electrical Power Outlets

There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) auxiliary power outlets that

can provide power for accessories designed for use with the

standard power outlet adapters.

The front power outlet is located in the center of the instru-

ment panel below the climate controls, and is powered from

the ignit

ion switch. Power is available when the ignition

switch is in the ON or ACC position.

Front Power Outlet

On vehicles equipped with a rear subwoofer, there is a

second p

ower outlet located in the rear cargo area and is

powered directly from the vehicle battery.

Rear Cargo Power Outlet

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 183

Power Outlets Fuse Locations

1 — F81 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (battery powered at all

times)

2 — F91 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (powered when the

ignition

switch is in the ON or ACC position)

CAUTION!

• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps)

at 12 V

olts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is

exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be

replaced.

• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do

not inse

rt any other object in the power outlets as this

will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use

of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by

your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

• D

o not insert any objects into the receptacles.

• Do not tou

ch with wet hands.

• Close th

e lid when not in use.

• If this

outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric

shock an

d failure.

184 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Power Inverter — If Equipped

There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the

back of the center console to convert DC current to AC

current.

This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other

low power

devices requiring power up to 150 Watts. Certain

high-end video game consoles exceed this power limit, as

will most power tools.

Power Inverter

CAUTION!

• M

any accessories that can be plugged in draw power

from the

vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e.,

cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long

enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently

to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from

starting.

• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,

vacuum c

leaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the battery

even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and

with greater caution.

• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long

periods

of the vehicle not being started (with accesso-

ries still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a suffi-

cient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge

he vehic

le's battery.

• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do

not hang

any type of accessory or accessory bracket

from the plug. Improper use of the power outlet can

cause damage.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 185

The power inverter is designed with built-in overload

protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the

power inverter automatically shuts down. Once the electrical

device has been removed from the outlet, the inverter should

automatically reset. If the power rating exceeds approxi

mately 170 Watts, the power inverter may have to be reset

manually.

Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped

Four auxiliary switches located in the lower switch bank of

the instrument panel can be used to power various electrical

devices. You have the ability to configure the functionality of

the auxiliary switches via the Uconnect settings. All switches

can be configured for setting the switch type operation to

latching or momentary, power source of either battery or

ignition, and ability to hold last state across key cycles.

Auxiliary Switches

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

• D

o not insert any objects into the receptacles.

• Do not tou

ch with wet hands.

• Close th

e lid when not in use.

• If this

outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric

shock an

d failure.

186 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

Holding last state conditions are met when switch type is set

to latch

ing and power source is set to ignition.

For more information, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in

“Multime

dia”.

The auxiliary switches manage the relays that power four

unt cu

t wires. These wires are located under the instru-

ment panel in the passenger compartment and under the

ood to

the right, near the battery.

Auxiliary Switch Connections – Under Hood

Auxiliary Switch Connections – Under Instrument Panel

In addition to the four auxiliary switch wires, a fused battery

wire and

ignition wire are also located in the interior, in the

passenger side under the instrument panel.

A kit of splices and heat shrink tubing are provided with the

auxiliar

y switches to aid in the connection/installation of

your electrical devices.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 187

Wire Color Chart

ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED

NOTE:

Roof rack applications are for Hard Top models ONLY.

The

load carried on the roof, when equipped with a luggage

rack, mu

st not exceed 100 lbs (45 kg), this includes the weight

of the crossbars, and it should be uniformly distributed over

the cargo area.

Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is placed

on the

roof rack. Check the straps frequently to be sure that

the load remains securely attached.

NOTE:

Crossbars can be purchased at an authorized dealer through

Mopar p

arts.

Circuit Function Fuse Wire Color Locations

Aux Switch 1 F93 – 40 Amp Beige/Pink

Interior (passenger side under instrument

anel)

& Underhood (right side near battery)

Aux Switch 2 F92 – 40 Amp Green/Pink

Interior (passenger side under instrument

panel)

& Underhood (right side near battery)

Aux Switch 3 F103 – 15 Amp Orange/Pink

Interior (passenger side under instrument

panel)

& Underhood (right side near battery)

Aux Switch 4 F108 – 15 Amp Dark Blue/Pink

Interior (passenger side under instrument

panel)

& Underhood (right side near battery)

Battery F72 – 10 Amp Red/White

Interior (passenger side under instrument

panel)

Ign

ition F50 – 10 Amp Pink/Orange

Interior (passenger side under instrument

panel)

188 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

(Continued)

External racks do not increase the total load carrying

capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant and

luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the luggage

rack, do not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.

WARNING!

Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your

vehicle.

Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle,

particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury

or property damage. Follow the roof rack cautions when

carrying cargo on your roof rack.

CAUTION!

• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not

exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity. Always

distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure

the load appropriately.

• Long loads, which extend over the windshield, should

be sec

ured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.

• Place a blanket or other protection between the surface

of the roof and the load.

• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully

when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.

Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck

traffic, can add sudden upward loads. It is recom

mended to not carry large flat loads, such as wood

anels

or surfboards, which may result in damage to

the cargo or your vehicle.

• Load should always be secured to cross bars first, with

tie dow

n loops used as additional securing points if

needed. Tie loops are intended as supplementary tie

down points only. Do not use ratcheting mechanisms

with the tie loops. Check the straps frequently to be

sure that the load remains securely attached.

CAUTION! (Continued)

189

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Base Instrument Cluster

190 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Premium Instrument Cluster

Instrument Cluster Descriptions

Base Instrument Cluster Descriptions

1. Tachometer

• Indica

tes the engine speed in revolutions per minute

(RPM x

1000).

CAUTION!

Do not operate the engine with the tachometer pointer in

the red

area. Engine damage will occur.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191

2. Temperature Gauge

• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-

ture.

Any reading within the normal range indicates

that th

e engine cooling system is operating satisfacto-

rily.

• T

he gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-

ture wh

en driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,

or when

towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to

exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

3. Instrument Cluster Display

• The in

strument cluster display features a driver-inter-

active

display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in

“Gettin

g To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further

information.

4. Fuel Gauge

• The po

inter shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank

when th

e ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.

• The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the

vehicle where the fuel filler door is located.

5. S

peedometer

• Indica

tes vehicle speed.

Premiu

m Instrument Cluster Descriptions

1. Tachometer

• Indic

ates the engine speed in revolutions per minute

(RPM x

1000).

WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others

could be

badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You

may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your

vehicle overheats.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage

you

r vehic

le. If the temperature gauge reads “H” pull

over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air

conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into

the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”, turn

the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer

for service.

CAUTION!

Do not operate the engine with the tachometer pointer in

the red

area. Engine damage will occur.

192 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

2. Instrument Cluster Display

• The instrument cluster display features a driver-inter-

active

display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in

“Gettin

g To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further

information.

3. Speedometer

• Indica

tes vehicle speed.

4. Fuel

Gauge

• The po

inter shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank

when t

he ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.

• The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the

vehicle where the fuel filler door is located.

5. T

emperature Gauge

• The te

mperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-

ture.

Any reading within the normal range indicates

that th

e engine cooling system is operating satisfacto-

rily.

• T

he gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-

ture wh

en driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,

or when

towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to

exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others

could be

badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You

may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your

vehicle overheats.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage

you

r vehic

le. If the temperature gauge reads “H” pull

over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air

conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into

the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”, turn

the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer

for service.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY

Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster

display, which offers useful information to the driver. With

the ignition in the STOP/OFF mode, opening/closing of a

door will activate the display for viewing, and display the

total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument

cluster display is designed to display important information

about your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a driver

interactive display located on the instrument panel, your

instrument cluster display can show you how systems are

working and give you warnings when they aren’t. The

steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll through

and enter the main menus and submenus. You can access the

specific information you want and make selections and

adjustments.

Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls

The instrument cluster display is located in the center of the

instrument cluster.

3.5 Inch Instrument Cluster Display Location

194 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

7.0 Inch Instrument Cluster Display Location

The system allows the driver to select information by pushing

the foll

owing buttons mounted on the steering wheel:

Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons

1 — OK Button

2 — Up Arrow Button

3 — Right Arrow Button

4 — Down Arrow Button

5 — Left Arrow Button

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195

• Up Arrow Button

Push and release the up arrow

button to scroll

upward through the Main Menu items.

• D

own Arrow Button

Push a

nd release the down arro

w button to scroll

downward through the Main Menu items.

• R

ight Arrow Button

Push a

nd release the right arr

ow button to access

the information screens or submenu screens of a

main me

nu item.

• Left Arrow Button

Push a

nd release the left arr

ow button to access

the information screens or submenu screens of a

main me

nu item.

• OK Button

Push t

he OK butto

n to access/select the information

screens or submenu screens of a Main Menu item. Push

and hold the OK arrow button for two seconds to reset

displayed/selected features that can be reset.

The Main Menu items consists of the following:

• S

peedometer

• Vehicl

e Info

• Off Ro

ad— If Equipped

• Fuel Ec

onomy

• Trip I

nfo

• Stop/St

art — If Equipped

• Audio

• M

essage

• Screen

Setup

• Settin

196 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Oil Change Reset — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine oil change

indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will

display in the instrument cluster display for five seconds

after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next sched

uled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator

ystem i

s duty cycle based, which means the engine oil

change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your

personal driving style.

Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time

you plac

e the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To turn off

the message temporarily, push and release the OK button.

To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the

scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure.

Oil Life Reset

1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in the

ON/RUN

mode (do not start the engine).

2. Navigate to "Oil Life" submenu in "Vehicle Info" in the

instru

ment cluster display.

3. Push and hold the OK butt

on until the gauge resets to

100%.

Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset Procedure

1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in the

ON/RUN

position (do not start the engine).

2. Fu

lly press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times

thin

ten seconds.

3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in the

OFF/LOCK

position.

NOTE:

If the indicator message illuminates when you start the

vehicle

, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If

necessary, repeat this procedure.

Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items

NOTE:

The instrument cluster display menu items display in the

center

of the instrument cluster. Menu items may vary

depending on your vehicle features.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197

Speedometer

Push and release the up or down

arrow button until the

speedometer menu icon is displayed in the instrument

cluster display. Push and release the OK button to toggle

between MPH and km/h.

Vehicle Info

Push and release the up or down

arrow button until the

Vehicle Info menu icon is displayed in the instrument cluster

display. Push and release the left or right arrow button to

scroll through the information submenus and push and release

the OK button to select or reset the resettable submenus.

Off Road

Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Off

Road me

nu icon is displayed in the instrument cluster

display. Push and release the left or right arrow button to

scroll through the information submenus.

• Drivetrain

• Front W

heel Angle: displays the graphical and numer-

ical v

alue of calculated average front wheel angle from

the ste

ering wheel orientation.

• Transfer Case Lock Status: displays "Lock" graphic

only du

ring 4WD High, 4WD High Part Time, 4WD

Low status.

• Axle Lock And Sway Bar Status (If Equipped): displays

front

and rear or rear only axle locker graphic, and

sway bar connection graphic with text message

(connected or disconnected).

• Pitch And Roll

• Displa

ys the pitch and roll of the vehicle in the graphic

with th

e angle number on the screen.

NOTE:

When vehicle speed becomes too high to display the pitch

nd rol

l, “- -” will display in place of the numbers, and the

graphic will be greyed out. A message indicating the neces

sary speed for the feature to become available will also

display.

•

Tire Pressure • Coola

nt Temperature

• Transmission Tempera-

ture —

Automatic Trans-

mission Only

• O

il Pressure

• Oil Temperature • Oil L

ife

• Battery Voltage

198 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Fuel Economy

Push and release the up or down

arrow button until the Fuel

Economy icon is highlighted in the instrument cluster

display. Push and hold the OK button to reset average fuel

economy feature.

Toggle left or right to select a display with or without

Current

Fuel Economy Information.

• Range – The display shows the estimated distance (mi or

km) tha

t can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the

tank. When the Range value is less than 10

miles (16 kilo-

meters), the Range display will change to a “LOW”

message.

Adding a significant amount of fuel to the

vehicle will turn off the “LOW” message and a new Range

value will display. Range cannot be reset through the OK

button.

NOTE:

Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will

greatly a

ffect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle,

regardless of the Range displayed value.

• Average – The display shows the average fuel economy

(MPG,

L/100 km, or km/L) since the last reset.

• C

urrent – This display shows the current fuel economy

(MPG,

L/100 km, km/L) while driving.

Trip Info

Push and release the up or down

arrow button until the Trip

icon/title is highlighted in the instrument cluster display,

then push and release the left or right arrow button to select

Trip A or Trip B.

The Trip A and Trip B information will display the

followin

• Distance

• Average

Fuel Economy

• Elapse

d Time

Hold t

he OK butto

n to reset all the information.

Stop/Start — If Equipped

Push and release the up or down

arrow button until the

Stop/Start icon/title is highlighted in the instrument cluster

display. The screen will display the Stop/Start status.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199

Audio

Push and release the up or down

arrow button until the

Audio Menu icon/title is highlighted in the instrument

cluster display. This menu will display the audio source

information, including the Song name, Artist name, and

audio source with an accompanying graphic.

• Phone Call Status

When a

call is incoming, a Phone Call Status pop-up will

display

on the screen. The pop-up will remain until the

phone is answered or ignored.

NOTE:

The call status will temporarily replace the previous media

source

information displayed on the screen. When the

pop-up is no longer displayed, the display will return to the

last used screen.

Messages

Push and release the up or down

arrow button until the

Messages Menu item is highlighted. This feature shows the

number of stored warning messages. Pushing the right arrow

button will allow you to see what the stored messages are.

When no messages are present, main menu icon will be a

closed

envelope, and “No Stored Messages” will display.

Screen Setup

Push and release the up or down

arrow button until the

Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is highlighted in the instru-

ment cluster display. Push and release the O

K butto

n to

enter the sub-menus and follow the prompts on the screen as

needed. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what

information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as

the location that information is displayed.

Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items

Upper Left

• None

• Compas

s (default setting)

• Outsid

e Temp

• Time

• Ra

nge T

o Empty

• Average

MPG (or L/100km, km/L)

• Curren

t MPG (or L/100km, km/L)

• Trip A

Distance

• Trip B

Distance

200 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Center

• None

• Compas

• Outsid

e Temp

• Time

• Ra

nge t

o Empty

• Average

MPG (or L/100km, km/L)

• Curren

t MPG (or L/100km, km/L)

• Trip A

Distance

• Trip B

Distance

• Audio

• S

peedo

meter

• Menu T

itle (default setting)

Upper

Right

• None

• Compas

• Outsid

e Temp (default setting)

• Time

• Ra

nge T

o Empty

• Average

MPG (or L/100km, km/L)

• Curren

t MPG (or L/100km, km/L)

• Trip A

Distance

• Trip B

Distance

Gear D

isplay — If Equipped

• Full (default setting)

• Single

rren

t Gear

• On

• Off (d

efault setting)

Odomete

r — If Equipped

• Show (default setting)

• Hide

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201

Favorite Menus

• Speedometer

• Vehicl

e Info

• Off Ro

ad – If Equipped (show/hide)

• Fuel Ec

onomy (show/hide)

• Trip I

nfo (Show/Hide)

• Stop/St

art

• Audio

(show/hide)

• Message

• Screen

Setup

Defaul

ts (Restores All Settings To Default Settings)

• Cancel

• Restor

The me

nu with (show/hide) means user can press OK

button

to choose show or hide this menu on the instrument

cluster display.

Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —

Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped

This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor

(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical

system and status of the vehicle battery.

In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or the

vehicle

battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical load

reduction actions will take place to extend the driving time

and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power

to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.

Load reduction is only active when the engine is running. It

will dis

play a message if there is a risk of battery depletion to

the point where the vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical

supply, or will not restart after the current drive cycle.

When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery

Saver O

n” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the instru-

ment cluster display.

These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state of

harge a

nd continues to lose electrical charge at a rate that

the charging system cannot sustain.

202 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE:

• The charging system is independent from load reduction.

The ch

arging system performs a diagnostic on the

charging system continuously.

• If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate a

proble

m with the charging system. Refer to “Battery

Charge Warning Light” in “Warning Lights And

Messages” located in ”Getting To Know Your Instrument

Panel” for further information.

The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped), and

vehicle

functions which can be effected by load reduction:

• Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel

• Rear D

efroster And Heated Mirrors

• HVAC S

ystem

• 150W P

ower Inverter System

• Audio

and Telematics System

Loss o

f the battery charge may indicate one or more of the

followin

g conditions:

• The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical

power t

o the vehicle system because the electrical loads are

larger than the capability of charging system. The charging

system is still functioning properly.

• Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g. HVAC

to max

settings, exterior and interior lights, overloaded

power outlets +12V, 150W, USB ports) during certain

driving conditions (city driving, towing, frequent stop

ping).

• I

nstalling options like additional lights, upfitter electrical

access

ories, audio systems, alarms and similar devices.

• Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long

parkin

g periods).

• The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time

(weeks,

months).

• The battery was recently replaced and was not charged

comple

tely.

• The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on

when th

e vehicle was parked.

• The battery was used for an extended period with the

engine

not running to supply radio, lights, chargers, +12V

portable appliances like vacuum cleaner’s, game consoles

and similar devices.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203

What to do when an electrical load reduction action

message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver

Mode”)

During a trip:

• Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:

• Turn of

f redundant lights (interior or exterior)

• Check wh

at may be plugged in to power outlets +12V,

150W, U

SB ports

• Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)

• Check t

he audio settings (volume)

After a

trip:

• Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (addi-

tional

lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems,

alarms)

and review specifications if any (load and Ignition

Off Draw currents).

• Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time

and par

king time).

• The vehicle should have service performed if the message

is stil

l present during consecutive trips and the evaluation

of the vehicle and driving pattern did not help to identify

the cause.

WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES

The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instru-

ment panel together with a dedicated message and/or

acoustic

signal when applicable. These indications are indic-

ative and precautionary and as such must not be considered

s exhau

stive and/or alternative to the information

contained in the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to

read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in

this chapter in the event of a failure indication. All active tell

tales will display first if applicable. The system check menu

may appea

r different based upon equipment options and

current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may

not appear.

Red Warning Lights

— Air Bag Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault with the

air bag,

and will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb

check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/

ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a single

chime when a fault with the air bag has been detected, it will

stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light is either not on

during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the

system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

204 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

— Brake Warning Light

This warning light monitors various brake functions,

includi

ng brake fluid level and parking brake application. If

the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking

brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there

is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.

If the light remains on when the parking brake has been

disengage

d, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the

master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake

hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the

Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake

System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In

this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been

corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the

ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake

pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in

the eve

nt of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A

leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the

Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake

fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a spec

ified level.

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

NOTE:

The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneu-

vers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should

ave se

rvice performed, and the brake fluid level checked.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

are als

o equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution

(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning

Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate

repair to the ABS system is required.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by

turning

the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/

RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately

two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the

parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the

light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an

authorized dealer.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is

dangerous

. Part of the brake system may have failed. It

will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a

collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied

with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.

NOTE:

This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It

oes not

show the degree of brake application.

— Battery Charge Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate when the battery is not

charging p

roperly. If it stays on while the engine is running,

there may be a malfunction with the charging system.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system

or a rel

ated component.

— Door Open Warning Light

This in

dicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and

not full

y closed.

NOTE:

If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.

— Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light

This warning light will turn on when there's a fault with the

PS (Ele

ctric Power Steering) system. Refer to “Power

Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate to indicate a problem with

the Elec

tronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is

detected while the vehicle is running, the light will either

stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem.

Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and completely

stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position.

The light should turn off. If the light remains on with the

vehicle running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;

however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as

possible.

WARNING!

Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a

safety ri

sk to yourself and others. Service should be

obtained as soon as possible.

206 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE:

This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake pedals are

pressed

at the same time.

If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running,

immediat

e service is required and you may experience

reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine

stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will

come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or

ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb

check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the

system checked by an authorized dealer.

— Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light

This warning light warns of an overheated engine condition.

If the e

ngine coolant temperature is too high, this indicator

will illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the tempera

ture reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will sound

for four

minutes or until the engine is able to cool: whichever

comes first.

If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop

the vehi

cle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the

transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the

temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the

engine off immediately and call for service.

Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of Emer-

gency” for further information.

— Hood Open Warning Light

This indicator will illuminate when the hood is ajar/open

nd not

fully closed.

NOTE:

If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.

— Oil Pressure Warning Light

This war

ning light will illuminate to indicate low engine oil

pressure

. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle,

shut off the engine as soon as possible, and contact an autho

rized dealer. A chime will sound when this light turns on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This

light doe

s not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The

engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

— Oil Temperature Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate to indicate the engine oil

temperat

ure is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop

the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. Wait

for oil temperature to return to normal levels.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207

— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light

This warning light indicates when the driver or passenger

seat belt is unbuckled. When the ignition is first placed in the

ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and if the driver’s

seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will

turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat

belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will

flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound.

Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for

further

information.

— Swing Gate Open Warning Light

This war

ning light will illuminate when the swing gate is

open.

NOTE

If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.

— Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If

Equipped

This warning light will illuminate to warn of a high transmis-

sion fluid temperature. This may occur with strenuous usage

uch as

trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle

and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the trans-

mission in PARK or NEUTRAL, until the light turns off.

nce the

light turns off, you may continue to drive normally.

— Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped

This li

ght will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds

when the v

ehicle security alarm is arming, and then will flash

slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.

WARNING!

If you continue operating the vehicle when the

Transmis

sion Temperature Warning Light is illuminated

you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact

with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.

CAUTION!

Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature

arning

Light illuminated will eventually cause severe

transmission damage or transmission failure.

208 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Yellow Warning Lights

— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light

This warning light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS). T

he light will turn on when the ignition is placed in

the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may stay on

for as long as four seconds.

If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then

the Anti

-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning

and service is required as soon as possible. However, the

conventional brake system will continue to operate

normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.

If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed

in the O

N/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have the brake

system inspected by an authorized dealer.

— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning

Light — If Equipped

This warning light will indicate when the Electronic Stability

Control

system is Active. The “ESC Indicator Light” in the

instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed

in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC

is activated. It should go out with the engine running. If the

“ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the

engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC

system. If this warning light remains on after several ignition

cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilome

ters) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an autho-

rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem

iagnosed

and corrected.

• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator

Light” c

ome on momentarily each time the ignition is

placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.

• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds

when it

is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when

ESC becomes inactive.

• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.

— Electronic S

tability Control (ESC) Off Warning

Light — If Equipped

This warning light indicates the Electronic Stability Control

(

ESC) is

off.

Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ON/

RUN, the

ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off

previously.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209

— Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light — If Equipped

This warning light will illuminate when the fuel filler cap is

loose. Properly close the filler cap to disengage the light. If

the light does not turn off, please see an authorized dealer.

— Low Fuel Warning Light

When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal (7.5 L), this

light will

turn on and a chime will sound. The light will

remain on until fuel is added.

— Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If Equipped

This warning light will illuminate when the windshield

washer fl

uid is low.

— Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light

(MIL)

The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a

art of

an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that

monitors engine and automatic transmission control

systems. This warning light will illuminate when the ignition

is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb

does not come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF

to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.

Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor

quality f

uel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start.

The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through

several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle

will drive normally and will not require towing.

When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert

serious

conditions that could lead to immediate loss of

power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle

should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as

possible if this occurs.

WARNING!

A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced

above, can

reach higher temperatures than in normal

operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive

slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry

plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death

or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.

210 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

— Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped

This warning light will illuminate to signal a fault with the

4WD syste

m. If the light stays on or comes on during driving,

it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly

and that service is required. We recommend you drive to the

nearest service center and have the vehicle serviced immedi

ately.

— Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light —

If Equipped

This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault in the

rward Co

llision Warning System. Contact an authorized

dealer for service.

Refer to “Forward Collision Warning (FCW)” in “Safety” for

further

information.

— Service Stop/Start System Warning Light — If

Equipped

This warning light will illuminate when the Stop/Start

ystem is

not functioning properly and service is required.

Contact an authorized dealer for service.

— Speed Control Fault Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate to indicate the Speed

Control

System is not functioning properly and service is

required. Contact an authorized dealer.

— Sway Bar Fault Warning Light

This light will illuminate when there is a fault in the sway bar

disconne

ct system.

— Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning

Light

The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to

ndicate

that the tire pressure is lower than the recom-

mended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In

hese ca

ses, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may

not be guaranteed.

CAUTION!

Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) on

could cause damage to the vehicle control

system. It also could affect fuel economy and

driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic

converter damage and power loss will soon occur.

Immediate service is required.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211

Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned

above, the display will show the indications corresponding

to each tire.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked

monthly

when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure

recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires

of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard

or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the

proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped

with a

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illumi-

nates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires

is sign

ificantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire

pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your

tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-

sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the

tire to

overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the

vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire

mainten

ance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain

correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached

the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres

sure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunc-

tion indicator to indicate when the system is not operating

roperl

y. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with

the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a

malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one

minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This

sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as

long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indi

cator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or

signal l

ow tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions

may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation

of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that

prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check

the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more

tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace

ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to

continu

e to function properly.

CAUTION!

Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as

andlin

g may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,

avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture

occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire

repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon as

possible.

212 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Yellow Indicator Lights

/ — 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the

four-whee

l drive mode, and the front and rear driveshafts

are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear

wheels to rotate at the same speed.

/ — 4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the

four-whee

l drive LOW mode. The front and rear driveshafts

are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear

wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a

greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at

the wheels.

/ — 4WD Part Time Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the

four-whee

l drive part time mode, and the front and rear

driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the

front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.

— Active Speed Limiter Fault Indicator Light — If

Equipped

This warning light will illuminate to signal when there is a

ault de

tected with the Active Speed Limiter.

— Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light

This light indicates when the front and/or rear axle locker

fault ha

s been detected.

CAUTION!

The TPMS has been optimized for the original

equipmen

t tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and

warning have been established for the tire size equipped

on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor

damage may result when using replacement equipment

that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.

Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using

aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become

inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is

recommended that you take your vehicle to your

authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213

— Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light — If

Equipped

This indicator light illuminates to indicate that Forward

Collisio

n Warning is off.

— Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light

This light indicates when the front, rear, or both axles have

been loc

ked. The telltale will display the lock icon on the

front and rear axles to indicate the current lock status.

/ — Neutral Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the neutral

mode.

— Rear A

xle Lock Indicator Light

This light indicates when the rear axle lock has been acti-

vated.

— Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning Light —

If Equipped

This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and

eeds se

rvice. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in

“Starting And Operating” for further information.

— Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped

This indicator light will illuminate when the front sway bar

is disco

nnected.

Green Indicator Lights

— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target

Detected Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control is

set and

there is no target vehicle detected. Refer to "Adaptive

Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped" in "Starting And Oper

ating" for further information.

— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target

Light — If Equipped

This will display when the ACC is set and a target vehicle is

etected. R

efer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If

Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

— 4WD Auto Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the

four-whee

l drive auto mode. The system will provide power

to all four wheels and shift the power between the front and

rear axles as needed. This will provide maximum traction in

dry and slippery conditions.

214 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

— Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If Equipped

With A Premium Instrument Cluster

This in

dicator light will illuminate when the speed control is set

to the des

ired speed. Refer to “Speed Control — If Equipped” in

“Starting And Operating” for further information.

— Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped

This indicator light will illuminate when the front fog lights

are on.

— P

ark/Headlight On Indicator Light

This indicator light will illuminate when the park lights or

headlight

s are turned on.

— Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If Equipped

This indicator light will illuminate when the Stop/Start func-

tion is in “Autostop” mode.

— Turn Signal Indicator Lights

When th

e left or right turn signal is activated, the turn signal

indicato

r will flash independently and the corresponding

exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be acti

vated when the multifunction lever is moved down (left) or

up (right

NOTE:

• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven

more th

an 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.

• C

heck for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indi-

cator f

lashes at a rapid rate.

White Indicator Lights

— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If

Equipped

This light will turn on when the vehicle equipped with

Adaptive

Cruise Control (ACC) has been turned on, but not

set. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If

Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa

tion.

— Two Wheel Drive High Indicator Light — If

Equipped With a Premium Cluster

This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the two wheel

rive hi

gh mode.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215

— Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light — If

Equipped

This indicator shows when the Hill Descent Control (HDC)

feature

is turned on. The lamp will be on solid when HDC is

armed. HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is in

the “4WD LOW” position and the vehicle speed is less then

mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are not met while

attempti

ng to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light

will flash on/off.

— Speed Warning Indicator Light — If Equipped

When Set Speed Warning is turned on, the speed warning

telltale

will illuminate in the instrument cluster with a

number matching the set speed. When the set speed is

exceeded, the indication will light up yellow and flash along

with a continuous chime (up to ten seconds or until the speed

is no longer exceeded). Speed Warning can be turned on and

off in the instrument cluster display, for further information

refer to “Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items” in

“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel.”

The number “55” is only an example of a speed that can be

set.

— Cr

uise Control Ready Indicator Light — If Equipped

With A Premium Instrument Cluster

This li

ght will turn on when the speed control has been turned

on, but

not set. Refer to “Speed Control — If Equipped” in

“Starting And Operating” for further information.

— Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If Equipped

With Base Instrument Cluster

This in

dicator light will illuminate when the speed control is

set.

Refer

to “Speed Control — If Equipped” in “Starting And

Operatin

g” for further information.

Blue Indicator Lights

— High Beam Indicator Light

This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the high

beam hea

dlights are on. With the low beams activated, push

the multifunction lever forward (toward the front of the

vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction

lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the

high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever toward

you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.

216 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Gray Indicator Lights

— Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light — If Equipped

With Base Instrument Cluster

This li

ght will turn on when the speed control has been

turned o

n, but not set. Refer to “Speed Control — If

Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa

tion.

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard

Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the

performance of the emissions, engine, and transmission

control systems. When these systems are operating properly,

your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel

economy, as well as engine emissions well within current

government regulations.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system

will turn

on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will

also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist

your service technician in making repairs. Although your

vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see an

authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further

damage t

o the emission control system. It could also

affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must

be serviced before any emissions tests can be

performed.

• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,

severe c

atalytic converter damage and power loss will

soon occur. Immediate service is required.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217

Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity

Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic

system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to

information related to the performance of your emissions

controls. Authorized service technicians may need to access

this information to assist with the diagnosis and service of

your vehicle and emissions system.

For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in “Multi-

media”.

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

PROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an

inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system. Failure

to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-

nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction

Indicato

r Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on

when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is

ready for testing.

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II

system ma

y not be ready if your vehicle was recently

serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace

ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready

for the

I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

WARNING!

• ONLY an authorized service technician should connect

equipme

nt to the OBD II connection port in order to

read the VIN, diagnose, or service your vehicle.

• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II

connecti

on port, such as a driver-behavior tracking

device, it may:

• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety

systems, could be impaired or a loss of

vehicle control could occur that may result in an

accident involving serious injury or death.

• Access, or allow others to access, information stored

in your ve

hicle systems, including personal infor-

mation.

218 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you

can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your

vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:

1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not

crank o

r start the engine.

NOTE:

If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test

ver.

2. A

s soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion,

you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”

symbol c

ome on as part of a normal bulb check.

3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will

happen

• The MIL will flash for about ten seconds and then return to

being

fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or

start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II

system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M

station.

• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illu-

minate

d until you place the ignition in the off position

or star

t the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD

II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M

station.

If your OBD II system is not read

y, you should see an autho-

rized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently

service

d or had a battery failure or replacement, you may

need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you

normally would in order for your OBD II system to update.

A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that

the system is now ready.

Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is ready

or not,

if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle oper-

ation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to

he I/M

station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle

because the MIL is on with the engine running.

219

(Continued)

SAFETY

SAFETY FEATURES

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased

vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking

conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel lock,

and enhances vehicle control during braking.

The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS

is workin

g properly each time the vehicle is started and

driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight clicking

sound as well as some related motor noises.

ABS is activated during braking when the system detects one

or more

wheels begin to lock. Road conditions such as ice,

snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic

stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).

You also may experience the following when ABS activates:

• T

he ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short

time a

fter the stop).

• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.

• Brake p

edal pulsations.

• A sligh

t drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.

These

are all normal characteristics of ABS.

WARNING!

• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment

that m

ay be susceptible to interference caused by

improperly installed or high output radio transmitting

equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of

anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equip

ment should be performed by qualified professionals.

• P

umping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their

effect

iveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping

makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on

your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop.

220 SAFETY

ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modification

may result in degraded ABS performance.

Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light

The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on

en the

ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and may

stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or comes

on while

driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the

brake system is not functioning and that service is required.

However, the conventional brake system will continue to

operate normally if the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is

on.

If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake

system s

hould be serviced as soon as possible to restore the

benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning

Light” does not come on when the ignition is turned to the

ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.

Electronic Brake Control System

Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic Brake

Control system (EBC). This system includes Electronic Brake

Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),

Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Traction

Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability Control (ESC),

and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systems work

together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in

various driving conditions.

Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway

Control

(TSC), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Rain Brake

Support (RBS), Dynamic Steering Torque (DST), and Hill

Descent Control (HDC).

• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics

from ac

ting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking

or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the

condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction

afforded.

• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those

result

ing from excessive speed in turns, following

another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.

• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must

never b

e exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner

that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of

others.

WARNING! (Continued)

SAFETY 221

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

This function manages the distribution of the braking torque

between

the front and rear axles by limiting braking pressure

to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of the rear

wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear

axle from entering ABS before the front axle.

Brake System Warning Light

The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when

the igni

tion is turned to the ON/RUN mode and may stay on

for as long as four seconds.

If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or comes on

while dr

iving, it indicates that the brake system is not func-

tioning properly and that immediate service is required. If

he “Br

ake System Warning Light” does not come on when

the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode, have the light

repaired as soon as possible.

Brake Assist System (BAS)

The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking capa-

bility during emergency braking maneuvers. The system

etects

an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate

and amount of brake application and then applies optimum

pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking

distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock brake system

(ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best

BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you

must apply continuous braking pressure during the stop

ping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce

rake pe

dal pressure unless braking is no longer desired.

Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.

WARNING!

The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the

natural

laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor

can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road

conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including

those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on

very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities

of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a

reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize

the user's safety or the safety of others.

222 SAFETY

Hill Start Assist (HSA)

The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a

complet

e stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the

brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold

the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver does not

apply the throttle before this time expires, the system will

release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill

as normal.

The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to

activat

• The feature must be enabled.

• The ve

hicle must be stopped.

• Park br

ake must be off.

• Driver

door must be closed. (If the doors are attached, then

the do

or must be closed. If the doors are detached then the

driver's seatbelt must be buckled.)

• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.

• The gea

r selection must match vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,

vehicl

e facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing

uphill is in REVERSE gear).

• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.

The sys

tem will not activate if the transmission is in PARK

or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a manual trans

mission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will remain active.

Disabling And Enabling HSA

This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current

etting

, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To

Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

WARNING!

There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist

(HSA) w

ill not activate and slight rolling may occur,

such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while

pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active

driving involvement. It is always the driver’s

responsibility to be attentive to distance to other

vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly

brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle

under all road conditions. Your complete attention is

always required while driving to maintain safe control of

your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result

in a collision or serious personal injury.

SAFETY 223

Towing With HSA

HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while

towing a

trailer.

Traction Control System (TCS)

This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the

driven

wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may apply

brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine

power to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A

feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions

similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin

across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning

faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the

spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be

applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain

enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

This system enhances directional control and stability of the

vehicle

under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for

oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the

brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in counteracting

the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may

also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.

ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path

intende

d by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the

vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended

path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist

in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.

• Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than appro-

priate

for the steering wheel position.

• U

ndersteer — when the vehicle is turning less than appro-

priate

for the steering wheel position.

WARNING!

• If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer, the

traile

r brakes may be activated and deactivated with the

brake switch. If so, there may not be enough brake pres

sure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill

when the

brake pedal is released. In order to avoid

rolling down an incline while resuming acceleration,

manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle

brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.

• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the parking

brake

fully when exiting your vehicle. Also, be certain

to place the transmission in PARK.

• Failure to follow these warnings can result in a colli-

sion or

serious personal injury.

224 SAFETY

(Continued)

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located

in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the ESC

system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction

Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is active. If the

“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to

flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and

apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your

speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.

ESC Operating Modes

NOTE:

Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC

system m

ay have multiple operating modes.

WARNING!

• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the

natura

l laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor

can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road

conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including

those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving

on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also

cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle

control due to inappropriate driver input for the condi

tions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can

revent

accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped

vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or

dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s

safety or the safety of others.

• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain

your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics

of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the perfor

mance of the ESC system. Changes to the steering

system,

suspension, braking system, tire type and size

or wheel size may adversely affect ESC performance.

Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also

degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or

poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the effective

ness of the ESC system can increase the risk of loss of

hicle

control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and

death.

WARNING! (Continued)

SAFETY 225

ESC On

This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever

the veh

icle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.

This mode should be used for most driving conditions. Alter

nate ESC modes should only be used for specific reasons as

noted i

n the following paragraphs.

Partial Off

The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more

spirite

d driving experience is desired. This mode may

modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which allows

for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This mode may

be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.

To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the “ESC

Off” swi

tch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will illumi-

nate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the “ESC

ff” swi

tch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will turn off.

NOTE:

For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a momentary

utton

push will toggle the ESC mode. Multiple momentary

button pushed may be required to return to ESC On.

Full Off — If Equipped

This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only

and sho

uld not be used on any public roadways. In this

mode, TCS and ESC features are turned OFF. To enter the

“Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC Off” switch for five

seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine

running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC Off

Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the “ESC OFF” message

will display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC ON again,

momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch.

WARNING!

• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of

ESC, (

except for the limited slip feature described in

the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off

Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial

Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS

is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered

by the ESC system is reduced.

• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC

system

is in the “Partial Off” mode.

226 SAFETY

NOTE:

System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial Off”

mode when

vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed. When

the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined speed the

system will return to ESC “Full Off”.

ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes if so

equipped

ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC

OFF Indicator

Light

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”

in the instrument cluster will come on when the igni-

tion is turned to the ON mode. It should go out with

he engin

e running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction

Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine

running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system.

If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the

vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds

greater than 30

mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as

soon as

possible to have the problem diagnosed and

corrected.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located

in the i

nstrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires

lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC

Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when

TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the

accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to

adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road condi

tions.

WARNING!

• In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque reduc-

tion and

stability features are disabled. Therefore,

enhanced

vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is

unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the

ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining

stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for

off-highway or off-road use only.

• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent

the nat

ural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,

nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing

road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents,

including those resulting from excessive speed in

turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro

planing. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.

SAFETY 227

NOTE:

• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and

the “ES

C OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily each

time the ignition is turned ON.

• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will

be on e

ven if it was turned off previously.

• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds

when it

is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when

ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused

the ESC activation.

The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the

customer has elected to have the Electronic Stability

ontrol

(ESC) in a reduced mode.

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)

This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by moni-

toring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed of the

ehicle.

When ERM determines that the rate of change of the

steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to

potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate

brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance

that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of

wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneu

vers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as

road con

ditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or

other vehicles.

NOTE:

ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off” mode (if

equipped

). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this

section for a complete explanation of the available ESC modes.

Trailer Sway Control (TSC)

TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively

swaying tra

iler and will take the appropriate actions to

attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become active automati

cally once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized.

WARNING!

Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions

and drivi

ng conditions, influence the chance that wheel

lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel

lift or roll overs, especially those that involve leaving the

roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The

capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never be

exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could

jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

228 SAFETY

NOTE:

TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use

caution

when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue

weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in

“Starting And Operating” for further information.

When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction

Indicat

or Light” will flash, the engine power may be reduced

and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual

wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is

disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” or “Full

Off” modes.

Ready Alert Braking (RAB)

Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach

full br

aking during emergency braking situations. It antici-

pates when an emergency braking situation may occur by

onitor

ing how fast the throttle is released by the driver.

The EBC will prepare the brake system for a panic stop.

Rain Brake Support (RBS)

Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in

wet cond

itions. It will periodically apply a small amount of

brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front

brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are in

LO or HI speed. When Rain Brake Support is active, there is

no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is

required.

Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped

HDC is

intended for low speed off road driving while in

4WD Low

Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while

descending hills during various driving situations. HDC

controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.

HDC has three states:

1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).

2. Enab

led (feature is enabled and ready but activation

condit

ions are not met, or driver is actively overriding

with brake or throttle application).

3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle

speed)

WARNING!

If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,

stop at

the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer

load to eliminate trailer sway.

SAFETY 229

Enabling HDC

HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the

followin

g conditions must also be met to enable HDC:

• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range

• Vehicl

e speed is below 5 mph (

8 km/h).

• Parking brake is released.

• Driver

door is closed. (If doors are attached, then door

must b

e closed. if doors are detached, then driver seatbelt

must be buckled.)

Activating HDC

Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if driven

down a gr

ade of sufficient magnitude. The set speed for

HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by using

the gear shift +/-. The following summarizes the HDC set

speeds:

HDC Target Set Speeds

• P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not acti-

vate

• R

0.6 mph (

1 km/h)

• N = 1.2 mph (

2 km/h)

• D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)

• 1s

t = 0.6 mph (

1 km/h)

• 2nd = 1.2 mph (

2 km/h)

• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)

• 4t

h = 2.5 mph (

4 km/h)

• 5th = 3.1 mph (

5 km/h)

• 6th = 3.7 mph (

6 km/h)

• 7th = 4.3 mph (

7 km/h)

• 8th = 5.0 mph (

8 km/h)

• 9th = 5.6 mph (

9 km/h) – If Equipped

NOTE:

During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC target

speed s

election, but will not affect the gear chosen by the

transmission. When actively controlling HDC the transmis

sion will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set speed

and cor

responding driving conditions.

Driver Override

The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or

brake ap

plication at anytime.

230 SAFETY

Deactivating HDC

HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the

followin

g conditions occur:

• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake

applic

ation.

• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (

32 km/h) but remains

below 40 mph (64 km/h).

• V

ehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magnitude,

is on

level ground, or is on an uphill grade.

• Vehicle is shifted to park.

Disabl

ing HDC

HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the following

conditi

ons occur:

• The driver pushes the HDC switch.

• The dr

iveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.

• The pa

rking brake is applied.

• Driver

door opens (Driver door opens if doors are attached

or dri

ver seatbelt is unbuckled if doors are detached).

• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (

32 km/h) for

greater than 70 seconds.

• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (

64 km/h) (HDC

exits immediately).

• HDC detects excessive brake temperature.

Feedbac

k To The Driver

The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC switch

has an

indicator light, which offers feedback to the driver

about the state HDC is in.

• The cluster icon and switch indicator light will illuminate

and re

main on solid when HDC is enabled or activated.

This is the normal operating condition for HDC.

• The cluster icon and switch indicator light will flash for

severa

l seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes

the HDC switch but enable conditions are not met.

• The cluster icon and switch indicator light will flash for

severa

l seconds then extinguish when HDC disables due

to excess speed.

• The cluster icon and switch indicator light will flash when

HDC de

activates due to overheated brakes. The flashing

will stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have

cooled sufficiently.

SAFETY 231

AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS

Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped

The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two

radar-based sensors, located inside the taillights, to detect

highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcy

cles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/

side of

the vehicle.

Rear Detection Zones

When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will

momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to

let the driver know that the system is operational. The BSM

system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward

gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode when the

vehicle is in PARK.

WARNING!

HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling

vehicle s

peed when descending hills. The driver must

remain attentive to the driving conditions and is

responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.

232 SAFETY

The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane

width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone

length st

arts at the outside rear view mirror and extends

approximately 10

ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the

vehicle.

The BSM system monitors the detection zones on

both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches

approximately 6

mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the

driver o

f vehicles in these areas.

NOTE:

• T

he BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about rapidly

approac

hing vehicles that are outside the detection zones.

• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your

vehicle

is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify the

adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer

before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object

(i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the side of

your vehicle, this may result in the BSM warning light

remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a

forward gear.

• The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may experience

drop ou

ts (blinking on and off) of the side mirror Warning

Indicator lamps when a motorcycle or any small object

remains at the side of the vehicle for extended periods of

time (more than a couple of seconds).

The area on taillights, where the radar sensors are located,

st rem

ain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination

so that the BSM system can function properly. Do not block

the taillights where the radar sensors are located with

foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).

BSM Radar Location (Left Side Shown)

The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection

zones by

illuminating the BSM warning light located in the

outside mirrors in addition to sounding an audible (chime)

alert and reducing the radio volume. Refer to “Modes Of

Operation” for further information.

SAFETY 233

Warning Light Location

The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three

differen

t entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see

if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert

during these types of zone entries.

Entering From The Side

Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either side

of the v

ehicle.

Side Monitoring

234 SAFETY

Entering From The Rear

Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either

side and

enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed

of less than 30

mph (48 km/h).

Rear Monitoring

Overtaking Traffic

If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed less

than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the blind

spot for

approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light will be

illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two vehi

cles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning light will

not illu

minate.

Overtaking/Approaching

SAFETY 235

Overtaking/Passing

The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on

stationa

ry objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,

berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on

such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle does

not require service.

Stationary Objects

236 SAFETY

The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are traveling

in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent lanes.

Opposing Traffic

Rear Cross Path (RCP)

The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the

driver wh

en backing out of parking spaces where their

vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly

and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of

the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear

view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is

detected, alert the driver.

RCP Detection Zones

WARNING!

The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help

detect ob

jects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system is

not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.

Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system,

always check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your

shoulder, and use your turn signal before changing

lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or

death.

SAFETY 237

RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the

vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the

vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3

mph

(5 km/h),

to objects moving a maximum of approximately

20 mph (

32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.

NOTE:

In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be obscured

y vehic

les parked on either side. If the sensors are blocked

by other structures or vehicles, the system will not be able to

alert the driver.

When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver is

alerted

using both the visual and audible alarms, including

reducing the radio volume.

Modes Of Operation

Three selectable modes of operation are available in the

Uconnec

t System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-

media” for further information.

Blind Spot Alert Lights Only

When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system

ll pro

vide a visual alert in the appropriate side view

mirror based on a detected object. However, when the

system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the

system will respond with both visual and audible alerts

when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert

is requested, the radio is muted.

Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime

When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, the

BSM syst

em will provide a visual alert in the appropriate

side view mirror based on a detected object. If the turn signal

is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert present on

that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be

sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are

present on the same side at the same time, both the visual

and audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible

alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.

WARNING!

Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up aid

system.

It is intended to be used to help a driver detect

an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers

must be careful when backing up, even when using RCP.

Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look

behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,

animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots

before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious

injury or death.

238 SAFETY

NOTE:

Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system,

the rad

io is also muted.

When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with

both vi

sual and audible alerts when a detected object is

present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is

also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP

state always requests the chime.

Blind Spot Alert Off

When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or

audible

alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.

NOTE:

The BSM system will store the current operating mode when

he veh

icle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is started the

previously stored mode will be recalled and used.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio

Frequenc

y (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with

dustr

y Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This

device must accept any interference received,

includ

ing interference that may cause undesired opera-

tion.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the

arty re

sponsible for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

SAFETY 239

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation — If

Equipped

The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system provides the

driver with audible, visual warnings (within the instrument

cluster display), and may apply a haptic warning in the form

of a brake jerk, to warn the driver when it detects a potential

frontal collision. The warnings are intended to provide the

driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the

potential collision.

NOTE:

FCW monitors the information from the forward looking

sensors

as well as Electronic Brake Controller (EBC), to calcu-

late the probability of a forward collision. When the system

etermin

es that a forward collision is probable, the driver

will be provided with audible and visual warnings as well as

a possible haptic warning in the form of a brake jerk.

If the driver does not take action based upon these progres-

sive warnings, then the system will provide a limited level of

ctive b

raking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the

potential forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warn

ings by braking and the system determines that the driver

intends

to avoid the collision by braking but has not applied

sufficient brake force, the system will compensate and

provide additional brake force as required.

If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed below

32 mph (5

2 km/h), the system may provide the maximum

braking p

ossible to mitigate the potential forward collision.

If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event

stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold the vehicle

at standstill for two seconds and then release the brakes.

FCW Message

When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in

front of

you is no longer probable, the warning message will

be deactivated.

240 SAFETY

NOTE:

• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 3 mph (

5 km/h).

• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than

vehicl

es such as guard rails or sign posts based on the

course prediction. This is expected and is a part of normal

FCW activation and functionality.

• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such misuse

of the

system, after four Active Braking events within a

key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW will be deac

tivated until the next Key Cycle.

• T

he FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the

vehicl

e is taken off-road, the FCW system should be deac-

tivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the surround-

ings.

• FC

W may not react to irrelevant objects such as overhead

object

s, ground reflections, objects not in the path of the

vehicle, stationary objects that are far away, oncoming

traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or higher rate of

speed.

• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable

screen

Turning FCW On or Off

The FCW button is located in the Uconnect display in the

control

settings. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-

media” in the Owner's Manual for further information.

• T

o turn the FCW system on, press the forward collision

button

once to turn the system on.

• To turn the FCW system off, press the forward collision

button

once to turn the system off.

NOTE:

• W

hen the FCW is “on”, this allows the system to warn the

driver

of a possible collision with the vehicle in front.

• When the FCW is “off” prevents the system from warning

the dr

iver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front.

If the FCW is set to “off”, “FCW OFF" will be displayed in

the instrument cluster display.

WARNING!

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to

avoid a c

ollision on its own, nor can FCW detect every

type of potential collision. The driver has the

responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the

vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this

warning could lead to serious injury or death.

SAFETY 241

• When FCW status is set to “Only Warning” prevents the

system from providing limited active braking, or addi-

tional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately

n the

event of a potential frontal collision.

• When FCW status is set to “Warning and Braking” this

allows

the system to warn the driver of a possible collision

with the vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings

and it applies autonomous braking.

• The system will retain the last setting selected by the driver

after

ignition shutdown.

FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity

The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are program-

mable through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect

ettings

” in “Multimedia” for further information.

• Far

• When t

he sensitivity of FCW is set to the “Far” setting

and th

e system status is “Only Warning “, this allows

the system to warn the driver of a possible more distant

collisions with the vehicle in front using audible/visual

warnings.

• More cautious drivers that do not mind frequent warn-

ings ma

y prefer this setting.

• Medium

• When t

he sensitivity of FCW is set to the “Medium”

settin

g and the system status is “Only Warning”, this

allows the system to warn the driver of a possible colli

sion with the vehicle in front using audible/visual

warnings.

•

Near

• When t

he sensitivity of FCW is set to the “Near” setting

and th

e system status is "Only Warning”, this allows

the system to warn the driver of a possible closer colli

sions with the vehicle in front using audible/visual

warnings.

•

This setting provides less reaction time than the “Far”

and “M

edium” settings, which allows for a more

dynamic driving experience.

• More dynamic or aggressive drivers that want to avoid

freque

nt warnings may prefer this setting.

242 SAFETY

FCW Limited Warning

If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW Limited Func-

tionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front

Windshi

eld” momentarily, there may be a condition that

limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still driv

able under normal conditions, the active braking may not be

fully av

ailable. Once the condition that limited the system

performance is no longer present, the system will return to

its full performance state. If the problem persists, see an

authorized dealer.

Service FCW Warning

If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays:

• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required

• Cruise

/FCW Unavailable Service Required

This i

ndicates there is an internal system fault. Although the

vehicle

is still drivable under normal conditions, have the

system checked by an authorized dealer.

FCW Sensor Protective Cover

Your vehicle is equipped with a protective cover that is to be

used whe

never the windshield is folded down in order to

protect the FCW sensor. To install the cover, follow the

instructions below.

1. Secure the top part of the cover so that it hinges to the

header

2. Swing the cover down and push on it so that it covers the

openin

3. Check to make sure the cover is secured properly.

NOTE:

sure to remove the cover before returning the windshield

o the

normal position. Store the cover in the cargo area.

Cleaning Instructions

During windshield down applications, dust/dirt can accu-

mulate in the cover and block the camera lens. Use a micro-

fiber cloth to clean the camera lens, module, and inside

over,

being careful not to damage or scratch the module.

SAFETY 243

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio

Frequenc

y (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with

dustr

y Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This

device must accept any interference received,

includ

ing interference that may cause undesired opera-

tion.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the

arty re

sponsible for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the

driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-

mended cold placard pressure.

NOTE:

The alert warning on the cluster will stay on until the tire is

nflate

d to the placard pressure.

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approxi-

mately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that

when the

outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure

will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on

cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pres

sure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three

ours,

or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour

period.

The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the

maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.

Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for infor

mation on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire

ressur

e will also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is

normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased

pressure.

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the

tire pr

essure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for

any reason, including low temperature effects and natural

pressure loss through the tire.

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pres-

sure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until

he tir

e pressure is at or above the recommended cold

placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire

Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light) illuminates,

you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold

placard pressure in order for the TPMS Light to turn off.

244 SAFETY

(Continued)

NOTE:

When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be

increas

ed up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the recom-

mended cold placard pressure in order to turn the TPMS

arning

Light off.

The system will automatically update and the TPMS

rning

Light will turn off once the system receives the

updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven

for up to 20

minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the

TPMS to

receive this information.

For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold

(parked

for more than three hours) placard pressure of 33 psi

(227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the

measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop

to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately

24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low enough to turn on the

TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire

pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the

TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this situation, the

TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the tires are

inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure

value.

NOTE:

When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be

ncreas

ed up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the recom-

mended cold placard pressure in order to turn the TPMS

arning

Light off.

CAUTION!

• T

he TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-

ment t

ires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning

have bee

n established for the tire size equipped on

your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor

damage may result when using replacement equipment

that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. The TPM

sensor is not designed for use on aftermarket wheels,

and may contribute to a poor overall system perfor

mance. Customers are encouraged to use OEM wheels

to assur

e TPMS feature operation.

• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pres-

sure M

onitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become

inoperab

le. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is

recommended that you take your vehicle to an autho

rized dealer to have your sensor function checked.

SAFETY 245

NOTE:

• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and

mainten

ance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or

condition.

• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge

while ad

justing your tire pressure.

• Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire

to over

heat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect

the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance,

and it

is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire

pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if

underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumi

nation of the TPMS Warning Light.

• S

easonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and

the TPM

S will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire.

System Operation

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless

technolo

gy with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to

monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel

as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to

the receiver module.

Tire Pressure Monitoring Display

NOTE:

It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure

in all o

f the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the

proper pressure.

• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always

reinsta

ll the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture

and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could

damage the TPMS sensor.

CAUTION! (Continued)

246 SAFETY

The TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver module

• Four tir

e pressure monitoring sensors

• Various

tire pressure monitoring system messages, which

display

in the instrument cluster

• Tire pressure monitoring telltale light

Tire Pr

essure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings

The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the

instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire

ressure

is low in one or more of the four active road

tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a "Tire

Low" message for a minimum of five seconds, an "Inflate to

XX" message and a graphic showing the pressure values of

each tire with the low tire pressure values in a different color.

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning

Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and

inflate

the tires with low pressure (those in a different color

in the instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s recom

mended cold placard pressure value as shown in the "Inflate

to XX" m

essage. Once the system receives the updated tire

pressures, the system will automatically update, the pres

sure values in the graphic display in the instrument cluster

will retu

rn to their original color, and the TPMS Warning

Light will turn off.

SAFETY 247

NOTE:

When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be

increas

ed up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the recom-

mended cold placard pressure in order to turn the TPMS

arning

Light off.

The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes

ove 1

5 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive

this in

formation.

Service TPMS Warning

When a system fault is detected, the TPMS Warning Light

will fla

sh on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.

The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the

instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE

SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and then

display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate

which sensor is not being received.

If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing

the syst

em fault still exists. If the system fault no longer

exists, the TPMS Warning Light will no longer flash, and the

“SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message will no

longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of

the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the

following:

• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facil-

ities

emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS

sensors

• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that

affect

s radio wave signals.

• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.

• Using t

ire chains on the vehicle.

• Using wh

eels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.

Vehicl

es With Compact Spare or Non-Matching Full Size

Spare

1. T

he compact spare tire or non-matching full size does not

have a

tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS

will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.

2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size spare

tire i

n place of a road tire that has a pressure below the

low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition cycle,

the TPMS Warning Light will remain on and a chime will

sound. In addition, the graphic in the instrument cluster

will still display a different color pressure value and an

"Inflate to XX" message.

248 SAFETY

3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above

15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning Light will flash on

and off

for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addi-

tion, the instrument cluster will display a “Service Tire

ressur

e System” message for five seconds and then

display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.

4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will sound, the

TPMS W

arning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds

and then remain on solid, and the instrument cluster will

display a “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message

for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the

pressure value.

5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and rein-

stall

it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare or

non-mat

ching full size, the TPMS will update automati-

cally. In addition, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off

nd the

graphic in the instrument cluster will display a

new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no

tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in

any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to

be driven for up to 20

minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)

in orde

r for the TPMS to receive this information.

Vehicles With a Full Size Matching Spare

1. If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size

spare

wheel and tire assembly, it has a tire pressure moni-

toring sensor, and can be monitored by the Tire Pressure

onitor

ing System (TPMS) when swapped with a low

pressure road tire.

2. In the event that the matching full-size spare tire is

swapped

with a low pressure road tire, the next ignition

switch cycle will still show the TPMS Warning Light to be

on, a chime to sound, an Inflate to XX message to appear

in the instrument cluster, and the graphic display will still

show the low tire pressure value in a different color.

3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minut

es above 15 mph

(24 km/h) will turn off the TPMS Warning Light as long

as none

of road tires are below the low pressure warning

threshold.

SAFETY 249

TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped

The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel and

tire as

semblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assemblies

that do not have TPMS sensors, such as when installing

winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle.

To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel and tire

assembli

es (road tires) with tires not equipped with Tire Pres-

sure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for

0 minutes

above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the

TPMS Wa

rning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and

then remain on. The instrument cluster will display the

“SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message and then

display dashes (--) in place of the pressure values.

Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no

longer c

hime or display the “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE

SYSTEM” message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--)

will remain in place of the pressure values.

To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire

assembl

ies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPMS

sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20

minutes above

15 mph (

24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS

Warning

Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then

turn off. The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE

TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message and then display pres

sure values in place of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle

the "SE

RVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM" message will no

longer be displayed as long as no system fault exists.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all radio

frequen

cy (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with

Industr

y Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) This device must accept any interference received,

includi

ng interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the

arty re

sponsible for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

250 SAFETY

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS

Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle

are the restraint systems:

Occupant Restraint Systems Features

• Seat Belt Systems

• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags

• Child

Restraints

Some of

the safety features described in this section may be stan-

dard equipment on some models, or may be optional equipment

on other

s. If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.

Important Safety Precautions

Please pay close attention to the information in this section.

It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to

keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk

of harm

from a deploying air bag:

1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride

buckled

up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.

2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt

proper

ly (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for

further information) must be secured in the appropriate

child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in a rear

seating position.

3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child

restra

int) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the

seat as far back as possible and use the proper child

restraint (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for

further information).

4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind

them o

r under their arm.

5. You should read the instructions provided with your

child

restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.

6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder

belts

properly.

7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved

back as

far as practical to allow the front air bags room to

inflate.

SAFETY 251

8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle

has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air

bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occu

pants and the door and occupants could be injured.

9. I

f the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified

to acco

mmodate a disabled person, refer to the

“Customer Assistance” section for customer service

contact information.

Seat Belt Systems

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on

short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and

could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far

away from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can

reduce t

he seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the

worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the

vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the

risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.

Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.

Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)

Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)

BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and

outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard

ront pa

ssenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The

Belt Alert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in

the START or ON/RUN position.

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an

air bag.

A deploying passenger front air bag can cause

death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,

including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.

• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front

seat of

a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint

in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat,

do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that

vehicle.

252 SAFETY

Initial Indication

If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in

the STA

RT or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a

few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if

equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is

unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or

ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on

and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are

buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not

active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.

BeltAlert Warning Sequence

The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the

vehicle

is moving above a specified vehicle speed range and

the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if

equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the

outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when

the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The

BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt

Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once

the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt

Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts are

buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based

on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied outboard

front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should

instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts.

Change of Status

If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped

with out

board front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles

their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert

warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled

again.

The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active

when the

outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.

BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items are

placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat

is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be

restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or

pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is prop

erly stowed.

BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized

dealer.

FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating

BeltAlert.

NOTE:

If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or outboard

front s

eat passenger (if equipped with outboard front

passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt

Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver

and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.

SAFETY 253

(Continued)

Lap/Shoulder Belts

All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/

shoulde

r belts.

The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very

dden

stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder

part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal

conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and

reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being

thrown out of the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe

injuri

es in a collision. The air bags work with your seat

belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air

bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt

even though you have air bags.

• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much

greater

injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You

can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passen

gers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be

sure you

and others in your vehicle are buckled up

properly.

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside

of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas

are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle

that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using

a seat

belt properly. Occupants, including the driver,

should always wear their seat belts whether or not an

air bag is also provided at their seating position to

minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event

of a crash.

• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your

injuri

es in a collision much worse. You might suffer

internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat

belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt

safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.

• Two people should never be belted into a single seat

belt.

People belted together can crash into one another

in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a

lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person,

no matter what their size.

WARNING! (Continued)

254 SAFETY

(Continued)

WARNING!

• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury

in a c

ollision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the strong

hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always

wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and

keep it snug.

• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a

collisi

on, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt

is flat against your body, without twists. If you can’t

straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to an autho

rized dealer immediately and have it fixed.

• A

seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will

not prot

ect you properly. The lap portion could ride too

high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries.

Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest

you.

• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you prop-

erly. I

n a sudden stop, you could move too far forward,

increas

ing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt

snugly.

• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.

Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the

vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury.

A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal inju

ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the

seat be

lt over your shoulder so that your strongest

bones will take the force in a collision.

• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you

from in

jury during a collision. You are more likely to

hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your

shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be

used together.

• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision

and le

ave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt

system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose

parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.

Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. Seat

belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.

WARNING! (Continued)

SAFETY 255

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust

the sea

2. T

he seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat,

nd nex

t to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles

equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull

out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as

far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your

lap.

Pulling Out The Latch Plate

3. W

hen the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch

plate i

nto the buckle until you hear a “click.”

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle

4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across

your hip

s, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the

lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen

the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on

the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding

under the seat belt in a collision.

256 SAFETY

Positioning The Lap Belt

5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest

with min

imal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not

resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any

slack in the shoulder belt.

6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle.

The sea

t belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi-

tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing

o allow

the seat belt to retract fully.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure

Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/

shoulder

belt.

1. P

osition the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor

oint.

At about 6 to 12 inches

(15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,

grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to

create a fold that begins immediately above the latch

plate.

3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.

The fol

ded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the

latch plate.

4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the

folded

webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.

SAFETY 257

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage

In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the top of

the shou

lder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to

position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze

the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it

up or down to the position that serves you best.

Adjustable Upper Anchorage

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer

the shou

lder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you

are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt

anchorage in a higher position. After you release the

anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure

that it is locked in position.

NOTE:

The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped

with an E

asy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder

belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without

pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the

shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on the

shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.

WARNING!

• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your

injurie

s in a collision much worse. You might suffer

internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat

belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt

safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.

• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest

with mi

nimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and

not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw

any slack in the shoulder belt.

• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the effec-

tiveness

of the safety belt in a crash.

• A

lways make all seat belt height adjustments when the

vehicle

is stationary.

258 SAFETY

Seat Belt Extender

If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when the

webbing is

fully extended and the adjustable upper shoulder

belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position, an

authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender.

The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the existing

seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is

not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts

Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant

women: th

e risk of injury in the event of an accident is

reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are

wearing a seat belt.

Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and

across t

he strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt

across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the

shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.

WARNING!

• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically

require

d in order to properly fit the original seat belt

system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when

worn, the distance between the front edge of the Seat

Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occupant’s

body is LESS than 6

inches.

• U

sing a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can

increas

e the risk of serious injury or death in a colli-

sion. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt

s not lon

g enough and only use in the recommended

seating positions. Remove and store the Seat Belt

Extender when not needed.

SAFETY 259

Seat Belt Pretensioner

The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with preten-

sioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the

seat bel

t in the event of a collision. These devices may

improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack

from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for

all size occupants, including those in child restraints.

NOTE:

These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt place-

ment by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly

nd posi

tioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint

Controll

er (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are

single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air

bag must be replaced immediately.

Energy Management Feature

The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an

Energy Man

agement feature that may help further reduce

the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt

system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release

webbing in a controlled manner.

Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are

equipped

with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For

additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints

Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”

section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the

locking feature for each seating position.

ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

(Two-Door M

odels)

260 SAFETY

ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

(Four-Door Models)

If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR

d is b

eing used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt

webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the

occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the

ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat

belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this

case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing

necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s

mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you

hear a "click."

In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automati-

cally pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove any

slack in

the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode

anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that

has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and

under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat

of a vehicle with a rear seat.

How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.

2. Grasp

the shoulder portion and pull downward until the

entire

seat belt is extracted.

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an

air bag.

A deploying passenger front air bag can cause

death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,

including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.

• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front

seat of

a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint

in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat,

do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that

vehicle.

SAFETY 261

3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you

will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is

now in the Automatic Locking Mode.

How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode

Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to

retract

completely to disengage the Automatic Locking

Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking

mode.

Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)

Some of the safety features described in this section may be stan-

dard equipment on some models, or may be optional equipment

on others

. If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.

The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a collision.

The Occup

ant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal

circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with the electrical

Air Bag System Components. Your vehicle may be equipped

with the following Air Bag System Components:

Air Bag System Components

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

• Air Bag

Warning Light

• Steerin

g Wheel and Column

• Instrum

ent Panel

• Knee Im

pact Bolsters

• Driver

and Front Passenger Air Bags

• Seat Be

lt Buckle Switch

• Supplem

ental Side Air Bags

• Front an

d Side Impact Sensors

• Seat Be

lt Pretensioners

WARNING!

• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switch-

able Au

tomatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any

other sea

t belt function is not working properly when

checked according to the procedures in the Service

Manual.

• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase

the ris

k of injury in collisions.

• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain

occupant

s who are wearing the seat belt or children

who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only

used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child

restraints that have a harness for restraining the child.

262 SAFETY

• Seat Track Position Sensors

• Occupant Classification System

Air Bag War

ning Light

The ORC monitors the readiness of the elec-

tronic parts of the air bag system whenever the

ignitio

n switch is in the START or ON/RUN

position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF posi

tion or in the ACC position, the air bag system is

not on

and the air bags will not inflate.

The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may

deploy t

he air bag system even if the battery loses power or

it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.

The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instru-

ment panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a

self-ch

eck when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN

position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will

turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the

system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either

momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to

alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup.

The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the

instrum

ent panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is

detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics

also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air bag

system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the

following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air

bag system immediately.

• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the

four t

o eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in the

ON/RUN position.

• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to

eight-s

econd interval.

• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or

remain

s on while driving.

NOTE:

If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges

re not

working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags may not

be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized

dealer service the air bag system immediately.

SAFETY 263

Redundant Air Bag Warning Light

If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is

detected, which could affect the Supple-

mental Restraint System (SRS), the Redun-

dant Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate

n the i

nstrument panel. The Redundant Air

Bag Warning Light will stay on until the fault

is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to alert you

that the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on and

a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning

Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving

have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.

For additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag

Warning L

ight refer to “Getting To Know Your Instrument

Panel” section of this manual.

Front Air Bags

This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for

both the

driver and front passenger. The front air bags are a

supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver

front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.

The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument

panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS

AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.

Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations

WARNING!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument

panel cou

ld mean you won’t have the air bag system to

protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as

a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays

on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you

drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag

system immediately.

1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags

2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters

264 SAFETY

Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features

The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver

and fro

nt passenger air bags. This system provides output

appropriate to the severity and type of collision as deter

mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which

may rece

ive information from the front impact sensors (if

equipped) or other system components.

The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an

impact

that requires air bag deployment. A low energy

output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy

output is used for more severe collisions.

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front

passenge

r seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the

driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt

buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced

Front Air Bags.

This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front

passenge

r seat track position sensors that may adjust the

inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon

seat position.

This vehicle has an Occupant Classification System (“OCS”)

in the

front passenger seat. The OCS is designed to activate

or deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag

depending on the occupant’s seated weight. It is designed to

deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag for an

unoccupied seat and for occupants whose seated weight

classifies them in a category other than a properly seated

adult. This could be a child, teenager, or even an adult.

WARNING!

• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument

panel

during front air bag deployment could cause

serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to

inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to

reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an

air ba

g. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause

death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,

including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.

• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front

seat of

a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint

in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat,

do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that

vehicle.

SAFETY 265

(Continued)

The Passenger Air Bag Disable (“PAD”) Indicator Light (an

amber light located on the overhead sports bar) tells the

driver and front passenger when the Passenger Advanced

Front Air Bag is deactivated. The PAD Indicator Light illumi

nates the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” to show that

he Pas

senger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy

during a collision.

NOTE:

When the front passenger seat is empty or when very light

objects

are placed on the seat, the Passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag will not deploy even though the Passenger Air Bag

Disable (PAD) System Indicator Light is NOT illuminated.

Front Air Bag Operation

Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection

by suppl

ementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not

expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover

collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all frontal

collisions, including some that may produce substantial

vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck

underrides, and angle offset collisions.

On the other hand, depending on the type and location of

impact,

front air bags may deploy in crashes with little

vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial

deceleration.

Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over

time, v

ehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good

indicators of whether or not an air bag should have

deployed.

WARNING!

• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on

the in

strument panel or steering wheel because any

such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a colli

sion severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.

• D

o not put anything on or around the air bag covers or

attemp

t to open them manually. You may damage the

air bags and you could be injured because the air bags

may no longer be functional. The protective covers for

the air bag cushions are designed to open only when

the air bags are inflating.

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe

injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat

belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air

bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts

even though you have air bags.

WARNING! (Continued)

266 SAFETY

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions,

and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from

an inflating air bag.

When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air bags,

it signal

s the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas

is generated to inflate the front air bags.

The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passenger

side of

the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way

as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully

inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front

air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the

driver and front passenger.

Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front

Passenger Seat

e OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for

this veh

icle. It is designed to activate or deactivate the

Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag depending on the occu

pant’s seated weight. It is designed to deactivate the

Passenger

Advanced Front Air Bag for an unoccupied seat

and for occupants whose seated weight classifies them in a

category other than a properly seated adult. This could be a

child, teenager, or even an adult.

The Occupant Classification System (OCS) Consists Of

The Followi

ng:

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

• Occupan

t Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor

located

in the front passenger seat

• Passenger Air Bag Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light – an

amber l

ight located on the overhead sports bar

• Air Bag Warning Light

• Passenge

r Seat Belt

Occupan

t Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor

The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located

undernea

th the front passenger seat. The Sensor is located

beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any weight on the

seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input from

the Sensor to determine the front passenger’s most probable

classification. The OCM communicates this information to

the ORC. The ORC uses the classification to determine

whether it should activate or deactivate the Passenger

Advanced Front Air Bag. In order for the OCS to operate as

SAFETY 267

designed, it is important for the front passenger to be seated

properly and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated

passengers are:

• Sitting upright.

• Facing fo

rward.

• Sitting

in the center of the seat with their feet comfortably

on or n

ear the floor.

• Sitting with their back against the seat back and the seat

back in

an upright position.

Seated Properly

The OCS may deactivate the deployment of the Passenger

Advanced

Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates that:

• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very light

objects

in it.

• The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing child

restrai

nt.

• The front passenger seat is occupied by a child, including

a child

seated in a forward-facing child restraint or booster

seat.

• The front passenger seat is occupied by a small passenger,

includi

ng a child or small adult.

• The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her

weight is

taken off of the seat for a period of time.

268 SAFETY

* When the front passenger seat is empty or when very light

objects are placed on the seat and the seat belt is unbuckled,

the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even

though the PAD System Indicator Light is NOT illuminated.

** It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,

allowing

the deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger

seat and never install a child restraint system, including a

rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.

Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System

Front Passenger

Seat Oc

cupant

Status

Front Passenger

Advanced

Air

Bag Disabled

Indicator Light

(“PAD”) Status

Front Passenger

Air Bag

Status

Unoccupied seat*

Unbuckle

NOT

ILLUMINATED

DEACTIVATED

Unoccupied

seat*Bu

ckled

“PASSENGER

AIR BAG OFF”

DEACTIVATED

Grocery bags,

heavy br

iefcases,

and other relatively

light objects

“PASSENGER

AIR BAG

OFF”

DEACTIVATED

Rear-facing child

restrai

nt**

“PASSENGER

AIR BAG OFF”

DEACTIVATED

Child, including a

child in a

forward-facing

child restraint or

booster seat**

“PASSENGER

AIR BAG OFF”

DEACTIVATED

Small adult

“PASSENGER

AIR BAG

OFF”

DEACTIVATED

Properly seated

adult

NOT

LLUMINATED

ACTIVATED

Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System

Front Passenger

Seat Occupant

Status

Front Passenger

Advanced Air

Bag Disabled

Indicator Light

(“PAD”) Status

Front Passenger

Air Bag Status

SAFETY 269

Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled (PAD) Indi-

cator Light

The Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled (PAD)

Indicato

r Light (an amber light located on the overhead

sports bar) tells the driver and front passenger when the

Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. The PAD

Indicator light illuminates the words “PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF” to show that the Passenger Advanced Front Air

Bag will not deploy during a collision. When the front

passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are placed

on the seat and the seat belt is unbuckled, the Passenger

Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even though the

PAD indicator light is NOT illuminated.

The PAD indicator light should not be illuminated when an

adult pa

ssenger is properly seated in the front passenger

seat. The driver and adult passenger should verify that the

PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is

riding in the front passenger seat. If an adult is not seated

properly, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may deac

tivate and the PAD Indicator Light will be illuminated.

The PAD Indicator Light should be illuminated and the

assenger

Advanced Front Air Bag should be deactivated for

most properly seated and restrained children in the

passenger seat and for most properly installed child restraint

systems. However, under certain conditions, even with a

properly installed child restraint system, the PAD Indicator

Light may not be illuminated, even though the Passenger

Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. This can occur if the

child restraint is lighter than the lightest weight necessary to

illuminate the PAD Indicator Light. NEVER assume the

Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated unless the

PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words

“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF.”

NOTE:

If the seat belt is buckled for an empty seat, the PAD Indi-

cator Light will illuminate.

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an

air bag.

A deploying passenger front air bag can cause

death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,

including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.

• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front

seat of

a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint

in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat,

do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that

vehicle.

270 SAFETY

If The PAD Indicator Light Is Illuminated For An Adult

Passenger:

If an adult passenger is seated in the front passenger seat and

the PAD

Indicator Light is illuminated, the passenger may be

sitting improperly. Follow the steps below to allow the OCS

to detect the adult passenger’s seated weight to activate the

Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag:

1. Turn off the vehicle and have the adult passenger step out

of the

vehicle.

2. Remove any extra materials from the passenger seat, such

as cus

hions, pads, seat covers, seat massagers, blankets,

extra clothing, etc.

3. Place the seatback in the full upright position.

4. Have

the adult passenger sit in the center of the seat, with

the pa

ssenger’s feet comfortably on or near the floor, and

with their back against the seatback.

5. Restart the vehicle and have the passenger remain in this

seated

position for two to three minutes after restarting

the vehicle.

WARNING!

• If the PAD Indicator Light remains illuminated for an

adult

passenger, have an authorized dealer service the

air bag system immediately. Failure to do so may cause

serious injury or death. If the PAD Indicator Light is

illuminated with the words "PASSENGER AIR BAG

OFF," the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not

deploy in the event of a collision.

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an

air ba

g. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause

death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,

including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.

• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front

seat of

a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint

in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat,

do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that

vehicle.

• Children 12 years or younger should always ride

buckle

d up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.

SAFETY 271

Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)

When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult,

occupie

s the passenger seat, the Passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag may be deactivated. Therefore, the Passenger

Advanced Front Air Bag may or may not be activated for a

lighter weight passenger, including a small adult

(depending on size) who is seated in the passenger seat. This

does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.

The driver and passenger must always use the PAD Indi-

cator Light as a determination of whether the Passenger

Advance

d Front Air Bag is activated or deactivated. If the

PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words

“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” when an adult is in the front

passenger seat, have the passenger reposition his or her body

in the seat until the PAD Indicator Light goes out.

If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words

“PASSEN

GER AIR BAG OFF” the Passenger Advanced

Front Air Bag will not inflate in the event of a collision.

Do Not Decrease OR Increase The Front Passenger’s

Seated

Weight On The Front Passenger Seat

The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly posi-

tioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so may result

n seri

ous injury or death. The OCS determines the most prob-

able classification of the occupant that it detects. The OCS will

etect

the front passenger’s decreased or increased seated

weight, which may result in deactivation or activation of the

Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not

mean that the OCS is working improperly. Decreasing the

front passenger’s seated weight on the front passenger seat

may result in deactivation of the Passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag causing serious injury or death. Increasing the front

passenger’s seated weight on the front passenger seat may

result in activation of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.

Examples of improper front passenger seating include:

• The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another part

of the

vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instrument panel).

• The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns to

face t

he rear of the vehicle.

• The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright position.

• The fr

ont passenger carries or holds an object while seated

(e.g.,

backpack, box, etc.).

• Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.

272 SAFETY

• Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat and

center console.

• Accessories that may change the seated weight on the front

passenge

r seat are attached to the front passenger seat.

• Anything that may decrease or increase the front

passenge

r’s seated weight.

The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable

classifi

cation. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is

seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output

signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s prop

erly seated weight input, for example:

Not Seated Properly

SAFETY 273

(Continued)

Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly

WARNING!

• If a child restraint system, child, small teenager or adult in

the fro

nt passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant

may provide an output signal to the OCS that is different

from the occupant’s properly seated weight input. This

may result in serious injury or death in a collision.

• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with the

seatbac

k in an upright position, your back against the

seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the center of

the seat, with your feet comfortably on or near the floor.

274 SAFETY

(Continued)

The Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate whenever the

OCS is unable to classify the front passenger seat status.

A malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation of the air

g system

. If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come

on, or stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as

u drive

, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for service

immediately.

The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS compo-

nents that may affect Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag

inflatio

n. In order for the OCS to properly classify the seated

weight of a front seat passenger, the OCS components must

function as designed. Do not make any modifications to the

front passenger seat components, assembly, or to the seat

cover. If the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any

reason, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only FCA

US LLC approved seat accessories may be used.

• Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks, boxes,

etc.) w

hile seated in the front passenger seat. Holding

an object may provide an output signal to the OCS that

is different than the occupant’s properly seated weight

input, which may result in serious injury or death in a

collision.

WARNING!

• Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument

panel c

ould mean you won’t have the air bags to protect

you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb

check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after

you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an

authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

WARNING! (Continued)

• Placing an object on the floor under the front passenger

seat may prevent the OCS from working properly,

which may result in serious injury or death in a colli

sion. Do not place any objects on the floor under the

front pas

senger seat.

• If there is a fault present in the OCS, both the PAD Indi-

cator L

ight and the Air Bag Warning Light will illumi-

nate to show that the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag

s deact

ivated. Should this occur, the Passenger

Advanced Front Air Bag will remain deactivated until the

fault is cleared. This indicates that you should take the

vehicle to an authorized dealer for service immediately.

WARNING! (Continued)

SAFETY 275

The following requirements must be strictly followed:

• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or

compon

ents in any way.

• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or cush-

ions n

ot designated by FCA US LLC for the specific model

being re

paired. Always use the correct seat cover and

cushion specified for the vehicle.

• Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an after-

market

seat cover or cushion.

• D

o not add a secondary seat cover or mat.

• At no

time should any Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS)

component or SRS related component or fastener be

modified or replaced with any part except those which are

approved by FCA US LLC.

WARNING!

• Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the

passen

ger seat assembly, its related components, seat

cover, or cushion may inadvertently change the air bag

deployment in case of a frontal collision. This could

result in death or serious injury to the front passenger

if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A modified

vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).

• If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for

persons

with disabilities, contact an authorized dealer.

276 SAFETY

Knee Impact Bolsters

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver

and fron

t passenger, and position the front occupants for

improved interaction with the front air bags.

Supplemental Side Air Bags

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)

This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted

Side Air

Bags (SABs).

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are

located

in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are

marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on

the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.

The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury

during ce

rtain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduc-

tion potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label

When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard

ide of

the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys

through the seat seam into the space between the occupant

and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with

such a high force that it could injure occupants if they are not

seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where

the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury

from a deploying air bag.

WARNING!

• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact

bolsters

in any way.

• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact

bolsters

such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band

radios, etc.

SAFETY 277

Side Impacts

The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side

impacts

. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) deter-

mines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a

articu

lar impact event is appropriate, based on the severity

and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the ORC in

determining the appropriate response to impact events. The

system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the

impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side

Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air

Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the

left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the

right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a

good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have

deployed.

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,

includi

ng some collisions at certain angles, or some side

collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger

compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled

or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy.

Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint

system.

Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to

blink your eyes.

WARNING!

Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between

you and t

he Side Air Bags; the performance could be

adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into

you, causing serious injury.

WARNING!

• Occupants, including children, who are up against or

very clos

e to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or

killed. Occupants, including children, should never

lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area

where the side air bags inflate, even if they are in an

infant or child restraint.

• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are

necess

ary for your protection in all collisions. They also

help keep you in position, away from an inflating Side

Air Bag. To get the best protection from the Side Air

Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and

sit upright with their backs against the seats. Children

must be properly restrained in a child restraint or

booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child.

278 SAFETY

NOTE:

Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but

they will

open during air bag deployment.

Air Bag System Components

NOTE:

The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the

internal

circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with

electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

• Air Bag

Warning Light

• Steerin

g Wheel and Column

• Instrum

ent Panel

• Knee Im

pact Bolsters

• Driver

and Front Passenger Air Bags

• Seat Be

lt Buckle Switch

• Supplem

ental Side Air Bags

• Front an

d Side Impact Sensors

• Seat Be

lt Pretensioners

• Seat Tr

ack Position Sensors

• Occupan

t Classification System

WARNING!

• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against

the door

or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.

• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment

could ca

use you to be severely injured or killed.

• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more

severe

injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work

with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some colli

sions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear

your sea

t belt even though you have Side Air Bags.

SAFETY 279

If A Deployment Occurs

The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after

deployme

nt.

NOTE:

Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions.

his do

es not mean something is wrong with the air bag

system.

If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or

all of

the following may occur:

• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/

or skin

reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy

and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns

or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymna

sium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.

hey are

not permanent and normally heal quickly.

However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a few

days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor imme

diately.

• A

s the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like parti-

cles.

The particles are a normal by-product of the process

that gen

erates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation.

These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or

throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with

cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air.

If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles

settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s

instructions for cleaning.

Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If

you are

involved in another collision, the air bags will not be

in place to protect you.

WARNING!

Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot

protect

you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat

belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies

replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also,

have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced

as well.

280 SAFETY

NOTE:

• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but

they wil

l open during air bag deployment.

• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an

author

ized dealer immediately.

Enhanced Accident Response System

In the event of an impact, if the communication network

emains

intact, and the power remains intact, depending on

the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether to

have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the

following functions:

• Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped)

• Cut of

f battery power to the electric motor (If Equipped)

• Flash h

azard lights as long as the battery has power

• Turn o

n the interior lights, which remain on as long as the

batter

y has power or for 15 minutes from the intervention

of the

Enhanced Accident Response System.

• Unlock the power door locks.

Your v

ehicle may also be designed to perform any of these

other f

unctions in response to the Enhanced Accident

Response System:

• Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC Blower

Motor,

Close the HVAC Circulation Door

• Cut off battery power to the:

• Engine

• E

lect

ric Motor (if equipped)

• Elect

ric power steering

• Brake

booster

• Elect

ric park brake

• Autom

atic transmission gear selector

• Horn

• Fr

ont

wiper

• Headl

amp washer pump

SAFETY 281

NOTE:

After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to the STOP

(OFF/LOCK)

position and remove the key from the ignition

switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully check the

vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the

ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before

resetting the system and starting the engine. If there are no

fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g.

headlights) after an accident, reset the system by following

the procedure described below. If you have any doubt,

contact an authorized dealer.

Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure

In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System

functio

ns after an event, the ignition switch must be changed

from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully

check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment

and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel

tank before resetting the system and starting the engine.

Maintaining Your Air Bag System

WARNING!

• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause

it to

fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air

bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the

components or wiring, including adding any kind of

badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or

the upper passenger side of the instrument panel. Do not

modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add

aftermarket side steps or running boards.

• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag

system

yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on

your vehicle that it has an air bag system.

• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag

system.

The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not

function properly if modifications are made. Take your

vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system

service. If your seat, including your trim cover and

cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including

removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment

bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only

manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If

it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons

with disabilities, contact an authorized dealer.

282 SAFETY

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).

The mai

n purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or

near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or

hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding

how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to

record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems

for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The

EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

• Whethe

r or not the driver and passenger safety belts were

buckled

/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator

and/or

brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These

data can help provide a better understanding of the

circums

tances in which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE:

EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial

rash s

ituation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR

under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g.,

name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.

However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could

combine the EDR data with the type of personally identi

fying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is

require

d, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In

addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as

law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read

the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Child Restraints

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times,

including babies and children. Every state in the United

States, and every Canadian province, requires that small

children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and

you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled

up in a

rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,

children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats

rather than in the front.

SAFETY 283

There are different sizes and types of restraints for children

from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an

adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s

Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child.

Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings

in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the labels

attached to the child restraint.

Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a

label c

ertifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards.

You should also make sure that you can install it in the

vehicle where you will use it.

NOTE:

• F

or additional information, refer to http:/

/www.nhtsa.gov/

parents-and-caregivers or call: 1–888–327–4236

• Canadi

an residents should refer to Transport Canada’s

website

for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/

eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-child-

safety-index-53.htm

WARNING!

In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a

projecti

le inside the vehicle. The force required to hold

even an infant on your lap could become so great that

you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you

are. The child and others could be badly injured or

killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a

proper restraint for the child’s size.

284 SAFETY

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age

Recommended Type Of Child

Restrai

Infants and Toddlers

Children who are two years old or

younger a

nd who have not reached the

height or weight limits of their child

restraint

Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible

Child R

estraint, facing rearward in a

rear seat of the vehicle

Small Children

Children who are at least two years old

r who h

ave outgrown the height or

weight limit of their rear-facing child

restraint

Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a

five-po

int Harness, facing forward in a

rear seat of the vehicle

Larger Children

Children who have outgrown their

orward-

facing child restraint, but are

too small to properly fit the vehicle’s

seat belt

Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the

vehicle

seat belt, seated in a rear seat of

the vehicle

Children Too Large for Child Restraints

Children 12 years old or younger, who

ave ou

tgrown the height or weight

limit of their booster seat

Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of

the veh

icle

SAFETY 285

(Continued)

Infant And Child Restraints

Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in

the veh

icle until they are two years old or until they reach

either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child

restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used

rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.

The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is

recomme

nded for children from birth until they reach the

weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child

seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the

vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight

limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so

they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown

their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old.

Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the

highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child

seat.

Older Children And Child Restraints

Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their

rear-fa

cing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing in

the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child

seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children

who are over two years old or who have outgrown the

rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing

convertible child seat. Children should remain in a

forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as

possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the

child seat.

All children whose weight or height is above the

forward-

facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-posi-

tioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly.

f the

child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an

air ba

g. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause

death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,

including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.

• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front

seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint

in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat,

do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that

vehicle.

WARNING! (Continued)

286 SAFETY

cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they

should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and

belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the

seat belt.

Children Too Large For Booster Seats

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt

comfort

ably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over

the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,

should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step

test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat belt

alone:

1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the

vehicl

e seat?

2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of

the ve

hicle seat – while the child is still sitting all the way

back?

3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between

the ne

ck and arm?

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the

child’s

thighs and not the stomach?

5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?

If the

answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the

child s

till needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the

child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit peri

odically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A

WARNING!

• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or

child

restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The

child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child

restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when

installing an infant or child restraint.

• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do not

move the

vehicle seat forward or rearward because it

can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the

child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat posi

tion. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall

he chi

ld restraint.

• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the

vehicle

with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or

remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the

vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the

occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal

injury.

SAFETY 287

child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of posi-

tion. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the

child c

loser to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat

to position the seat belt on the child correctly.

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

WARNING!

Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an

arm or b

ehind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt

will not protect a child properly, which may result in

serious injury or death. A child must always wear both

the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.

Restraint Type

Combined Weight

of the Child +

Child Restraint

Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below

LATCH – Lower

nchors

Only

Seat Belt Only

LATCH – Lower

nchors

+ Top

Tether Anchor

Seat Belt + Top

Tether

Anchor

Rear-Facing Child

Restrai

Up to 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

X X

Rear-Facing Child

Restrai

More than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

Forward-Facing

Child R

estraint

Up to 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

X X

Forward-Facing

Child R

estraint

More than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

288 SAFETY

Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH)

Restraint System

LATCH Label

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage

system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle

anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats.

There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the

seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether

anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchor

ages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without

using the

vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may

have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In

these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the

top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see

the following table for more information.

SAFETY 289

LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This

Vehicle

LATCH Positions (Two-Door Models)

LATCH Positions (Four-Door Models)

Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

290 SAFETY

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

What is the weight limit (child’s weight

+ weight o

f the child restraint) for using

the LATCH anchorage system to attach

the child restraint?

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight

of the c hild and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the

seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once

the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).

Can the LATCH anchorages and the

seat be

lt be used together to attach a

rear-facing or forward-facing child

restraint?

Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH

nchora

ge system to attach a rear-facing or

forward-facing child restraint.

Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages

if allo

wed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your

booster seat owner’s manual for more information.

Can a child seat be installed in the

center

position using the inner LATCH

lower anchorages?

Two Door Models –

Four Do

or Models –

Yes

Four D

oor Only: You can install child restraints with

flexibl

e lower anchors in the center position. The inner

anchorages are 18.5

inches (470 mm) apart. Do not install

child r

estraints with rigid lower anchors in the center

position.

See “Head Restraints” in “Getting To Know Your

Vehicle

” for further information.

SAFETY 291

NOTE:

If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint interferes with

the ins

tallation of the child restraint, the head restraint may

be folded and the child seat installed in front of it (Two-Door

Models).

Can two child restraints be attached

using a

common lower LATCH

anchorage?

Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more

hild r

estraints. If the center position does not have

dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to

install a child seat in the center position next to a child

seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard

position.

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch

the bac

k of the front passenger seat?

Yes

The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger

seat if

the child restraint manufacturer also allows

contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more

information.

Can the rear head restraints be

removed

Two Door Models –

Four Do

or Models –

Yes

Two Do

or Models — None

Four Door — The center head restraint can be removed if

t inte

rferes with the installation of the child restraint.

See “Head Restraints” in “Getting To Know Your

Vehicle

” for further information.

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

292 SAFETY

Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded

Locating The LATCH Anchorages

The lower anchorages are round bars that are found

at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seat-

back. They are just visible when you lean into the

ear sea

t to install the child restraint. You will easily feel

them if you run your finger along the gap between the seat

back and seat cushion. If your vehicle is equipped with

anchorage

symbols on the seatback, they will be located just

above the lower anchorages.

LATCH Anchorages (Two-Door Models)

WARNING!

Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright

position w

hen the seat is to be used by an occupant who

is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with the head

restraint in its lowered position could result in serious

injury or death in a collision.

1 — Folded Headrest

2 — Child Restraint

SAFETY 293

LATCH Anchorages (Four-Door Models)

Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages

Two-Door Models:

There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear

seating

position located on the back of the seat, near

the floor.

Tether Strap Anchorages (Two-Door Models)

294 SAFETY

Four-Door Models:

There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating

position

located on the back of the seat.

Tether Strap Anchorages (Four-Door Models)

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped

with a ri

gid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will

have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage

and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage.

Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child

restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The

tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top

tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is

attached to the anchorage.

Center Seat LATCH

Two-Door Models:

Four-Door Models:

Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attachments in

the cent

er seating position. Only install this type of child

restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child restraints

with flexible, webbing mounted lower attachments can be

installed in any rear seating position.

WARNING!

This vehicle does not have a center seating position. Do

not use t

he center lower LATCH anchorages to install a

child seat in the center of the back seat.

WARNING!

Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one

child re

straint. If you are installing LATCH-compatible

child restraints next to each other, you must use the seat belt

for the center position. You can then use either the LATCH

anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for installing child seats in

the outboard positions.

Please refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child

Restrain

t System” for typical installation instructions.

SAFETY 295

Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-

facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child

restrai

nt systems will be installed as described here.

To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint

If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic

cking

Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,

following the instructions below. See the section “Installing

Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what

type of seat belt each seating position has.

1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether

strap

of the child seat so that you can more easily attach

the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.

2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that

seatin

g position. For some second row seats, you may

need to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint (if

adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved

forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to

move it to its rear-most position to make room for the

child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to

allow more room for the child seat.

3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint

to the

lower anchorages in the selected seating position.

4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top

tether

anchorage. See the section “Installing Child

Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc

tions to attach a tether anchor.

5. T

ighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint

rearwar

d and downward into the seat. Remove slack in

the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions.

6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling

back an

d forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should

not move more than 1

inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.

296 SAFETY

How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR) Seat Belt:

When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child

restrai

nt, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by

other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An

unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and acci-

dentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child

restrai

nt using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind

the child restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the buckled

seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead

of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt

through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not

lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the

seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them.

Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt

Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle

seats b

y lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are

equippe

d with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt

tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to

use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into

a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the

retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the

retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise

while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor.

Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description in

“Switcha

ble Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)” under

“Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional information on

ALR.

WARNING!

• Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH

anchor

ages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child

could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint

manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an

infant or child restraint.

• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand

only thos

e loads imposed by correctly-fitted child

restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used

for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other

items or equipment to the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a

child

restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The

child could be badly injured or killed.

• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions

exactl

y when installing an infant or child restraint.

SAFETY 297

Please see the table below and the following sections for

more information.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child

Restraints In Th

is Vehicle

Automatic Locking Retractor Locations

(Two-Door M

odels)

Automatic Locking Retractor Locations

(Four-Door M

odels)

ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

298 SAFETY

NOTE:

If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint interferes with

the ins

tallation of the child restraint, the head restraint may

be folded and the child seat installed in front of it (Two-Door

Models).

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts

What is the weight limit (child’s weight

+ weight o

f the child restraint) for using

the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to

attach a forward facing child restraint?

Weight limit of the

Child R

estraint

Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to

install

a forward facing child restraint, up to the

recommended weight limit of the child restraint.

Can the rear-facing child restraint

touch t

he back of the front passenger

seat?

Yes

Contact between the front passenger seat and the child

restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer

also allows contact.

Can the rear head restraints be

removed

Two Door Models – No

Four Door Models –

Two Do

or — None

Four Door — The center head restraint can be removed if

t inte

rferes with the installation of the child restraint.

See “Head Restraints” in “Getting To Know Your

Vehicle

” for further information.

Can the buckle stalk be twisted to

tighten

the seat belt against the belt

path of the child restraint?

Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an

LR ret

ractor.

SAFETY 299

Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded

Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic

Locking Retrac

tor (ALR):

Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle

seats by

lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder

belt.

1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.

For some

second row seats, you may need to recline the

seat and/or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a

better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rear

ward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its

ear-mos

t position to make room for the child seat. You

may also move the front seat forward to allow more room

for the child seat.

WARNING!

Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright

position w

hen the seat is to be used by an occupant who

is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with the head

restraint in its lowered position could result in serious

injury or death in a collision.

1 — Folded Headrest

2 — Child Restraint

WARNING!

• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a

child r

estraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The

child could be badly injured or killed.

• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions

exactly

when installing an infant or child restraint.

300 SAFETY

2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to

pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not

twist the belt webbing in the belt path.

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a

“click.

”

4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against

the ch

ild seat.

5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of

the be

lt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out

of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back

into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear

a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in the

Automatic Locking mode.

6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked,

you sho

uld not be able to pull out any webbing. If the

retractor is

not

locked, repeat step 5.

7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap

portion around the child restraint while you push the

child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle

seat.

8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating

positi

on has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether

strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See the

section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether

Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.

9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling

back an

d forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should

not move more than 1

inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt

occasio

nally, and pull it tight if necessary.

SAFETY 301

Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether

Anchorage

1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to install

the chi ld restraint to find the tether anchorage. You may

need to move the seat forward to provide better access to

the tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for

that seating position, move the child restraint to another

position in the vehicle if one is available.

2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for

the str

ap between the anchor and the child seat. If your

vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,

raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the

tether strap under the head restraint and between the two

posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass

the tether strap around the outboard side of the head

restraint.

WARNING!

Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to

any locati

on in front of the car seat, including the seat

frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether strap

of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is

approved for that seating position, located behind the

top of the vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors

and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System”

for the location of approved tether anchorages in your

vehicle.

302 SAFETY

Tether Strap Mounting (Two-Door Models) Tether Strap Mounting (Four-Door Models With Center

Armrest)

3. A

ttach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the

op tet

her anchorage as shown in the diagram.

4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child

restrai

nt manufacturer’s instructions.

SAFETY 303

Center Tether Attachment — Four-Door Without Center

Armrest

1. If adjustable, lower the adjustable center head restraint to

the ful

l down position.

2. Route the tether strap over the seatback and head

restrai

nt.

Tether Strap Mounting (Four-Door Models Without

Center A

rmrest)

3. A

ttach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the

enter

tether anchorage located on the back of the seat.

4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child

restrai

nt manufacturer’s instructions.

WARNING!

• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to

increas

ed head motion and possible injury to the child.

Use only the anchorage position directly behind the

child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.

• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make

sure th

e tether strap does not slip into the opening

between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap.

304 SAFETY

Transporting Pets

Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An

unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured,

or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet

harness

es or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

SAFETY TIPS

Transporting Passengers

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.

Exhaust Gas

WARNING!

• Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles

in hot

weather. Interior heat build-up may cause

serious injury or death.

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or

outsid

e of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these

areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle

that i

s not equipped with seats and seat belts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using

a seat

belt properly.

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon

monoxide

(CO), which is colorless and odorless.

Breathing it can make you unconscious and can

eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow

these safety tips:

• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined

areas

any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or

out of the area.

• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/rear

doors ope

n, make sure that all windows are closed and

the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high

speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.

• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the

engine

running, adjust your heating or cooling controls

to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at

high speed.

SAFETY 305

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the

vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust

system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust

system,

when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the

vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is

damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete

exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,

damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams

or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into

the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust

system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil

change. Replace as required.

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle

Seat Belts

Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,

frays, a

nd loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced

immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.

Rear se

at belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if

they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,

etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor

condition, replace the seat belt.

Air Bag Warning Light

The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four to eight

seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first

turned

to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during

starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system

inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This

light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with

the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on

until the fault is removed. If the light comes on intermittently

or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer

service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant

Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the

blower c

ontrol on high speed. You should be able to feel the

air directed against the windshield. See an authorized dealer

for service if your defroster is inoperable.

Floor Mat Safety Information

Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only use

a floor

mat that does not interfere with the operation of the

pedal assemblies. Only use a floor mat that is securely

attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of

position and interfere with the pedal assemblies or impair

safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

306 SAFETY

(Continued)

WARNING!

An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked

floor mat,

or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause

your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or

clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To

prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:

• ALWAYS securely attach your floor

mat using the

floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat

upside d

own or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull to

confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on

a regular basis.

• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT

FROM THE

VEHICLE before installing any other

floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor

at on top

of an existing floor mat.

• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.

NEVER i

nstall a floor mat that cannot be properly

attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat

needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor

mat for the specific make, model, and year of your

vehicle.

• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s

side floor area. To check for interference, with the

vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully

depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal

(if present) to check for interference. If your floor mat

interferes with the operation of any pedal, or is not

secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from the

vehicle and place the floor mat in your trunk.

• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the

passenger’s side floor area.

• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into the

driver’s

side floor area when the vehicle is moving.

Objects can become trapped under accelerator, brake,

or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle

control.

• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,

towels,

keys, etc.). These objects could change the posi-

tion of the floor mat and may cause interference with

he acce

lerator, brake, or clutch pedals.

WARNING! (Continued)

SAFETY 307

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside

The Vehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear

pattern

s. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects

lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and

cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check

the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including

spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.

Lights

Have s

omeone observe the operation of brake lights and

exterio

r lights while you work the controls. Check turn

signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument

panel.

Door Latches

Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.

Fluid Leaks

Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,

coolant

, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are

detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The

cause should be located and corrected immediately.

• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-installed,

always

properly attach carpet to the floor and check the

floor mat fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.

Fully depress each pedal to check for interference with

the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then re-install

the floor mats.

• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water to

clean

your floor mats. After cleaning, always check

your floor mat has been properly installed and is

secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners by

lightly pulling mat.

WARNING! (Continued)

308

STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE ENGINE

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both

inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.

Manual Transmission — If Equipped

Apply the parking brake, place the gear selector in

NEUTRAL, and press the clutch pedal before starting the

vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking

ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch pedal is

pressed to the floor.

Four-Wheel Drive Models Only

In 4L mode, this vehicle will start regardless of whether or

not the

clutch pedal is pressed to the floor. This feature

enhances off-road performance by allowing the vehicle to

start when in 4L without having to press the clutch pedal.

The “4WD Low Indicator Light” will illuminate when the

transfer case has been shifted into this mode.

WARNING!

• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob

from th

e ignition and lock your vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access

to an u

nlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is

dangerou

s for a number of reasons. A child or others

could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should

be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a

location

accessible to children. A child could operate

power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

• Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles

in hot

weather. Interior heat build-up may cause

serious injury or death.

STARTING AND OPERATING 309

Automatic Transmission — If Equipped

Start the vehicle with the gear selector in the PARK position

(vehicle can also be started in NEUTRAL). Apply the brake

before shifting to any driving range.

Normal Starting

To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP

Button

1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.

2. Pres

s and hold the brake pedal while pushing the

ENGINE

START/STOP button once.

3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If

the ve

hicle fails to start, the starter will disengage auto-

matically after 10 seconds.

4. I

f you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the

engine

starting, push the button again.

NOTE:

Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained

without

pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.

To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP

Button

1. P

lace the gear selector in PARK, then push and release the

ENGINE

START/STOP button.

2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.

3. If t

he gear selector is not in PARK (with vehicle stopped)

and th

e ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once,

the transmission will automatically select PARK and the

engine will turn off, however the ignition will remain in

the ACC mode (NOT the OFF mode). Never leave a

vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll.

4. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and the vehicle speed

is bel

ow 5 mph (8 km/h), pushing the START/STOP

button

once will turn the engine off. The ignition will

remain in the ACC mode.

5. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (

8 km/h), the

ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two

seconds (or three short pushes in a row) to turn the engine

off. The ignition will remain in the ACC mode (NOT the

OFF mode) if the engine is turned off when the transmis

sion is not in PARK.

310 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:

The system will automatically time out and the ignition will

cycle to

the OFF mode after 30 minutes of inactivity if the

ignition

is left in the ACC or RUN (engine not running) mode

and the transmission is in PARK.

ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s

Foot OFF Th

e Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Posi-

tion)

The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an

gnition

switch. It has three modes: OFF, ACC, and RUN. To

change the ignition modes without starting the vehicle and

use the accessories, follow these steps:

1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF mode,

2. Push

the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place the

ignition to the ACC mode (instrument cluster will display

“ACC”),

3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time to

place

the ignition to the RUN mode (instrument cluster

will display “ON/RUN”),

4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to

return

the ignition to the OFF mode (instrument cluster

will display “OFF”).

AutoPark

AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in placing the

vehicle

in PARK should the situations on the following

pages occur. It is a back up system and should not be relied

upon as the primary method by which the driver shifts the

vehicle into PARK.

The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are

outline

d on the following pages.

WARNING!

• Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the

vehicle

in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK

that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid

(not blinking) “P” is indicated in the instrument cluster

display and on the gear selector. If the "P" indicator is

blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As an added

precaution, always apply the parking brake when

exiting the vehicle.

• AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not designed

to repl

ace the need to shift your vehicle into PARK. It is

a back up system and should not be relied upon as the

primary method by which the driver shifts the vehicle

into PARK.

STARTING AND OPERATING 311

If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the

engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.

AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:

• V

ehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission

• Driver

s door is ajar or in conditions where driver door is

remove

d an additional trigger would be if the driver is off

the seat (seat pad sensor detects driver missing).

• Vehicle is not in PARK

• Vehicl

e Speed is 0 mph (

0 km/h)

• Ignition switched from RUN to OFF

NOTE:

For

Keyless Go equipped vehicles, The engine will turn off

and the

ignition switch will change to ACC mode. After

minutes the ignition switches to OFF automatically,

unless

the driver turns the ignition switch OFF.

If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the

vehicle

with the engine running, the vehicle may Auto-

Park.

AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:

• V

ehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission

• Driver

s door is ajar or in conditions where driver door is

remove

d an aditional trigger would be if the driver is off

the seat (seat pad sensor detects driver missing).

• Vehicle is not in PARK

• Driver

’s door is removed

• Vehicl

e speed is 1.2 mph (

2.0 km/h) or less

• Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled

• Driver

’s door is ajar

• Brake P

edal is not depressed

The ME

SSAGE “AutoPark

Engaged Shift to P then Shift to

Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.

NOTE:

In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be displayed in the

nstrum

ent cluster. In these cases, the shifter must be

returned to “P” to select desired gear.

312 STARTING AND OPERATING

If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle

may AutoPark.

AutoPark will engage ONLYwhen

vehicle speed is 1.2 mph

(2.0 km/h) or less.

The MESSAGE “Vehicle

Speed is Too High to Shift to P”

will be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle speed is

above 1.2

mph (2.0 km/h).

4WD LOW

AutoPark will be disabled when operating the vehicle in

4WD LOW

The MESSAGE “AutoPark

Disabled” will be displayed in

the instrument cluster.

Additional customer warnings will be given when both of

these c

onditions are met:

• Vehicle is not in PARK

• Driver

’s Door is ajar

The ME

SSAGE “AutoPark

Not Engaged” will be displayed

in the instrument cluster. A warning chime will continue

until you shift the vehicle into PARK or the Driver’s Door is

closed.

ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK

that your vehicle is in

PARK by looking for the "P" in the instrument cluster display

and on the shifter. As an added precaution, always apply the

parking brake when exiting the vehicle.

Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C)

To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an

externally powered electric engine block heater (available

from your authorized dealer) is recommended.

WARNING!

If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (2.0 km/h), the

transmi

ssion will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle

speed drops below 1.2

mph (1.9 km/h). A vehicle left in

the NEU

TRAL position can roll. As an added precaution,

always apply the parking brake when exiting the

vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 313

(Continued)

If Engine Fails To Start

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the "Normal

Starting" or "Extreme Cold Weather" procedure, and has not

experienced an extended park condition as identified in

"Extended Park Starting" procedure it may be flooded. Push

the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there.

Crank the engine for no more than 15 seconds. This should

clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded. Leave the

ignition key in the RUN position, release the accelerator pedal

and repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

After Starting

The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will

decrease as the engine warms up.

WARNING!

• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the

throttl

e body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the

vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious

personal injury.

• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it

starte

d. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmis-

sion cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could

nter t

he catalytic converter and once the engine has

started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.

• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables

may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or

the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be

dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Starting

Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further

information.

CAUTION!

To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously

crank t

he engine for more than 25 seconds at a time. Wait

60 seconds before trying again.

WARNING! (Continued)

314 STARTING AND OPERATING

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED

The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits

quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a stan-

dard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded,

hree-wi

re extension cord.

The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour

have

an adequate warming effect on the engine.

The engine block heater cord is found under the hood

bundled

in front of the battery tray.

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine and

drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After

the ini

tial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or

90 km/h) a

re desirable.

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the

imits

of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.

Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri

mental and should be avoided.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a

high-qua

lity energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes

should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions

under which vehicle operations will occur.

For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to

“Fluids

And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”.

NOTE:

A new engine may consume some oil during its first few

thousan

d miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be

considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted

as a problem.

WARNING!

Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord

before d

riving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt AC electrical

cord could cause electrocution.

CAUTION!

Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in

the engi

ne or damage may result.

STARTING AND OPERATING 315

PARKING BRAKE

Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake

is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an automatic trans-

mission in PARK, or manual transmission in REVERSE or

RST gear

The parking brake lever is located in the center console. To

ply the

parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as

possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up

slightly, push the center button, then lower the lever

completely.

Parking Brake Lever

When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch

ON, the

“Brake Warning Light” in the instrument cluster

will illuminate.

NOTE:

• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic

transmi

ssion is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light”

will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound

to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake before

attempting to move the vehicle.

• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It

does no

t show the degree of brake application.

When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front

wheels to

ward the curb on a downhill grade and away from

the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped with an

automatic transmission, apply the parking brake before

placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on the

transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to

move the gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake

should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the

vehicle.

316 STARTING AND OPERATING

(Continued)

WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position on an automatic trans-

mission

as a substitute for the parking brake. Always

apply th

e parking brake fully when parked to guard

against vehicle movement and possible injury or

damage.

• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob

from th

e ignition and lock your vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access

to an u

nlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a

vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of

reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally

injured. Children should be warned not to touch the

parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a

location

accessible to children. A child could operate

power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before

driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a

collision.

• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving

your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury.

Also, be certain to leave an automatic transmission in

PARK, a manual transmission in REVERSE or first

gear. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and

cause damage or injury.

CAUTION!

If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the

arking

brake released, a brake system malfunction is

indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an

authorized dealer immediately.

WARNING! (Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 317

MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED

NOTE:

During cold weather, you may experience increased effort in

shifting

until the transmission fluid warms up. This is

normal.

Manual Transmission Shifter

To shift the gears, fully press the clutch pedal and place the

gear sele

ctor into the desired gear position (the diagram for

the engagement of the gears is displayed on the handle of the

selector).

WARNING!

You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle

unattend

ed without having the parking brake fully

applied. The parking brake should always be applied

when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an

incline.

CAUTION!

• Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal,

or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch

pedal partially engaged, as this will cause abnormal

wear on the clutch.

• Do not drive with your hand resting on the gear selector

as the

force exerted, even if slight, could lead over time

to premature wear of the gearbox internal components.

318 STARTING AND OPERATING

To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL position, lift

the REVERSE ring, located below the knob and move the

gear selector all the way left and then forward.

Shift Pattern

Shifting

Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As you

release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal.

You should always use first gear when starting from a

standing

position.

NOTE:

A certain amount of noise from the transmission is normal.

his noi

se can be most noticeable when the vehicle is idling

in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged (clutch pedal

released), but it may also be heard when driving. The noise

may also be more noticeable when the transmission is warm.

This noise is normal and is not an indication of a problem

with your clutch or transmission.

STARTING AND OPERATING 319

(Continued)

Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds

To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both fuel economy and performance, it should be upshifted as listed in

recomme

nded shift speed chart. Shift at the vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily loaded or pulling a trailer

these recommended up-shift speeds may not apply.

NOTE:

Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for 2H and 4H

only, ve

hicle speeds in 4L would be significantly less.

Downshifting

Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is recom-

mended to preserve brakes when driving down steep hills.

In addi

tion, downshifting at the right time provides better

acceleration when you desire to resume speed. Downshift

progressively. Do not skip gears to avoid overspeeding the

engine and clutch.

NOTE:

Above certain speeds downshifts may be blocked and not

availab

le.

Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)

Engine Speeds 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6

3.6L

Accel. 15 (24) 24 (39) 50 (80) 65 (104) 70 (112)

Cruise 10 (16) 19 (31) 40 (64) 55 (88) 65 (105)

WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a

slipper

y surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip,

and the vehicle could skid.

CAUTION!

• Skipping gears and downshifting into lower gears at

higher

vehicle speeds can damage the engine and

clutch systems, Any attempt to shift into lower gear

with clutch pedal depressed may result damage to the

clutch system. Shifting into lower gear and releasing

the clutch may result in engine damage.

320 STARTING AND OPERATING

(Continued)

Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds

NOTE:

Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for 2H and 4H

only, ve

hicle speeds in 4L would be significantly less.

• When descending a hill, be very careful to downshift

one gear

at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine

which can cause engine damage, and/or clutch damage,

even if the clutch pedal is pressed. If transfer case is in

low range the vehicle speeds to cause engine and clutch

damage are significantly lower.

• Failure to follow the maximum recommended down-

shifti

ng speeds may cause the engine damage and/or

damage t

he clutch, even if the clutch pedal is pressed.

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Descending a hill in low range with clutch pedal

depressed could result in clutch damage.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow the maximum recommended

downshif

ting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed

and/or damage the clutch disc, even if the clutch pedal is

pressed.

CAUTION! (Continued)

Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)

Gear Selection 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1

Maximum Speed 80 (129) 70 (113) 50 (81) 30 (48) 15 (24)

STARTING AND OPERATING 321

(Continued)

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED

NOTE:

You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out

of PARK

CAUTION!

• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the

vehicle

has come to a complete stop.

• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or

DRIVE

when the engine is above idle speed.

• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is

firmly

pressing the brake pedal.

WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the

parkin

g brake. Always apply the parking brake fully

when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle move

ment and possible injury or damage.

• Y

our vehicle could move and injure you and others if it

is not

in PARK. Check by trying to move the transmis-

sion gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal

elease

d. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before

exiting the vehicle.

• The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle

is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete stop

before shifting to PARK, and verify that the transmis

sion gear position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)

without

blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely

stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated,

before exiting the vehicle.

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the

engine

speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is

not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could

accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose

control of the vehicle and hit someone or something.

Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally

and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those

in or n

ear the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should

never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before

exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then

apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into

PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is

in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,

securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.

WARNING! (Continued)

322 STARTING AND OPERATING

Ignition Park Interlock

This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock

which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the

ignition can be turned to the OFF mode. This helps the driver

avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing the

transmission in PARK. This system also locks the transmis

sion in PARK whenever the ignition is in the OFF mode.

NOTE:

The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the ignition

s in t

he ACC mode (even though the engine will be off).

Ensure that the transmission is in PARK, and the ignition is

OFF (not in ACC mode) before exiting the vehicle.

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift

Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear

selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the

transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running and

the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must also

be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE

when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.

Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission

The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is displayed both

beside the gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To

select a gear range, press the lock button on the gear selector

and move the selector rearward or forward. To shift the

transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running and

the brake pedal must be pressed. You must also press the

brake pedal to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or

REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low

speeds. Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.

• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the igni-

tion is

in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the

vehicle,

and lock the vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access

to an u

nlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a

vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of

reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally

injured. Children should be warned not to touch the

parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear

selector.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a

location

accessible to children), and do not leave the

ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could

operate power windows, other controls, or move the

vehicle.

WARNING! (Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 323

NOTE:

In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector position

and the

actual transmission gear (for example, driver selects

PARK while driving), the position indicator will blink

continuously until the selector is returned to the proper posi

tion, or the requested shift can be completed.

The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift

chedule

based on driver inputs, along with environmental

and road conditions. The transmission electronics are

self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new

vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition,

and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles

(kilometers).

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the

accelera

tor pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be

sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting

between these gears.

The transmission gear selector provides PARK, REVERSE,

NEUTRAL,

DRIVE and MANUAL (AutoStick) shift posi-

tions. Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift

ontrol.

Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward

(+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position (beside the

DRIVE position) will manually select the transmission gear,

and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster.

Refer to "AutoStick" in this section for further information.

Gear Selector

NOTE:

If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK, REVERSE,

or NEUTR

AL position (when pushed forward), it is prob-

ably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE posi-

tion). In AutoStick mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.)

s displ

ayed in the instrument cluster. Move the gear selector

to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK,

REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.

324 STARTING AND OPERATING

(Continued)

Gear Ranges

Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from

PARK or

NEUTRAL into another gear range.

NOTE:

After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the

electe

d gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially

important when the engine is cold.

PARK (P)

This range supplements the parking brake by locking the

transmi

ssion. The engine can be started in this range. Never

attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply

the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.

When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmis-

sion into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before

hiftin

g the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution,

turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade

and away from the curb on an uphill grade.

When exiting the vehicle, always:

• A

pply the parking brake,

• Shift

the transmission into PARK,

• Turn t

he ignition OFF and,

• Remove

the key fob from the vehicle.

NOTE:

four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the transfer case is

a dr

ive position.

WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the

parkin

g brake. Always apply the parking brake fully

when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle move

ment and possible injury or damage.

• Y

our vehicle could move and injure you and others if it

is not

in PARK. Check by trying to move the transmis-

sion gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal

elease

d. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before

exiting the vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 325

(Continued)

• The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle

is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete stop

before shifting to PARK, and verify that the transmis

sion gear position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)

without

blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely

stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated,

before exiting the vehicle.

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the

engine

speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is

not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could

accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose

control of the vehicle and hit someone or something.

Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally

and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those

in or n

ear the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should

never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before

exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then

apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into

PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is

in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,

securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.

WARNING! (Continued)

• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the igni-

tion is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the

vehicle,

and lock the vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access

to an u

nlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a

vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of

reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally

injured. Children should be warned not to touch the

parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear

selector.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a

location

accessible to children), and do not leave the

ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could

operate power windows, other controls, or move the

vehicle.

CAUTION!

• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of

PARK,

you must start the engine, and also press the

brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector

could result.

WARNING! (Continued)

326 STARTING AND OPERATING

The following indicators should be used to ensure that you

have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-

tion:

• W

hen shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the gear

select

or and firmly move the selector all the way forward

until it stops and is fully seated.

• Look at the transmission gear position display and verify

that i

t indicates the PARK position (P), and is not blinking.

• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector will

not mo

ve out of PARK.

NOTE:

If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK position

(

when pu

shed forward), it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-)

position (beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the

transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument

cluster. Move the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE

[D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.

REVERSE (R)

This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into

REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

NEUTRAL (N)

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged

eriods

with the engine running. Apply the parking brake and

shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the vehicle.

• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or

NEUTRA

L into another gear range, as this can damage

the drivetrain.

CAUTION! (Continued)

WARNING!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the

ignition

to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices

that limit your response to changing traffic or road

conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and

have a collision.

CAUTION!

Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other

reason w

ith the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause

severe transmission damage.

Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And

Operati

ng” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “In

Case Of Emergency” for further information.

STARTING AND OPERATING 327

DRIVE (D)

This range should be used for most city and highway

driving.

It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,

and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically

upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position

provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal

operating conditions.

When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when

operati

ng the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in

hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while

towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control (refer

to "AutoStick" in this section for further information) to

select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower

gear will improve performance and extend transmission life

by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.

During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or

below),

transmission operation may be modified depending

on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle

speed. Normal operation will resume once the transmission

temperature has risen to a suitable level.

MANUAL (M)

The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE position)

enables

full manual control of transmission shifting (also

known as AutoStick mode; refer to “AutoStick” in this

section for further information). Toggling the gear selector

forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL (AutoS

tick) position will manually select the transmission gear, and

will dis

play the current gear in the instrument cluster.

Transmission Limp Home Mode

Transmission function is monitored electronically for

bnorma

l conditions. If a condition is detected that could

result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home

Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may

operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle

performance may be severely degraded and the engine may

stall. In some situations, the transmission may not re-engage

if the engine is turned off and restarted. The Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the

instrument cluster will inform the driver of the more serious

conditions, and indicate what actions may be necessary.

328 STARTING AND OPERATING

In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can

be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the

following steps:

NOTE:

In cases where the instrument cluster message indicates the

transmi

ssion may not re-engage after engine shutdown,

perform this procedure only in a desired location (prefer

ably, at an authorized dealer).

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Shif

t the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift

the tr

ansmission to NEUTRAL.

3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine turns

OFF.

4. Wai

t approximately 30 seconds.

5. Rest

art the engine.

6. Shif

t into the desired gear range. If the problem is no

longer

detected, the transmission will return to normal

operation.

NOTE:

Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that

you visi

t an authorized dealer at your earliest possible

convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic equip

ment to assess the condition of your transmission.

If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service

is requ

ired.

AutoStick

AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature

providi

ng manual shift control, giving you more control of

the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine

braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and

improve overall vehicle performance. This system can also

provide you with more control during passing, city driving,

cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing,

and many other situations.

STARTING AND OPERATING 329

Operation

To activate AutoStick mode, move the gear selector into the

MANUAL

(M) position (beside the DRIVE position). The

current transmission gear will be displayed in the instru

ment cluster. In AutoStick mode, you can use the gear

selecto

r (in the MANUAL position) to manually shift the

transmission. Tapping the gear selector forward (-) while in

the MANUAL (M) position will downshift the transmission

to the next lower gear. Tapping the selector rearward (+) will

command an upshift.

In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down

when (+/-)

is manually selected by the driver, unless an

engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will

remain in the selected gear until another upshift or down

shift is chosen, except as described below.

• T

he transmission will automatically downshift as the

vehicl

e slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will display

the current gear.

• The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear

when co

ming to a stop. After a stop, the driver should

manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle is

accelerated.

• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear (or

third

gear, in 4LO range). Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow

starting in second gear. Starting out in second or third gear

can be helpful in snowy or icy conditions.

• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to

over-s

peed, that shift will not occur.

• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a

vehicl

e speed.

• Holding the gear selector in the (-) position will downshift

the tr

ansmission to the lowest gear possible at the current

speed.

• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when Auto-

Stick i

s enabled.

• T

he system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault or

overhe

at condition is detected.

NOTE:

When Hill Descent Control is enabled, AutoStick is not

ctive.

330 STARTING AND OPERATING

To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to the

DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick posi-

tion at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator

edal.

FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION

Four-Position Transfer Case

Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector

The transfer case provides four mode positions:

• 2H (Two-Wheel Drive High Range)

• 4H (Four

-Wheel Drive High Range)

• N (Neut

ral)

• 4L (Four

-Wheel Drive Low Range)

WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a

slippery

surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip

and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or

personal injury.

WARNING!

Failure to engage a transfer case position completely can

cause tr

ansfer case damage or loss of power and vehicle

control. You could have a collision. Do not drive the

vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged.

STARTING AND OPERATING 331

For additional information on the appropriate use of each

transfer case mode position, see the information below:

Rear Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal

treet

and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.

Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range maximizes

torque

to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear

wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides addi

tional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.

NEUTRAL (N)

Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear

driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing

behind another vehicle.

Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating”

for fur

ther information.

Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low

peed f

our-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front

driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the

same speed. This range provides additional traction and

maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces

only. Do not exceed 25

mph (40 km/h).

The transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H position

for nor

mal street and highway conditions, such as

hard-surfaced roads.

In the event that additional traction is required, the transfer

case 4H

and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and

rear driveshafts together, forcing the front and rear wheels to

rotate at the same speed. The 4H and 4L positions are

intended for loose, slippery road surfaces only and not

intended for normal driving. Driving in the 4H and 4L posi

tions on hard-surfaced roads will cause increased tire wear

WARNING!

You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the

vehicle

unattended with the transfer case in the

NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the

parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) position

disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the

powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the

automatic transmission is in PARK (or manual

transmission is in gear). The parking brake should

always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.

332 STARTING AND OPERATING

and damage to the driveline components. Refer to “Shifting

Procedures” in this section for further information on

shifting into 4H or 4L.

The instrument cluster alerts the driver that the vehicle is in

four-whe

el drive, and the front and rear driveshafts are

locked together. The light will illuminate when the transfer

case is shifted into the 4H position.

When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed will be

approxi

mately three times (four times for Rubicon models)

that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road speed. Take

care not to overspeed the engine.

Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on

tires o

f equal size, type, and circumference on each wheel.

Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause

damage to the transfer case.

Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, there

is a te

ndency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds. Do

not go faster than road conditions permit.

Shifting Procedures

2H To 4H Or 4H To 2H

Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle

stopped

or in motion. The preferred shifting speed would be

0 to 45

mph (72 km/h). With the vehicle in motion, the

transfe

r case will engage/disengage faster if you momen-

tarily release the accelerator pedal after completing the shift.

o not

accelerate while shifting the transfer case. Apply a

constant force when shifting the transfer case lever.

NOTE:

• Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear

wheels

are spinning. The front and rear driveshaft speeds

must be equal for the shift to take place. Shifting while

only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause

damage to the transfer case.

• Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be experienced

due to

uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire pressures,

excessive vehicle loading, or cold temperatures.

• Shifting effort will increase with speed, this is normal.

During

cold weather, you may experience increased effort in

shiftin

g until the transfer case fluid warms up. This is

normal.

STARTING AND OPERATING 333

4H To 4L Or 4L To 4H

With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift an

automati

c transmission into NEUTRAL (N), or press the

clutch pedal on a manual transmission. While the vehicle is

coasting at 2 to 3

mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer case

lever fi

rmly to the desired position. Do not pause with the

transfer case in N (Neutral). Once the shift is completed,

place the automatic transmission into DRIVE or release the

clutch pedal on a manual transmission.

NOTE:

Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle

complete

ly stopped; however, difficulty may occur due to

the mating teeth not being properly aligned. Several

attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and

shift completion to occur. The preferred method is with the

vehicle rolling at 2 to 3

mph (3 to 5 km/h). Avoid attempting

to engage

or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster

than 2 to 3

mph (3 to 5 km/h).

Five-Position Transfer Case

Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector

The transfer case provides five mode positions:

• 2H (Two-Wheel Drive High Range)

• 4H Auto

(Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range)

• 4H PT (

Four-Wheel Drive Part Time High Range)

• N (Neut

ral)

• 4L (Four

-Wheel Drive Low Range)

WARNING!

Failure to engage a transfer case position completely can

cause tr

ansfer case damage or loss of power and vehicle

control. You could have a collision. Do not drive the

vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged.

334 STARTING AND OPERATING

For additional information on the appropriate use of each

transfer case mode position, see the information below:

Rear Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal

treet

and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.

4H AUTO

Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range — This range sends

power to

the front wheels. The four-wheel drive system will

be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of

traction. Additional traction for varying road conditions.

4H P-T

Four-Wheel Drive Part Time High Range — This range maxi-

mizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and

ear whe

els to rotate at the same speed. This range provides

additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.

NEUTRAL (N)

Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear

drivesh

afts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing

behind another vehicle.

Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating”

for fur

ther information.

WARNING!

You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the

vehicle

unattended with the transfer case in the

NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the

parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) position

disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the

powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the

automatic transmission is in PARK (or manual

transmission is in gear). The parking brake should

always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 335

Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low

speed f

our-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front

driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the

same speed. This range provides additional traction and

maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces

only. Do not exceed 25

mph (40 km/h).

This transfer case is designed to be driven in the two-wheel

drive p

osition (2WD) or four-wheel drive position (4WD

AUTO) for normal street and highway conditions on dry

hard surfaced roads. Driving the vehicle in 2WD will have

greater fuel economy benefits as the front axle is not engaged

in 2WD.

For variable driving conditions, the 4WD AUTO mode can

be used

. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but the

vehicle's power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel drive

will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss

of traction. Because the front axle is engaged, this mode will

result in lower fuel economy than the 2WD mode.

In the event that additional traction is required, the transfer

case 4H

and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and

rear driveshafts together, forcing the front and rear wheels to

rotate at the same speed. The 4H and 4L positions are

intended for loose, slippery road surfaces only and not

intended for normal driving. Driving in the 4H and 4L posi

tions on hard-surfaced roads will cause increased tire wear

nd dam

age to the driveline components. Refer to “Shifting

Procedures” in this section for further information on

shifting into 4H or 4L.

The instrument cluster alerts the driver that the vehicle is in

four-whe

el drive, and the front and rear driveshafts are

locked together. The light will illuminate when the transfer

case is shifted into the 4H position.

When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed will be

approxi

mately three times (four times for Rubicon models)

that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road speed. Take

care not to overspeed the engine.

Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on

tires o

f equal size, type, and circumference on each wheel.

Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause

damage to the transfer case.

Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, there

is a te

ndency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds. Do

not go faster than road conditions permit.

336 STARTING AND OPERATING

Shifting Procedures

2H To 4H Auto Or 4H Auto To 2H

Shifting between 2H and 4H Auto can be made with the

vehicle

stopped or in motion. The preferred shifting speed

would be 0 to 45

mph (72 km/h). With the vehicle in motion,

the tra

nsfer case will engage/disengage faster if you

momentarily release the accelerator pedal after completing

the shift. Do not accelerate while shifting the transfer case.

Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer case lever.

2H/4H Auto To 4H Part Time Or 4H Part Time To 2H/4H

Auto

Shif

ting between 2H/4H AUTO to 4H PART TIME can be

made wit

h the vehicle stopped or in motion. The preferred

shifting speed would be 0 to 45

mph (72 km/h). With the

vehicle

in motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage

faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after

completing the shift. Do not accelerate while shifting the

transfer case. Apply a constant force when shifting the

transfer case lever.

NOTE:

• D

o not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear

wheels

are spinning. The front and rear driveshaft speeds

must be equal for the shift to take place. Shifting while

only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause

damage to the transfer case.

• Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be experienced

due to

uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire pressures,

excessive vehicle loading, or cold temperatures.

• Shifting effort will increase with speed, this is normal.

During

cold weather, you may experience increased effort in

shiftin

g until the transfer case fluid warms up. This is normal.

STARTING AND OPERATING 337

4H Part Time/4H Auto To 4L Or 4L To 4H Part Time/4H Auto

With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift an

automat

ic transmission into NEUTRAL (N), or press the

clutch pedal on a manual transmission. While the vehicle is

coasting at 2 to 3

mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer case

lever f

irmly to the desired position. Do not pause with the

transfer case in N (Neutral). Once the shift is completed,

place the automatic transmission into DRIVE or release the

clutch pedal on a manual transmission.

NOTE:

Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle

complet

ely stopped; however, difficulty may occur due to

the mating teeth not being properly aligned. Several

attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and

shift completion to occur. The preferred method is with the

vehicle rolling at 2 to 3

mph (3 to 5 km/h). Avoid attempting

to engage

or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster

than 2 to 3

mph (3 to 5 km/h).

Trac-Lok Rear Axle — If Equipped

The Trac-Lok rear axle provides a constant driving force to

both rear wheels and reduces wheel spin caused by the loss

of traction at one driving wheel. If traction differs between

the two rear wheels, the differential automatically propor

tions the usable torque by providing more torque to the

eel th

at has traction.

Trac-Lok is especially helpful during slippery driving condi-

tions. With both rear wheels on a slippery surface, a slight

pplica

tion of the accelerator will supply maximum traction.

WARNING!

Failure to engage a transfer case position completely can

cause t

ransfer case damage or loss of power and vehicle

control. You could have a collision. Do not drive the

vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged.

WARNING!

On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential,

never ru

n the engine with one rear wheel off the ground.

The vehicle may drive through the rear wheel remaining

on the ground and cause you to lose control of your

vehicle.

338 STARTING AND OPERATING

Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) — Rubicon Models

The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instrument panel

(to the right of the steering column).

Axle Lock Switch Panel

This feature will only activate when the following conditions

are met:

•

Ignition in RUN position, vehicle in 4L (Low) range.

• Vehicle

speed should be 10 mph (1

6 km/h) or less.

• Both right and left wheels on axle are at the same speed.

To acti

vate the system, push the AXLE LOCK switch down

to lock t

he rear axle only (the “REAR ONLY” will illumi-

nate), push the switch up to lock the front axle and rear axle

(

the “FRO

NT + REAR” will illuminate). When the rear axle

is locked, pushing the bottom of switch again will lock or

unlock the front axle.

NOTE:

The indicator lights will flash until the axles are fully locked

r unloc

ked.

To unlock the axles, push the AXLE LOCK OFF button.

Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4L

(Low) ran

ge, or the ignition switch is turned to the OFF posi-

tion.

The axle lock disengages at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h),

nd will

automatically re-lock once vehicle speed is less than

mph (16 km/h).

STARTING AND OPERATING 339

Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic discon-

necting stabilizer/sway bar. This system allows greater front

suspensi

on travel in off-road situations.

This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR switch located

on the i

nstrument panel (to the right of the steering column).

Sway Bar Switch

Push the SWAY BAR switch to activate the system. Push the

switch aga

in to deactivate the system. The “Sway Bar Indi-

cator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) will illumi-

nate when the bar is disconnected. The “Sway Bar Indicator

ight” wil

l flash during activation transition, or when activa-

tion conditions are not met. The stabilizer/sway bar should

remain i

n on-road mode during normal driving conditions.

To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to either 4H or

4L and p

ush the SWAY BAR switch to obtain the off-road

position. Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in this

section for further information. The “Sway Bar Indicator

Light” will flash until the stabilizer/sway bar has been fully

disconnected.

WARNING!

Ensure the stabilizer/sway bar is reconnected before

driving on

hard surfaced roads or at speeds above

mph (29 km/h); a disconnected stabilizer/sway bar

may contri

bute to the loss of vehicle control, which could

result in serious injury. Under certain circumstances, the

front stabilizer/sway bar enhances vehicle stability and

assists with vehicle control. The system monitors vehicle

speed and will attempt to reconnect the stabilizer/sway

bar at speeds over 18

mph (29 km/h). This is indicated by

a flashi

ng or solid “Sway Bar Indicator Light.” Once

vehicle speed is reduced below 14

mph (22 km/h), the

system wi

ll once again attempt to return to off-road

mode.

340 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:

The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked due to left and

right sus

pension height differences. This condition is due to

driving surface differences or vehicle loading. In order for

the stabilizer/sway bar to disconnect/reconnect, the right

and left halves of the bar must be aligned. This alignment

may require that the vehicle be driven onto level ground or

rocked from side to side.

To return to on-road mode, push the SWAY BAR switch

again.

ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING

Your vehicle is equipped with an electro-hydraulic power

steering system that will give you good vehicle response and

increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The

system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while

parking and good feel while driving. If the electro-hydraulic

power steering system experiences a fault that prevents it

from providing power steering assist, then the system will

provide mechanical steering capability.

If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” message and

a flashing icon are displayed on the instrument

cluster

screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs to

be taken to the dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has

lost power steering assistance. Refer to “Instrument Cluster

Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for

further information.

WARNING!

If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to on-road mode,

the “Sway

Bar Indicator Light” will flash in the instrument

cluster and vehicle stability may be reduced. Do not

attempt to drive the vehicle over 18

mph (29 km/h).

Driving f

aster than 18 mph (29 km/h) with a disconnected

stabiliz

er/sway bar may contribute to the loss of vehicle

control, which could result in serious injury.

CAUTION!

Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electrically

driven pu

mp to reduce or stop power steering assistance

in order to prevent damage to the system. Normal

operation will resume once the system is allowed to cool.

STARTING AND OPERATING 341

If the “POWER STEERING HOT” message and an icon are

displayed on the instrument cluster screen, it indicates that

extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred, which

caused an over temperature condition in the power steering

system. You will lose power steering assistance momentarily

until the over temperature condition no longer exists. Once

driving conditions are safe, then pull over and let vehicle idle

for a few moments until the light turns off. Refer to “Instru

ment Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instru-

ment Panel” for further information.

NOTE:

• E

ven if power steering assistance is no longer operational,

it is

still possible to steer the vehicle. Under these condi-

tions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort,

specia

lly at very low vehicle speeds and during parking

maneuvers.

• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for

servic

STOP/START SYSTEM — AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)

The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce fuel

consumption. The system will stop the engine automatically

during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met.

Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the accelerator pedal

will automatically re-start the engine.

ESS vehicles have been upgraded with a heavy duty starter,

enhance

d battery, and other upgraded engine parts, to

handle the additional engine starts. Vehicles equipped with

eTorque contain a heavy duty motor generator and an addi

tional hybrid electric battery to store energy from vehicle

eceler

ation for use on engine startup after a stop as well as

providing launch torque assist.

NOTE:

It is recommended that the Start/Stop System be disabled

during o

ff-road use.

342 STARTING AND OPERATING

Secondary Battery

Your vehicle may be equipped with a secondary battery used

to power

the Stop/Start system and the 12 volt vehicle elec-

trical system. The secondary battery is located behind the

eel well

for the front passenger wheel.

Battery Locations

Automatic Mode

The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal

customer engine start. At that time, the system will

go into S

TOP/START READY and if all other condi-

tions are met, can go into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP

CTIVE “

Autostop” mode.

1 — Primary Battery

2 — Secondary Battery

WARNING!

• Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be equipped

with tw

o batteries. Both the main and the supplemental

batteries must be disconnected to completely de-ener

gize the 12 volt electrical system.

• S

erious injury or death could result if you do not

disconne

ct both batteries. To learn how to properly

disconnect, see your authorized dealer.

STARTING AND OPERATING 343

To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must

Occur:

• The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A

STOP/ST

ART READY message will be displayed in the

instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start section.

Refer to “Instrument Cluster” in “Getting To Know Your

Instrument Panel” for further information.

• The vehicle must be completely stopped.

• The sh

ifter must be in a forward gear and the brake pedal

depres

sed.

The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to the

zero po

sition and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate indi-

cating you are in Autostop. Customer settings will be main-

tained upon return to an engine running condition.

Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop

Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many safety

and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled. Detailed

information about the operation of the Stop/Start system

may be viewed in the instrument cluster display Stop/Start

Screen. In the following situations, the engine will not stop:

• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.

• Driver

’s door is not closed.

• Batter

y temperature is too warm or cold.

• Batter

y charge is low.

• The ve

hicle is on a steep grade.

• Cabin

heating or cooling is in process and an acceptable

cabin

temperature has not been achieved.

• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed.

• HVAC s

et to MAX A/C.

• Engine

has not reached normal operating temperature.

• Engine

temperature too high.

• The tr

ansmission is not in a forward gear.

• Hood i

s open.

• Transf

er case is in 4LO or Neutral.

• Brake p

edal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.

344 STARTING AND OPERATING

Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop Include:

• Accelerator pedal input.

• Vehicl

e speed threshold not achieved from previous

auto-s

top.

• Steering angle beyond threshold. (ESS Models Only)

• ACC is

on and speed is set.

• Vehicl

e is at high altitude.

• System

fault present.

It may

be possible for the vehicle to be driven several times

without

the STOP/START system going into a STOP/

START READY state under more extreme conditions of the

items listed above.

To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode

While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the brake

pedal is released or the throttle pedal is depressed. The trans-

mission will automatically re-engage upon engine restart.

Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Automat-

ically While In Autostop Mode:

• T

he transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE.

• To mai

ntain cabin temperature comfort.

• Actual

cabin temperature is significantly different than

temper

ature set on Auto HVAC.

• HVAC is set to full defrost mode.

• HVAC s

ystem temperature or fan speed is manually

adjust

ed.

• Battery voltage drops too low.

• Low bra

ke vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedal applica-

tions)

• S

TOP/START OFF switch is pushed.

• A STOP

/START system error occurs.

• STOP/ST

ART AUTO STOP ACTIVE time exceeds

5 minut

es.

• 4

WD system is put into 4LO or Neutral mode.

• Steeri

ng wheel is turned beyond threshold. (ESS Models

Only)

STARTING AND OPERATING 345

To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System

1. Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located on the

switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.

STOP/START Off Switch

2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in instru-

ment cl

uster display within the Stop/Start section. Refer

to “Inst

rument Cluster” in “Getting To Know Your

Instrument Panel” for further information.

3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the STOP/

START s

ystem), the engine will not be stopped.

4. The STOP/START system will reset itself back to an ON

conditi

on every time the ignition is turned off and back on.

To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System

Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located on the switch

bank). The light on the switch will turn off.

System Malfunction

If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START system, the

system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE STOP/

START SYSTEM” message will appear in the instrument

cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display“ in

“Getting to Know Your Instrument Panel” for further infor

mation.

If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message appears

in the i

nstrument cluster display, have the system checked

by an authorized dealer.

346 STARTING AND OPERATING

STOP/START SYSTEM — MANUAL TRANSMISSION

(IF EQUIPPED)

The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce fuel

consumption. The system will stop the engine automatically

during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met.

Pressing the clutch pedal will automatically restart the

vehicle.

ESS vehicles have been upgraded with a heavy duty starter,

enhanced

battery, and other upgraded engine parts, to

handle the additional engine starts. Vehicles equipped with

eTorque contain a heavy duty motor generator and an addi

tional hybrid electric battery to store energy from vehicle

ecelera

tion for use on engine startup after a stop as well as

providing launch torque assist.

NOTE:

It is recommended that the Start/Stop System be disabled

during of

f-road use.

Secondary Battery

Your vehicle may be equipped with a secondary battery used

to power

the Stop/Start system and the 12 volt vehicle elec-

trical system. The secondary battery is located behind the

eel well

for the front passenger wheel.

Battery Locations

1 — Primary Battery

2 — Secondary Battery

STARTING AND OPERATING 347

Automatic Mode

The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal

customer engine start. It will remain in STOP/

START NO

T READY until you drive forward with a

vehicle speed greater than 5

mph (8 km/h). At that time, the

system wil

l go into STOP/START READY and if all other

conditions are met, can go into an STOP/START AUTO

STOP ACTIVE mode.

To Activate The STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE

Mode, The

Following Must Occur:

• The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A

STOP/STA

RT READY message will be displayed in the

instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”

in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further

information.

• Vehicle speed must be less than 2 mph (3

km/h).

• The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL position and

the clu

tch pedal must be fully released

The engine will shut down, the tach

ometer will fall to the

Stop/Start position, the STOP/START AUTO STOP

ACTIVE message will appear, and the heater/air condi

tioning (HVAC) air flow will be reduced.

WARNING!

• Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be equipped

with tw

o batteries. Both the main and the supplemental

batteries must be disconnected to completely de-ener

gize the 12 volt electrical system.

• S

erious injury or death could result if you do not

disconne

ct both batteries. To learn how to properly

disconnect, see your authorized dealer.

348 STARTING AND OPERATING

Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop

Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many safety

and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled. In

following situations the engine will not stop:

• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.

• Outsid

e temperature is less than 10°F (–12°C) or greater

than 1

09°F (43°C).

• Actual cabin temperature is significantly different than

temper

ature set on Auto HVAC.

• HVAC is set to full defrost mode.

• Engine

has not reached normal operating temperature.

• Batter

y discharged.

• When d

riving in REVERSE.

• Hood i

s open.

• Transf

er case is in 4LO or Neutral

• Driver

's seat is not occupied or driver door is open.

• Vehicl

e is at high altitude.

• The v

ehicle is on a steep grade.

• Forward

Gear is engaged.

• Steeri

ng angle beyond threshold. (ESS Models Only)

• System

fault is present.

• HVAC s

et to MAX A/C.

It may

be possible for the vehicle to be driven several times

without

the STOP/START system going into a STOP/

START READY state under more extreme conditions of the

items listed above.

To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode

When the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, the engine will start

when the clutch pedal is pressed (does not require complete/

full pedal press). The vehicle will go into STOP/START

SYSTEM NOT READY mode until the vehicle speed is

greater than 5

mph (8 km/h).

STARTING AND OPERATING 349

Conditions that will cause the engine to start automatically

while in STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE mode

The Engine Will Start Automatically When:

• A

ctual cabin temperature is significantly different than

tempera

ture set on Auto HVAC.

• HVAC is set to full defrost mode.

• STOP/STA

RT AUTO STOP ACTIVE time exceeds

5 minute

• B

attery voltage drops too low.

• Low brake

vacuum e.g. after several brake pedal applica-

tions.

• V

hicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8

km/h).

• STOP/START OFF switch is pressed.

• 4WD syst

em is put into 4LO or Neutral mode.

• Steerin

g wheel is turned beyond threshold. (ESS Models

Only)

To Manually Turn Off The Start/Stop System

1. Push the STOP/START Off switch (located on the switch

bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.

STOP/START Off Switch

2. The STOP/START OFF message will appear in the

instrum

ent cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”

in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further

information.

3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the STOP/

START s

ystem), the engine will not be stopped.

350 STARTING AND OPERATING

4. If the STOP/START system is manually turned off, the

engine can only be started and stopped by cycling the

ignition switch.

5. The STOP/START system will reset itself back to an ON

conditi

on every time the ignition is turned off and back on.

To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System

Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located on the switch

bank). The light on the switch will turn off.

System Malfunction

If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START system, the

system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE STOP/

START SYSTEM” message will appear in the instrument

cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display“ in

“Getting to Know Your Instrument Panel” for further infor

mation.

If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message appears

in the i

nstrument cluster display, have the system checked

by an authorized dealer.

SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator

operations at speeds greater than 20 mph (32 km/h).

The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the

steering

wheel.

Speed Control Buttons

1 — SET (+)/Accel 4 — SET (-)/Decel

2 — On/Off 5 — CANC/Cancel

3 — RES/Resume

STARTING AND OPERATING 351

NOTE:

• In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed Control

System

has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed

Control functions are operated at the same time. If this

occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by

pushing the Speed Control on/off button and resetting the

desired vehicle set speed.

To Activate

Push the On/Off button to activate the Speed Control. The

cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster display will

illuminate. To turn the system off, push the On/Off button a

second time. The cruise indicator light will turn off. The

system should be turned off when not in use.

To Set A Desired Speed

Turn the Speed Control on.

NOTE:

The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on

level gr

ound before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-) button.

When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the

SET (+)

or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator

and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.

WARNING!

Speed Control can be dangerous where the system

cannot m

aintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go

too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control

and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control in heavy

traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or

slippery.

WARNING!

Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use is

dangerous

. You could accidentally set the system or

cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose

control and have an accident. Always leave the system

off when you are not using it.

352 STARTING AND OPERATING

To Vary The Speed Setting

To Increase Speed

When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by

pushing

the SET (+) button.

The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the

strum

ent panel settings. Refer to ”Instrument Cluster

Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for

more information. The speed increment shown is dependent

on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the SET (+) butt

on once will result in a 1 mph

increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button

results in an increase of 1

mph.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

contin

ue to increase until the button is released, then the

new set speed will be established.

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pushing the SET (+) butt

on once will result in a 1 km/h

increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button

results in an increase of 1

km/h.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

contin

ue to increase until the button is released, then the

new set speed will be established.

To Decrease Speed

When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by

pushing

the SET (-) button.

The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the

instrum

ent panel settings. Refer to ”Instrument Cluster

Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for

more information. The speed increment shown is dependent

on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the SET (-) but

ton once will result in a 1 mph

decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button

results in a decrease of 1

mph.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

contin

ue to decrease until the button is released, then the

new set speed will be established.

STARTING AND OPERATING 353

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pushing the SET (-) but

ton once will result in a 1 km/h

decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button

results in a decrease of 1

km/h.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

contin

ue to decrease until the button is released, then the

new set speed will be established.

To Accelerate For Passing

Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal

is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

Using Speed Control On Hills

The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the

vehicle

set speed.

NOTE:

The Speed Control system maintains speed up and down

ills.

A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.

On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it

may be p

referable to drive without Speed Control.

To Resume Speed

To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and

release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph

(32 km/h).

To Deactivate

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC (cancel)

button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle

will deactivate the speed control without erasing the set

speed from memory.

Pushing the on/off button or cycling the ignition to OFF,

erases

the set speed from memory.

WARNING!

Speed Control can be dangerous where the system

cannot m

aintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go

too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control

and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control in heavy

traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or

slippery.

354 STARTING AND OPERATING

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF EQUIPPED

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving conve-

nience provided by cruise control while traveling on high-

ways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety system

nd not

designed to prevent collisions. Speed Control func-

tion performs differently. Please refer to the proper section

ithin

this chapter.

ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light

to mode

rate traffic conditions without the constant need to

reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a

forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle directly

ahead of you.

NOTE:

• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, ACC

will ma

intain a fixed set speed.

• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will apply

limite

d braking or accelerate (not to exceed the original set

speed) automatically to maintain a preset following

distance, while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead.

The Cruise Control system has two control modes:

• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appro-

priate

distance between vehicles.

• N

ormal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode for cruising at

a cons

tant preset speed. For additional information, refer

to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this

section.

NOTE:

Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not react to

recedi

ng vehicles. Always be aware of the mode selected.

You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control

buttons

. The two control modes function differently. Always

confirm which mode is selected.

STARTING AND OPERATING 355

(Continued)

WARNING!

• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience

system.

It is not a substitute for active driving involve-

ment. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be atten-

tive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle

peed,

distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most impor-

tantly, brake operation to ensure safe operation of the

hicle

under all road conditions. Your complete atten-

tion is always required while driving to maintain safe

ontrol of

your vehicle. Failure to follow these warn-

ings can result in a collision and death or serious

ersonal

injury.

• The ACC system:

• Does not

react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,

and st

ationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a

traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).

• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions

into ac

count, and may be limited upon adverse sight

distance conditions.

• Does not always fully recognize complex driving

conditi

ons, which can result in wrong or missing

distance warnings.

• On vehicles with automatic transmission, will bring

the vehicle to a complete stop while following a

target vehicle and hold the vehicle for 2 seconds in

the stop position. If the target vehicle does not start

moving within two seconds the ACC system will

display a message that the system will release the

brakes and that the brakes must be applied manu

ally. An audible chime will sound when the brakes

are rel

eased.

You should switch off the ACC system:

• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,

heavy t

raffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in

highway construction zones).

• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp; when

driving

on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered,

slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes.

• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.

• When c

ircumstances do not allow safe driving at a

constan

t speed.

WARNING! (Continued)

356 STARTING AND OPERATING

Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above

0 mph (0 km/h).

The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph

(32 km/h).

hen the system is turned on and in the ready state, the

strum

ent cluster displays “ACC Ready.”

When the system is off, the instrument cluster displays

“Adapti

ve Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”

NOTE:

You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:

• W

hen in Four-Wheel Drive Low.

• When yo

u apply the brakes.

• When t

he parking brake is applied.

• When t

he automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or

NEUTRA

• When the manual transmission is in first gear.

• When t

he vehicle speed is below 20 mph (

32 km/h)

(manual transmission).

• When the vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.

• When t

he brakes are overheated.

• When t

he driver’s door is open at low speeds.

• When t

he driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds.

• ESC Ful

l-Off Mode is active.

To Activate/Deactivate

Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off

button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster displays

“ACC Ready.”

Adaptive Cruise Control Ready

STARTING AND OPERATING 357

To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive Cruise

Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the system

will turn off and the instrument cluster displays “Adaptive

Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”

Adaptive Cruise Control Off

To Set A Desired ACC Speed

When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the SET (+)

button or the SET (-) button and release. The instrument

cluster display will display the set speed.

If the system is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph

(32 km/h),

the set speed shall be defaulted to 20 mph

(32 km/h).

If the system is set when the vehicle speed is

above 2

0 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current

speed o

f the vehicle. On vehicles equipped with a manual

transmission, the system cannot be set when the vehicle

speed is below 20

mph (32 km/h) or when the vehicle is in

first ge

ar.

NOTE:

ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle in front of

ur veh

icle in close proximity.

Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do not,

the veh

icle may continue to accelerate beyond the set speed.

If this occurs:

• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in the

instru

ment cluster display.

• The system will not be controlling the distance between your

vehicl

e and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be

determined by the position of the accelerator pedal.

WARNING!

Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on

when not

in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set

the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You

could lose control and have a collision. Always leave the

system off when you are not using it.

358 STARTING AND OPERATING

To Cancel

The following conditions cancel the system:

• The brake pedal is applied.

• The CA

NC button is pushed.

• An Ant

i-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.

• The gea

r selector is removed from the DRIVE position.

• The El

ectronic Stability Control/Traction Control System

(ESC/TC

S) activates.

• The vehicle parking brake is applied.

• Driver

seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.

• Driver

door is opened at low speeds.

• The br

aking temperature exceeds normal range (over-

heated

• A

Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.

• The ve

hicle speed is less than 15 mph (

24 km/h) (manual

transmission only).

• The clutch is depressed for more than ten seconds (manual

transm

ission only).

• The vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL for more than ten

second

s (manual transmission only).

To Turn Off

The system will turn off and clear the set speed in memory if:

• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is

pushed

• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button is

pushed

• The ignition is turned OFF.

• You swi

tch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.

To Resume

If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume)

button and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

The instrument cluster display will display the last set speed.

NOTE:

• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two

second

s, then the system will cancel and the brake force

will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply the

brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.

• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle

in-fro

nt of your vehicle in close proximity.

STARTING AND OPERATING 359

To Vary The Speed Setting

To Increase Speed

While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by pushing

the SET

(+) button.

The driver's preferred units can be selected through the

instrum

ent panel settings. Refer to “Getting To Know Your

Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed incre

ment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S.

(mph) o

r Metric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the SET (+) butt

on once will result in a 1 mph

increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button

results in an increase of 1

mph.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

contin

ue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button

is rele

ased. The increase in set speed is reflected in the

instrument cluster display.

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pushing the SET (+) butt

on once will result in a 1 km/h

increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button

results in an increase of 1

km/h.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

contin

ue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the

button

is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in

the instrument cluster display.

WARNING!

The Resume function should only be used if traffic and

road cond

itions permit. Resuming a set speed that is too

high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions

could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too

sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these

warnings can result in a collision and death or serious

personal injury.

360 STARTING AND OPERATING

To Decrease Speed

While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by pushing

the SET

(-) button.

The driver's preferred units can be selected through the

strum

ent panel settings. Refer to “Getting To Know Your

Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed decre

ment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S.

(mph) o

r Metric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph)

• P

ushing the SET (-) but

ton once will result in a 1 mph

decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button

results in a decrease of 1

mph.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

contin

ue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the button

is rele

ased. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the

instrument cluster display.

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pushing the SET (-) but

ton once will result in a 1 km/h

decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button

results in a decrease of 1

km/h.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

contin

ue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the

button

is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in

the instrument cluster display.

NOTE:

• W

hen you override and push the SET (+) button or SET (-)

button

s, the new set speed will be the current speed of the

vehicle.

• When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the

engine’s

braking power does not slow the vehicle suffi-

ciently to reach the set speed, the brake system will auto-

matically slow the vehicle.

• T

he ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop

when fo

llowing a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle

follows a target vehicle to a standstill, the host vehicle will

release the vehicle brakes two seconds after coming to a

full stop.

• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill

and do

wn hill. However, a slight speed change on

moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may

occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This

is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed.

When driving up hill and down hill, the ACC system will

cancel if the braking temperature exceeds normal range

(overheated).

STARTING AND OPERATING 361

Setting The Following Distance In ACC

The specified following distance for ACC can be set by

varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),

three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).

Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC calcu

lates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance

etting

displays in the instrument cluster display.

Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)

Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)

362 STARTING AND OPERATING

Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium) Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)

To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting —

Increas

e button and release. Each time the button is pushed,

the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).

To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting —

Decreas

e button and release. Each time the button is pushed,

the distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter).

STARTING AND OPERATING 363

If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set

speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same

lane, the instrument cluster displays the “Sensed Vehicle

Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto

matically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the

et spe

ed.

The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:

• T

he vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set

speed.

•

The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the

sensor

• The distance setting is changed.

• The sys

tem disengages. (Refer to the information on ACC

Activa

tion).

The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however,

the dri

ver can always apply the brakes manually, if neces-

sary.

NOTE:

The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system

pplies

the brakes.

A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts

that it

s maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain

the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will

flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will

sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking

capacity.

Brake Alert

NOTE:

The “Brake!” Screen in the instrument cluster display is a

warning f

or the driver to take action and does not necessarily

mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is

applying the brakes autonomously.

364 STARTING AND OPERATING

Overtake Aid

When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle,

the system will provide an additional acceleration up to the

ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This addi

tional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the

left tu

rn signal and will only be active when passing on the

left hand side.

ACC Operation At A Stop (Automatic Transmission

Only)

If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill while

following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts moving

within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill,

your vehicle will resume motion without the need for any

driver action.

If the target vehicle does not start moving within two

seconds

of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC with

Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release. A cancel

message will display on the instrument cluster display and

produce a warning chime. Driver intervention will be

required at this moment.

While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a standstill,

if the

driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is

opened, the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the brakes

will release. A cancel message will display on the instrument

cluster display and produce a warning chime. Driver inter

vention will be required at this moment.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu

The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC

system settings. The instrument cluster display is located in

the center of the instrument cluster. The information it

displays depends on ACC system status.

Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button

(locate

d on the steering wheel) until one of the following

appears in the instrument cluster display:

Adaptive Cruise Control Off

When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive

Cruise

Control Off.”

WARNING!

When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must

ensure

that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or objects

in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these

warnings can result in a collision and death or serious

personal injury.

STARTING AND OPERATING 365

Adaptive Cruise Control Ready

When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed setting has not

been se

lected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise

Control Ready.”

Adaptive Cruise Control Set

When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located on the

steerin

g wheel) is pushed, the display will read “ACC SET.”

When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instrument

cluster

display.

The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activity

occurs,

which may include any of the following:

• System Cancel

• Driver

Override

• System

Off

• ACC Pr

oximity Warning

• ACC Un

available Warning

The in

strument cluster display will return to the last

display

selected after five seconds of no ACC display

activity

Display Warnings And Maintenance

“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” Warning

The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”

warning wi

ll display and also a chime will indicate when

conditions temporarily limit system performance.

This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in

snow or

heavy rain. The ACC system may also become

temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt or

ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will display

“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and the

system will deactivate.

The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”

message

can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly

reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and

snow). The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left

these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is not

tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may

temporarily occur.

366 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:

If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”

warning i

s active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is

still available. For additional information refer to “Normal

(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this section.

If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should

examine

the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of an

obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the vehicle

behind the lower grille.

To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important

to note

the following maintenance items:

• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the sensor

lens wi

th a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage the sensor

lens.

• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so could

cause

an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a

sensor realignment.

• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due to

a coll

ision, see your authorized dealer for service.

• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,

includ

ing transparent material or aftermarket grilles.

Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunc

tion.

When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer

present

, the system will return to the “Adaptive Cruise

Control Off” state and will resume function by simply reac

tivating it.

NOTE:

• I

f the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”

message

occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every

trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction,

have the radar sensor realigned at your authorized dealer.

• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an after-

market

grille or modifying the grille is not recommended.

Doing so

may block the sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW

operation.

STARTING AND OPERATING 367

“Clean Front Windshield” Warning

The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-

shield” warning will display and also a chime will indicate

when con

ditions temporarily limit system performance. This

most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow

or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also become

temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt,

or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of glass. In these

cases, the instrument cluster display will display “ACC/

FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and

the system will have degraded performance.

The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-

shield” message can sometimes be displayed while driving

in adve

rse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system will

recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare

conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or

objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.

If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should

examine

the windshield and the camera located on the back

side of the inside rear view mirror. They may require

cleaning or removal of an obstruction.

When the condition that created limited functionality is no

longer p

resent, the system will return to full functionality.

NOTE:

If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-

shield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on

very tr

ip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruc-

tion, have the windshield and forward facing camera

nspect

ed at your authorized dealer.

Service ACC/FCW Warning

If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays

“

ACC/FCW

Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/

FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an

internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits

ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable

under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavail

able. If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following

n ignit

ion cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized

dealer.

368 STARTING AND OPERATING

Precautions While Driving With ACC

In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection issues.

In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The

driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene.

NOTE:

• Do not put stickers or easy passes over the camera/radar

field

of view.

• Cracks in the windshield may affect the performance of

ACC, d

epending on the size and location of the crack.

ACC Sensor Protective Cover

Your vehicle is equipped with a protective cover that is to be

sed whe

never the windshield is folded down in order to

protect the ACC sensor. To install the cover, follow the

instructions below.

1. Secure the top part of the cover so that it hinges to the

header

2. Swing the cover down and push on it so that it covers the

openin

3. Check to make sure the cover is secured properly.

NOTE:

sure to remove the cover before returning the windshield

o the

normal position. Store the cover in the cargo area.

Cleaning Instructions

During windshield down applications, dust/dirt can accu-

mulate in the cover and block the camera lens. Use a micro-

fiber cloth to clean the camera lens, module, and inside

over,

being careful not to damage or scratch the module.

Towing A Trailer

Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.

STARTING AND OPERATING 369

Offset Driving

ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset

from you

r direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from

a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the

vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of the

line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or accel

erate unexpectedly.

Offset Driving Condition Example

Turns And Bends

When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system

may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stability

reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is

out of the curve the system will resume your original set

speed. This is a part of normal ACC system functionality.

NOTE:

On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.

Turn Or Bend Example

370 STARTING AND OPERATING

Using ACC On Hills

When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in your

lane. D

epending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic condi-

tions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may

e limi

ted.

ACC Hill Example

Lane Changing

ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the

lane in

which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,

ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it

may not detect the vehicle until it's too late for the ACC

system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it

is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient

distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive

and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.

Lane Changing Example

STARTING AND OPERATING 371

Narrow Vehicles

Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the

lane or

edging into the lane are not detected until they have

moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient

distance to the vehicle ahead.

Narrow Vehicle Example

Stationary Objects And Vehicles

ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehi-

cles. For example, ACC will not react in situations where the

vehicle

you are following exits your lane and the vehicle

ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and ready

to apply the brakes if necessary.

Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example

372 STARTING AND OPERATING

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio

Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with

Industr

y Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This

device must accept any interference received,

includ

ing interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the

party re

sponsible for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode

In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal

(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising

at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control

mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without

requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise

Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above

mph (32 km/h).

To change between the different control modes, push the

Adaptiv

e Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button which turns

the ACC and the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control off.

Pushing the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off

button will result in turning on (changing to) the Normal

(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.

WARNING!

In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode, the

system w

ill not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the

proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will

sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since

neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the

vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to

maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the

vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is selected.

STARTING AND OPERATING 373

To Set A Desired Speed

Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on.

When the vehicle has reached the desired speed,

push th

e SET (+) or SET (-) button and release.

Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the

selected speed. Once a speed has been set a message

“CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)” will appear

indicating what speed was set. This light will turn on when

the system is turned on via the on/off control. It turns green

when the cruise control is set.

To Vary The Speed Setting

To Increase Speed

When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you

can inc

rease speed by pushing the SET (+) button.

The driver's preferred units can be selected through the

instrum

ent cluster display. Refer to “Getting To Know Your

Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed incre

ment shown is dependant on the speed of U.S. (mph) or

Metric

(km/h) units:

U.S. Speed (mph)

• P

ushing the SET (+) butt

on once will result in a 1 mph

increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button

results in an increase of 1

mph.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

contin

ue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button

is rele

ased. The increase in set speed is reflected in the

instrument cluster display.

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pushing the SET (+) butt

on once will result in a 1 km/h

increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button

results in an increase of 1

km/h.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

contin

ue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the

button

is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in

the instrument cluster display.

374 STARTING AND OPERATING

To Decrease Speed

When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you

can dec

rease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.

The driver's preferred units can be selected through the

strum

ent cluster display. Refer to “Getting To Know Your

Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed decre

ment shown is dependant on the speed of U.S. (mph) or

Metric

(km/h) units:

U.S. Speed (mph)

• P

ushing the SET (-) but

ton once will result in a 1 mph

decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button

results in a decrease of 1

mph.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

contin

ue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the button

is rele

ased. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the

instrument cluster display.

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pushing the SET (-) but

ton once will result in a 1 km/h

decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button

results in a decrease of 1

km/h.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will

contin

ue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the

button

is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in

the instrument cluster display.

To Cancel

The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed

Speed)

Cruise Control without clearing the memory:

• The brake pedal is applied.

• The CA

NC button is pushed.

• The El

ectronic Stability Control/Traction Control System

(ESC/TC

S) activates.

• The vehicle parking brake is applied.

• The br

aking temperature exceeds normal range (over-

heated

• T

he gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.

• The dr

iver switches ESC to full-off mode.

STARTING AND OPERATING 375

To Resume Speed

To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and

release

. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph

(32 km/h).

o Turn Off

The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if:

• T

he Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button is

pushed

• The ignition is turned OFF.

• You en

gage Four-Wheel Drive Low.

• The Ad

aptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is

pushed

PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED

The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and

audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia

and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a

parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense System Usage

Precautions” in this section for limitations of this system and

recommendations.

ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or

disable

d) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is

changed to the ON/RUN position.

ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in

REVERSE

. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector posi-

tion, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is

ncreas

ed to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above.

When in

REVERSE and above the system's operating speed,

a warning will appear within the instrument cluster display

indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will

become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to

speeds less than approximately 6

mph (9 km/h).

ParkSense Sensors

The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/bumper,

monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’

field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approxi

mately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear

fascia/

bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the

location, type and orientation of the obstacle.

376 STARTING AND OPERATING

ParkSense Warning Display

The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if

“Sound and Display” is selected from the Customer -

Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.

Refer to "Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further

information.

The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instru-

ment cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate

the dist

ance between the rear fascia/bumper and the

detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in

“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further infor

mation.

ParkSense Display

When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the instrument cluster

display will show the park assist ready system status.

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a

single ar

c in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s

distance and location relative to the vehicle.

If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the display

will show

a single solid arc in the center rear region and will

produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves closer

to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving

closer to the vehicle and the sound tone will change from

slow, to fast, to continuous.

If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear region,

the disp

lay will show a single flashing arc in the left and/or

right rear region and will produce a fast sound tone. As the

vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show

the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will

change from fast to continuous.

Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc

STARTING AND OPERATING 377

Slow Tone/Solid Arc Slow Tone/Solid Arc

378 STARTING AND OPERATING

Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc

STARTING AND OPERATING 379

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The

following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:

NOTE:

ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when

he syst

em is sounding an audio tone.

WARNING ALERTS

Rear Distance

(inches

/cm)

Greater than

79 inche

(200 cm

)

79-59 inches

(200-15

0 cm)

59-47 inches

(150-120 cm)

47-39 inches

(120-100 cm)

39-25 inches

(100-65 cm)

25-12 inches

(65-30 cm)

Less than

12 inche

(30 cm)

rcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing

Arcs —

Center

ne 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing

Arcs — Right None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing

Audible Alert

Chime

Non

Single 1/2-

Second

Tone

(for rear

center

only)

Slow

(for rear

center

only)

Slow

(for rear

center only)

Fast

(for rear

center only)

Fast Continuous

Radio

Volume

educed

No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

380 STARTING AND OPERATING

Enabling And Disabling ParkSense

ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense

switch, located on the switch panel below the climate controls.

ParkSense Switch

When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the system,

the inst

rument cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE

OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to

“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your

Instrument Panel” for further information. When the gear

selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the

instrument cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF”

message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE (Not in 4LO).

The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is

disabled

or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED will

be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is

pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will

blink momentarily, and then the LED will be on.

Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System

During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park

Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instru-

ment cluster display will actuate a single chime, once per

ignition

cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE

UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the “PARK-

SENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message.

Refer to

“Instrument Cluster Display”. When the gear

selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a

faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will show

the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS"

or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED"

message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this

condition, ParkSense will not operate.

If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS”

appears

in the instrument cluster display, make sure the

outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper is

clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction

and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to

appear, see an authorized dealer.

STARTING AND OPERATING 381

If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”

appears in the instrument cluster display, see an authorized

dealer.

Cleaning The ParkSense System

Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash soap

and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In washing

stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the vapor jet/high

pressure washing nozzles at least 4

inches (10 cm) from the

sensors

. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you

could damage the sensors.

ParkSense System Usage Precautions

NOTE:

• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud, dirt

and de

bris to keep the ParkSense system operating properly.

• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could

affect

the performance of ParkSense.

• When you turn ParkSense OFF, the instrument cluster

displa

y will read “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once

you turn ParkSense OFF, it remains off until you turn it on

again, even if you cycle the ignition.

• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio

when it

is sounding a tone.

• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to

scratc

h or damage them. The sensors must not be covered

with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so

can result in the system not working properly. The Park

Sense system might not detect an obstacle behind the

ascia/b

umper, or it could provide a false indication that

an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.

• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system

OFF if o

bjects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.

are placed within 12

inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/

bumper.

Failure to do so can result in the system misinter-

preting a close object as a sensor problem, causing the

“

PARKSE

NSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”

message to be displayed in the instrument cluster display.

• The operation of the rear sensors is automatically deacti-

vated

when the trailer's electric plug is inserted in the

vehicle

's tow hook socket. The rear sensors are automati-

cally reactivated when the trailer's cable plug is removed.

382 STARTING AND OPERATING

PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA

The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see an

on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle

whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image

will be displayed in the touchscreen display along with a

caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of

the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The

ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle in the

center of the spare tire.

WARNING!

• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when

using P

arkSense. Always check carefully behind your

vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for

pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and

blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for

safety and must continue to pay attention to your

surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious

injury or death.

• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended

that t

he ball mount and hitch ball assembly is discon-

nected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for

owing. Fa

ilure to do so can result in injury or damage

to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be

much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when

the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the

sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball

assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a

false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

CAUTION!

• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to

recogni

ze every obstacle, including small obstacles.

Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not

detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the

sensors will not be detected when they are in close

proximity.

• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using Park-

Sense

in order to be able to stop in time when an

obstacle

is detected. It is recommended that the driver

looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.

STARTING AND OPERATING 383

Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera

1. Press the “Controls” button located on the bottom of the

Uconne

ct display.

2. P

ress the “Backup Camera” button to turn the Rear View

amera

system on.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Camera

delay tu

rned off), the rear Camera mode is exited and the

previous screen appears again.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Camera

delay tu

rned on), the rear Camera image will be displayed

for up to 10 seconds unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8

mph

(13 km/h),

the transmission is shifted into PARK, the igni-

tion is switched to the OFF position, or the touchscreen

utton

“X” to disable display of the Rear View Camera

image is pressed.

Whenever the Rear View Camera image is activated through the

"Backup

Camera" button in the "Controls" menu, and the vehicle

speed is greater than, or equal to, 8

mph (13 km/h), a display

timer fo

r the image is initiated. The image will continue to be

displayed until the display timer exceeds 10 seconds.

NOTE:

• If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (

13 km/h), the

Rear View Camera image will be displayed continuously

until deactivated via the touchscreen button "X", the trans

mission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is cycled to

the OFF p

osition.

• The touchscreen button "X" to disable display of the

camera

image is made available ONLY when the vehicle is

not in REVERSE.

When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image

to illu

strate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup

path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed center

line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with

parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.

When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid on the image to

illustr

ate the width of the vehicle.

Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of

the veh

icle.

384 STARTING AND OPERATING

(Continued)

The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:

NOTE:

If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the

amera

lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a

soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.

Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle

Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)

Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)

Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)

WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when

using th

e ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always check

carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for

pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or

blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for

the safety of your surroundings and must continue to

pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can

result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be

used a

s a parking aid. The ParkView camera is unable

to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.

• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven

slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time

when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the

driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when

using ParkView.

CAUTION! (Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 385

REFUELING THE VEHICLE

Fuel Filler Cap

The fuel filler cap is located on the driver's side of the vehicle.

If the fuel filler cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replace-

ment cap is the correct one for this vehicle.

Fuel Filler Door

Fuel Filler Cap

WARNING!

• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the

vehicle

when the fuel door is open or the tank is being

filled.

• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in

violation

of most state and federal fire regulations and

may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on.

• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable

containe

r that is inside of a vehicle. You could be

burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground

while filling.

386 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:

• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is

full.

• T

ighten the fuel filler cap about 1/4 turn until you hear one

click.

This is an indication that the cap is properly tight-

ened.

• I

f the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will

come o

n. Be sure the cap is tightened every time the

vehicle is refueled.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic system can

determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose, improperly

installed, or damaged. If the system detects a malfunction,

the “gASCAP” message will display in the odometer

display. Tighten the gas cap until a "clicking" sound is heard.

This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened.

Push the odometer reset button to turn the message off. If the

problem persists, the message will appear the next time the

vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the

problem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on

the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off.

CAUTION!

• D

amage to the fuel system or emission control system

could r

esult from using an improper fuel filler cap. A

poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel

system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause

the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to illuminate,

due to fuel vapors escaping from the system.

• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”

the fu

el tank after filling.

STARTING AND OPERATING 387

VEHICLE LOADING

Certification Label

As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administra-

tion regulations, your vehicle has a certification label affixed

to the

driver's side door or pillar.

This label contains the month and year of manufacture,

oss V

ehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight

Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is

included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and

Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the

bottom of the label is your VIN.

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle

includi

ng driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. The

label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle

systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so GVWR and

front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.

Payload

The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load

weight a

truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,

all passengers, options and cargo.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front

and rea

r axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo area

so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.

Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the

system wi

th the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, springs,

tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension components

sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability

does not necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.

Tire Size

The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the

actual

tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must be

equal to the load capacity of this tire size.

388 STARTING AND OPERATING

Rim Size

This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed.

Inflation Pressure

This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all

conditions up to full GAWR.

Curb Weight

The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of

the veh

icle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full

capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded

into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are

determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale

before any occupants or cargo are added.

The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear

of your

vehicle at the ground can best be determined by

weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.

The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale

to insu

re that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The weight on

the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined

separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over

the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the

GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the

total load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be

shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the

specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items

down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally.

Stow all loose items securely before driving.

Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on

the way yo

ur vehicle steers and handles and the way the

brakes operate.

CAUTION!

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or

the max

imum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts on

your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your

vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose control.

Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 389

TRAILER TOWING

In this section you will find safety tips and information on

limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your

vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this infor

mation to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible.

To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,

follow t

he requirements and recommendations in this

manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.

Common Towing Definitions

The following trailer towing related definitions will assist

you in understanding the following information:

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This

include

s driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The

total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the

GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification

Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)

The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all

cargo, c

onsumables and equipment (permanent or tempo-

rary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for

perati

on" condition.

The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully

aded

trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the

trailer must be supported by the scale.

Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)

The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle

and tra

iler when weighed in combination.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear

axles.

Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly.

Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR.

Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in

“Starting And Operating” for further information.

WARNING!

It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front

or rear

GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result

if either rating is exceeded.

390 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tongue Weight (TW)

The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the

hitch b

all by the trailer. You must consider this as part of the

load on your vehicle.

Frontal Area

The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the

maximum

width of the front of a trailer.

Trailer Sway Control – If Equipped

The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be

nstall

ed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue. It

typically provides adjustable friction associated with the

telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer

swaying motions while traveling.

Weight-Carrying Hitch

A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,

just as

if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other

connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are the

most popular on the market today and they are commonly

used to tow small and medium sized trailers.

Weight-Distributing Hitch

A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage

through

spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier

loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's

front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with

the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a more level ride,

offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby

enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic

sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and cross

winds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer

tabili

ty. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load

equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue

Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle and

trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.

WARNING!

• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch

system

may reduce handling, stability, braking perfor-

mance, and could result in a collision.

• W

eight Distributing Systems may not be compatible

with S

urge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch

and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational

Vehicle dealer for additional information.

STARTING AND OPERATING 391

Trailer Hitch Classification

The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and

should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.

Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions

Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards

Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)

Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)

Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)

Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)

Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight

(

GTW) t

owable for your given drivetrain.

All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.

392 STARTING AND OPERATING

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)

NOTE:

The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the

combine

d weight of occupants and cargo (ie. the GVWR),

and the GVWR should never exceed the weight referenced

on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire

Safety Information” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for

further information.

Engine/Transmission Model

GCWR (Gross

Combined

Wt.

Rating)

Frontal Area

Max. GTW

(Gross Trailer

Wt.)

Max. Trailer Tongue

Wt. (Se

e Note)

2.0L

Two–Door

8,016 lbs

(

3 636

kg)

20 ft2 (1.86 m2) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)

Four–Door

8,117 lbs

(3 682

kg)

30 ft2 (2.79 m2)

3,500 lbs

(1 587 kg)

350 lbs (158 kg)

3.6L

Two–Door

8,016 lbs

(3 636

kg)

20 ft2 (1.86 m2) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)

Four–Door

8,117 lbs

(3 682

kg)

30 ft2 (2.79 m2)

3,500 lbs

(1 587 kg)

350 lbs (158 kg)

Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

STARTING AND OPERATING 393

Trailer And Tongue Weight

Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your

bumper or trailer hitch.

Consider the following items when computing the weight on

the rear

axle of the vehicle:

• The tongue weight of the trailer.

• The weigh

t of any other type of cargo or equipment put in

or on yo

ur vehicle.

• The weight of the driver and all passengers.

NOTE:

Rem

ember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to

he load

on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed

options or dealer-installed options must be considered as

part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire And

Loading Information” placard for the maximum combined

weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.

Towing Requirements — Tires

• P

roper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and

satisfa

ctory operation of your vehicle. Refer to “Tires –

General Information” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for

proper tire inflation procedures.

• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures

before

trailer usage.

• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before

towing a

trailer. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in

“Servicing And Maintenance” for proper inspection proce

dure.

• W

hen replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Informa-

tion” i

n “Servicing And Maintenance” for proper tire

replacem

ent procedures. Replacing tires with a higher

load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle's

GVWR and GAWR limits.

394 STARTING AND OPERATING

Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes

• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum

syste

m of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could

cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.

• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is

requir

ed when towing a trailer with electronically actu-

ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a

ydrauli

c surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake

controller is not required.

• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs

(453 k

g) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).

Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring

Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,

stopligh

ts and turn signals on the trailer are required for

motoring safety.

The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin

wiring ha

rness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and

connector.

NOTE:

Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring harness.

The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but

you must

mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the

following illustrations.

WARNING!

• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's

hydraul

ic brake lines. It can overload your brake

system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes

when you need them and could have an accident.

• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping

distan

ce. When towing, you should allow for addi-

tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in

ront of

you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

CAUTION!

If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg) loaded,

it shoul

d have its own brakes and they should be of

adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to

accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort,

and longer stopping distances.

STARTING AND OPERATING 395

NOTE:

• Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle

before

launching a boat (or any other device plugged into

vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.

• Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.

Four-Pin

Connector

Seven-Pin Connector

Towing Tips

Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping and

backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic.

If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing, all

starts m

ust be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch slippage.

1 — Female Pins 4 — Park

2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn

3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn

1 — Battery 5 — Ground

2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn

3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps

4 — Electric Brakes

396 STARTING AND OPERATING

Automatic Transmission — If Equipped

Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission

control

s include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting

when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur while

in DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick shift control to manu

ally select a lower gear.

NOTE:

Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy

oading

conditions, will improve performance and extend

transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat

buildup. This action will also provide better engine braking.

AutoStick — If Equipp

• When using the AutoStick shift control, select the highest

gear th

at allows for adequate performance and avoids

frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if the

desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or “3” if

needed to maintain the desired speed.

• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous

drivin

g at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary to

avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a higher

gear or vehicle speed when grade and road conditions

allow.

Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped

• D

o not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.

• When u

sing the speed control, if you experience speed

drops

greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you

can get

back to cruising speed.

• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to

maximi

ze fuel efficiency.

Cooling System

To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-

heating, take the following actions:

City Driving

When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmis-

sion into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.

Highway Driving

Reduce speed.

Air Conditioning

Turn off temporarily.

STARTING AND OPERATING 397

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Four-Wheel Drive Models

Flat Tow NONE

See Instructions

• A

utomatic transmission in PARK.

• Manual

transmission in gear (NOT in

NEUTRA

L [N]).

• Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N).

• Tow in

forward direction.

Dolly T

Front NOT ALLOWED

Rear NOT ALLOWED

On Trailer ALL OK

NOTE:

When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety

ffices

for additional details.

398 STARTING AND OPERATING

(Continued)

Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive Models

NOTE:

The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N), auto-

matic transmission must be in PARK, and manual transmis-

sion must be in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL) for recreational

owing.

Shif

ting Into NEUTRAL (N)

Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for

recreat

ional towing.

CAUTION!

• D

O NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing with

only one

set of wheels on the ground (front or rear) will

cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage.

Tow with all four wheels either ON the ground, or OFF

the ground (using a vehicle trailer).

• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this vehicle

backwa

rds can cause severe damage to the transfer case.

• Automatic transmissions must be placed in PARK for

recrea

tional towing.

• Manual transmissions must be placed in gear (not in

Neutra

l) for recreational towing.

• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure

outline

d under “Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)” to be

certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N).

Otherwise, internal damage will result.

• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-

ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer

case da

mage. Damage from improper towing is not

covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on

your vehi

cle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.

WARNING!

You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the

vehicle

unattended with the transfer case in the

NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the

parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) position

disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the

powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the

automatic transmission is in PARK (or manual

transmission is in gear). The parking brake should

always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.

CAUTION! (Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 399

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level ground.

2. Press and hold the brake pedal.

3. Shif

t the automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or

depres

s the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.

4. Turn the engine OFF.

5. Shif

t the transfer case lever into NEUTRAL (N).

6. Star

t the engine.

7. Shif

t the transmission into REVERSE.

8. Rele

ase the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual

transm

issions) for five seconds and ensure that there is no

vehicle movement.

9. Repeat steps seven and eight with automatic transmis-

sion i

n DRIVE or manual transmission in first gear.

10. T

urn the engine OFF.

11. Firm

ly apply the parking brake.

12. Shi

ft the transmission into PARK or place manual trans-

missio

n in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL).

13. A

ttach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable tow

bar.

14.

Release the parking brake.

Shifting

Out of NEUTRAL (N)

Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for

normal

usage.

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected

to the

tow vehicle.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.

3. Star

t the engine.

CAUTIO

It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the

transfe

r case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before

recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.

CAUTION!

Damage to the transmission may occur if the

transmi

ssion is shifted into PARK with the transfer case

in NEUTRAL (N) and the engine running. With the

transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) ensure that the engine is

OFF before shifting the transmission into PARK.

400 STARTING AND OPERATING

4. Press and hold the brake pedal.

5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

6. Turn

the engine OFF.

7. Shif

t the transfer case lever to the desired position.

NOTE:

en shifting the transfer case out of NEUTRAL (N), the

ngine s

hould remain OFF to avoid gear clash.

8. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK, or place

manual

transmission in NEUTRAL.

9. Release the brake pedal.

10. Dis

connect vehicle from the tow vehicle.

11. Sta

rt the engine.

12. Pre

ss and hold the brake pedal.

13. Rel

ease the parking brake.

14. Shi

ft the transmission into gear, release the brake pedal

(and c

lutch pedal on manual transmissions), and check

that the vehicle operates normally.

DRIVING TIPS

On-Road Driving Tips

Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a

narrower track to make them capable of performing in a

wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design charac

teristics give them a higher center of gravity than conven-

tional passenger cars.

An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view

f the

road, allowing you to anticipate problems. They are

not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conven

tional passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars

are des

igned to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions.

Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehi

cles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may

result

in loss of control or vehicle rollover.

STARTING AND OPERATING 401

Off-Road Driving Tips

Side Step Removal — If Equipped

NOTE:

Prior to off-road usage, the side steps should be removed to

prevent

damage if so equipped.

1. T

here are two studs on the bodyside of each connecting

racket.

odyside Studs

2. R

emove both nuts from the underside of the vehicle for

each br

acket.

Underside Nuts

3. Remove the side step assembly.

402 STARTING AND OPERATING

Bumper End Cap Removal

The end caps on your vehicle’s front bumper can be removed

by followi

ng the steps below:

NOTE:

Bumper end caps are removable on steel bumper only.

1. L

oosen the two bolts that retain the GAWR bracket (Bolts

#1 and #2

) to the end cap using a T45 torx bit screw

driver. Do not remove the bolts.

Bolt #1

Bolt #2

2. Remove the remaining 8 bolts. The end cap can now be

expande

d open.

3. Gently remove the end cap from the vehicle and store it

where it

will not get damaged.

4. Repeat this procedure on the other side.

STARTING AND OPERATING 403

The Basics Of Off-Road Driving

You will encounter many types of terrain driving off-road. You

should

be familiar with the terrain and area before proceeding.

There are many types of surface conditions: hard-packed dirt,

gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow and ice. Every surface

has a different effect on your vehicle's steering, handling and

traction. Controlling your vehicle is one of the keys to

successful off-road driving, so always keep a firm grip on the

steering wheel and maintain a good driving posture. Avoid

sudden accelerations, turns or braking. In most cases, there are

no road signs, posted speed limits or signal lights. Therefore,

you will need to use your own good judgment on what is safe

and what is not. When on a trail, you should always be looking

ahead for surface obstacles and changes in terrain. The key is

to plan your future driving route while remembering what

you are currently driving over.

NOTE:

It is recommended that the Start/Stop System be disabled

during o

ff-road use.

When To Use 4L (Low) Range

When off-road driving, shift into 4L (Low) for additional

tractio

n and control on slippery or difficult terrain,

ascending or descending steep hills, and to increase low

speed pulling power. This range should be limited to

extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, steep inclines,

or sand where additional low speed pulling power is

needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 25

mph (40 km/h)

should

be avoided when in 4L (Low) range.

WARNING!

Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down cargo.

Unsecur

ed cargo can become projectiles in an off-road

situation.

CAUTION!

Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other

combusti

ble materials. The heat from your vehicle

exhaust system could cause a fire.

CAUTION!

Do not use 4L (Low) range when operating the vehicle on

dry pavem

ent. Driveline hardware damage can result.

404 STARTING AND OPERATING

Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation

Many off-road driving conditions require the simultaneous

use of

the brake and throttle (two-footed driving). When

climbing rocks, logs, or other stepped objects, using light

brake pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from

jerking or lurching. This technique is also used when you

need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep incline.

Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand

Snow

In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at

lower s

peeds, shift the transmission into a low gear and the

transfer case into 4L (Low) if necessary. Do not shift to a

lower gear than necessary to maintain headway.

Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction

will be lost. If you start to slow to a stop, try turning your

steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and

forth, while still applying throttle. This will allow the tires to

get a fresh "bite" and help maintain your momentum.

Mud

Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires and

is very

difficult to get through. You should use DRIVE, with

the transfer case in the 4L (Low) position to maintain your

momentum. If you start to slow to a stop, try turning your

steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and

forth for additional traction. Mud holes pose an increased

threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck. They are

normally full of debris from previous vehicles getting stuck.

As a good practice before entering any mud hole, get out and

determine how deep it is, if there are any hidden obstacles

and if the vehicle can be safely recovered if stuck.

Sand

Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire pres-

sure. When crossing soft, sandy spots in a trail, maintain

your veh

icle's momentum and do not stop. The key to

driving in soft sand is using the appropriate tire pressure,

accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt maneuvers and main

taining the vehicle's momentum. If you are going to be

riving

on large soft sandy areas or dunes, reduce your tire

pressure to a minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to allow for a

greater tire surface area. Reduced tire pressure will drasti

cally improve your traction and handling while driving on

he sof

t sand, but you must return the tires to normal air

CAUTION!

On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high

engine R

PM or vehicle speeds, because engine braking

may cause skidding and loss of control.

STARTING AND OPERATING 405

pressure before driving on pavement or other hard surfaces.

Be sure you have a way to reinflate the tires prior to reducing

the pressure.

Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High Points)

While driving off-road, you will encounter many types of

terrain

. These varying types of terrain bring different types

of obstacles. Before proceeding, review the path ahead to

determine the correct approach and your ability to safely

recover the vehicle if something goes wrong. Keeping a firm

grip on the steering wheel, bring the vehicle to a complete

stop and then inch the vehicle forward until it makes contact

with the object. Apply the throttle lightly while holding a

light brake pressure and ease the vehicle up and over the

object.

Using A Spotter

There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle or

determi

ne the correct path. Determining the correct path can

be extremely difficult when you are confronting many obsta

cles. In these cases have someone guide you over, through, or

around

the obstacle. Have the person stand a safe distance in

front of you where they can see the obstacle, watch your tires

and undercarriage, and guide you through.

Crossing Large Rocks

When approaching large rocks, choose a path which ensures

you driv

e over the largest of them with your tires. This will

lift your undercarriage over the obstacle. The tread of the tire

is tougher and thicker than the side wall and is designed to

take the abuse. Always look ahead and make every effort to

cross the large rocks with your tires.

CAUTION!

Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and

total los

s of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire

unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure, reduce your

speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.

WARNING!

Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system

loading w

hich could cause you to loose control of your

vehicle.

406 STARTING AND OPERATING

Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout Or Rut

When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a large rut,

the angl

ed approach is the key to maintaining your vehicle's

mobility. Approach these obstacles at a 45-degree angle and

let each tire go through the obstacle independently. You

need to use caution when crossing large obstacles with steep

sides. Do not attempt to cross any large obstacle with steep

sides at an angle great enough to put the vehicle at risk of a

rollover. If you get caught in a rut, dig a small trench to the

right or left at a 45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use

the removed dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just

created. You should now be able to drive out following the

trench you just created at a 45-degree angle.

Crossing Logs

To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle (approximately 10

to 15 d

egrees). This allows one front tire to be on top of the

log while the other just starts to climb the log. While climbing

the log, modulate your brake and accelerator to avoid spin

ning the log out from under your tires. Then ease the vehicle

ff the

log using your brakes.

Getting High-Centered

If you get hung up or high-centered on an object, get out of

the veh

icle and try to determine what the vehicle is hung up

on, where it is contacting the underbody and what is the best

direction to recover the vehicle. Depending on what you are

in contact with, jack the vehicle up and place a few rocks

under the tires so the weight is off of the high point when

you let the vehicle down. You can also try rocking the vehicle

or winching the vehicle off the object.

CAUTION!

• N

ever attempt to straddle a rock that is large enough to

strike

your axles or undercarriage.

• Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large

enough t

o contact the door sills.

WARNING!

There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing an

obstacle

, at any angle, with steep sides.

CAUTION!

Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter than

the run

ning ground clearance or the vehicle will become

high-centered.

STARTING AND OPERATING 407

Hill Climbing

Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good under-

standing of your abilities and your vehicle's limitations. Hills

can cau

se serious problems. Some are just too steep to climb

and should not be attempted. You should always feel confi

dent with the vehicle and your abilities. You should always

climb h

ills straight up and down. Never attempt to climb a

hill on an angle.

Before Climbing A Steep Hill

As you approach a hill, consider its grade or steepness.

Determi

ne if it is too steep. Look to see what the traction is

on the hill side trail. Is the trail straight up and down? What

is on top and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks, branches

or other obstacles on the path? Can you safely recover the

vehicle if something goes wrong? If everything looks good

and you feel confident, shift the transmission into a lower

gear with 4L (Low) engaged, and proceed with caution,

maintaining your momentum as you climb the hill.

Driving Up Hill

Once you have determined your ability to proceed and have

shifted

into the appropriate gear, line your vehicle up for the

straightest possible run. Accelerate with an easy constant

throttle and apply more power as you start up the hill. Do

not race forward into a steep grade; the abrupt change of

grade could cause you to lose control. If the front end begins

to bounce, ease off the throttle slightly to bring all four tires

back on the ground. As you approach the crest of the hill,

ease off the throttle and slowly proceed over the top. If the

wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill, ease off

the accelerator and maintain headway by turning the

steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and

forth. This will provide a fresh "bite" into the surface and will

usually provide enough traction to complete the climb. If

you do not make it to the top, place the vehicle in REVERSE

and back straight down the grade using engine resistance

along with the vehicle brakes.

CAUTION!

Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects

increases the risk of underbody damage.

WARNING!

Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn around

on a ste

ep grade. Driving across an incline increases the

risk of a rollover, which may result in severe injury.

408 STARTING AND OPERATING

Driving Downhill

Before driving down a steep hill, you need to determine if it

is too

steep for a safe descent. What is the surface traction? Is

the grade too steep to maintain a slow, controlled descent?

Are there obstacles? Is it a straight descent? Is there plenty of

distance at the base of the hill to regain control if the vehicle

descends to fast? If you feel confident in your ability to

proceed, then make sure you are in 4L (Low) and proceed

with caution. Allow engine braking to control the descent

and apply your brakes, if necessary, but do not allow the

tires to lock.

Driving Across An Incline

If at all possible, avoid driving across an incline. If it is neces-

sary, know your vehicle's abilities. Driving across an incline

places

more weight on the downhill wheels, which increases

the possibilities of a downhill slide or rollover. Make sure the

surface has good traction with firm and stable soils. If

possible, transverse the incline at an angle heading slightly

up or down.

If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway

If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep

hill, a

llow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately

apply the brake. Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE.

Back slowly down the hill allowing engine braking to control

the descent and apply your brakes, if necessary, but do not

allow the tires to lock.

WARNING!

Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use vehicle

brakes

in conjunction with engine braking. Descending

a grade too fast could cause you to lose control and be

seriously injured or killed.

WARNING!

Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover,

which m

ay result in severe injury.

WARNING!

If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make

it to th

e top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt to turn

around. To do so may result in tipping and rolling the

vehicle, which may result in severe injury. Always back

carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE. Never back

down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the vehicle brakes.

Never drive diagonally across a hill, always drive

straight up or down.

STARTING AND OPERATING 409

Driving Through Water

Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water.

Water c

rossings should be avoided, if possible, and only be

attempted when necessary in a safe, responsible manner.

You should only drive through areas which are designated

and approved. You should tread lightly and avoid damage

to the environment. You should know your vehicle's abilities

and be able to recover it if something goes wrong. You

should never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing deep

water unless you ingested water into the engine air intake. If

the engine stalls, do not attempt to restart it. Determine if it

has ingested water first. The key to any crossing is low and

slow. Shift into first gear (manual transmission), or DRIVE

(automatic transmission), with the transfer case in the 4L

(Low) position and proceed very slowly with a constant slow

speed {3 to 5

mph (5 to 8 km/h) maximum} and light throttle.

Keep th

e vehicle moving; do not try to accelerate through the

crossing. After crossing any water higher than the bottom of

the axle differentials, you should inspect all of the vehicle

fluids for signs of water ingestion.

Before You Cross Any Type Of Water

As you approach any type of water, you need to determine if

you can

cross it safely and responsibly. If necessary, get out

and walk through the water or probe it with a stick. You need

to be sure of its depth, approach angle, current and bottom

condition. Be careful of murky or muddy waters; check for

hidden obstacles. Make sure you will not be intruding on any

wildlife, and you can recover the vehicle if necessary. The key

to a safe crossing is the water depth, current and bottom condi

tions. On soft bottoms, the vehicle will sink in, effectively

increas

ing the water level on the vehicle. Be sure to consider

this when determining the depth and the ability to safely cross.

CAUTION!

• Water ingestion into the axles, transmission, transfer

case,

engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive

too fast or through too deep of water. Water can cause

permanent damage to engine, driveline or other vehicle

components, and your brakes will be less effective once

wet and/or muddy.

• When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph

(8 k

m/h). Always check water depth before entering as

a preca

ution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving

through water may cause damage that may not be

covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

410 STARTING AND OPERATING

Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or Other Standing

Water

Puddles, pools, flooded or other standing water areas

normall

y contain murky or muddy waters. These water

types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it diffi

cult to determine an accurate water depth, approach angle,

and bot

tom condition. Murky or muddy water holes are

where you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering. This

makes for a faster, cleaner and easier vehicle recovery. If you

are able to determine you can safely cross, than proceed

using the low and slow method.

Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers Or Other

Flowing Wa

ter

Flowing water can be extremely dangerous. Never attempt

to cros

s a fast running stream or river even in shallow water.

Fast moving water can easily push your vehicle down

stream, sweeping it out of control. Even in very shallow

water, a

high current can still wash the dirt out from around

your tires putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy. There is

still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle damage with

slower water currents in depths greater than the vehicle's

running ground clearance. You should never attempt to

cross flowing water which is deeper than the vehicle's

running ground clearance. Even the slowest current can

push the heaviest vehicle downstream and out of control if

the water is deep enough to push on the large surface area of

the vehicle's body. Before you proceed, determine the speed

of the current, the water's depth, approach angle, bottom

condition and if there are any obstacles. Then cross at an

angle heading slightly upstream using the low and slow

technique.

CAUTION!

Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system

ffecti

veness by depositing debris onto the radiator.

WARNING!

Never drive through fast moving deep water. It can push

your vehic

le downstream, sweeping it out of control.

This could put you and your passengers at risk of injury

or drowning.

STARTING AND OPERATING 411

After Driving Off-Road

Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than

does mo

st on-road driving. After going off-road, it is always

a good idea to check for damage. That way you can get any

problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle

ready when you need it.

• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle. Check

tires,

body structure, steering, suspension, and exhaust

system for damage.

• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as

requir

ed.

• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on the

chassi

s, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension.

Retighten them, if required, and torque to the values spec

ified in the Service Manual.

• C

heck for accumulations of plants or brush. These things

could

be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel

lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.

• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar

dirty c

onditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors,

wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and

cleaned as soon as possible.

NOTE:

Inspect the clutch vent holes in the manual transmission bell

ousing

for mud and debris and clean as required.

• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud,

slush

or similar conditions, check the wheels for impacted

material. Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance

and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation.

WARNING!

Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause

excessi

ve wear or unpredictable braking. You might not

have full braking power when you need it to prevent a

collision. If you have been operating your vehicle in

dirty conditions, get your brakes checked and cleaned as

necessary.

412

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the instru-

ment panel below the climate controls.

Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning

flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional

urn sign

als will flash on and off to warn oncoming

traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to

turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.

This is an emergency warning system and it should not be

used when

the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle

is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motor

ists.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the

Hazard W

arning flashers will continue to operate even

though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.

NOTE:

With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear

down your

battery.

ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

Assist And SOS Buttons

If equipped, the overhead console contains an ASSIST and an

SOS butt

on.

1 — Assist Button

2 — SOS Button

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 413

NOTE:

• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by

the su

bscriber.

• The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you are

connec

ted to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data)

network. Other Uconnect services will only be operable if

your SiriusXM Guardian service is active and you are

connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data)

network.

ASSIST Call

The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to

any one

of the following support centers:

• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow,

just p

ush the ASSIST button and you’ll be connected to

someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know

what vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional

fees may apply for roadside assistance.

• SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care – In-vehicle support

for Si

riusXM Guardian.

• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other vehicle

issues

SOS Call

1. P

ush the SOS Call button on the overhead console.

NOTE:

case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there will be a

ten sec

ond delay before the SOS Call system initiates a call to

a SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call connection, push the

SOS call button on the overhead console or press the cancel

lation button on the Device Screen. Termination of the SOS

all wil

l turn off the green LED light on the overhead

console.

WARNING!

ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.

ALWAYS

drive safely with your hands on the steering

wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks

related to the use of the features and applications in this

vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is

safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident

involving serious injury or death.

414 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

(Continued)

2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and SOS

buttons on the overhead console will turn green once a

connection to a SOS operator has been made.

3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SOS oper-

ator i

s made, the SOS Call system may transmit the

followin

g important vehicle information to a SOS oper-

ator:

• I

ndication that the occupant placed a SOS Call.

• The v

ehicle brand.

• The l

ast known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.

4. You

should be able to speak with the SOS operator

through

the vehicle audio system to determine if addi-

tional help is needed.

NOTE:

• Y

our vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by

the su

bscriber.

• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s SOS Call

system

and the SOS operator, the SOS operator may be

able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to deter

mine if additional help is needed. Once the SOS operator

opens a

voice connection with the vehicle’s SOS Call

system, the operator should be able to speak with you or

other vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in the

vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system will attempt to

remain connected with the SOS operator until the SOS

operator terminates the connection.

5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate

emergen

cy responders and provide them with important

vehicle information and GPS coordinates.

WARNING!

ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.

ALWAYS

drive safely with your hands on the steering

wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks

related to the use of the features and applications in this

vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is

safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident

involving serious injury or death.

WARNING!

• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire or

smoke i

s visible, dangerous road conditions or loca-

tion), do not wait for voice contact from an Emergency

ervices

Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle

immediately and move to a safe location.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 415

(Continued)

SOS Call System Limitations

Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT h

ave SOS Call system

capabilities.

SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not

swer o

r respond to SOS system calls.

If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the

followin

g may occur at the time the malfunction is detected,

and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:

• The light located between the ASSIST and SOS buttons

will co

ntinuously be illuminated red.

• The Device Screen will display the following message

“Vehic

le device requires service. Please contact your

dealer.”

• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device

requir

es service. Please contact your dealer.”

• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s operable

network

and GPS antennas. You could prevent oper-

able network and GPS signal reception, which can

revent

your vehicle from placing an emergency call.

An operable network and GPS signal reception is

required for the SOS Call system to function properly.

• The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s elec-

trical

system. Do not add aftermarket electrical equip-

ment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent

our ve

hicle from sending a signal to initiate an emer-

gency call. To avoid interference that can cause the SOS

all sy

stem to fail, never add aftermarket equipment

(e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.)

to your vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas

on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY

POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING

OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT

FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS,

WILL NOT OPERATE.

• Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system could

cause

the air bag system to fail when you need it. You

could be injured if the air bag system is not there to

help protect you.

WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING!

• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you

will n

ot have SOS Call services. If the Rearview Mirror

light is illuminated, have your authorized dealer

service the SOS Call system immediately.

416 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors

beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the SOS

Call system operation. These include, but are not limited to,

the following factors:

• Delayed accessories mode is active.

• The ign

ition is in the OFF position.

• The ve

hicle’s electrical systems are not intact.

• The SO

S Call system software and/or hardware are

damaged

during a crash.

• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected

during

a vehicle crash.

• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global

Positi

oning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed.

• Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility.

• Opera

tor error by the SOS operator.

• LTE (v

oice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion.

• Weathe

• Buildi

ngs, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.

NOTE:

• Y

our vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by

the su

bscriber.

• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE (voice/

data)

or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could prevent

LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception,

which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emer

gency call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data)

etwork c

onnection and a GPS signal is required for the

SOS Call system to function properly.

• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the

air ba

g Warning Light on the instrument panel if a

malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If the

Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have your autho

rized dealer service the Occupant Restraint Control

ystem i

mmediately.

WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING!

ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.

ALWAYS

drive safely with your hands on the steering

wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks

related to the use of the features and applications in this

vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is

safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident

involving serious injury or death.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 417

General Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Opera-

tion is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device

may not

cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the

party re

sponsible for compliance could void the user's

authority to operate the equipment.

BULB REPLACEMENT

Replacement Bulbs

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never

spray an

y cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.

Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the

mirror clean.

Interior Bulbs

Bulb Number

Automatic Transmission Indicator Lamp 658

Heater Control Lamps (2) 194

Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp (Rear Window Defogger, and

ear Wa

sh/Wipe)

Soundbar Dome Lamp 912

** Bulbs only available from an authorized dealer.

418 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Exterior Bulbs

Bulb Number

Headlamps (2) H13

Premium Head Lamps LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)

Sport Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2) 7442NALL

Premium Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2) LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)

Base (Sahara/Rubicon) Turn Lamp 7440NA

Base (Sahara/Rubicon) Park DRL Lamp 7443

Front Side Marker Lamps (2) LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)

Base Fog Lamps PSX24W

Premium Fog Lamps LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)

Rear Premium LED Tail Lamps LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)

Rear Base Tail Lamp Stop/Tail/Turn Bulb 3157

Rear Base Tail Lamp Backup Bulb 7440

Rear Base Tail Lamp Side Marker LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)

Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)

License Lamp LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)

NOTE:

Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from an authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced,

isit a

n authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 419

Bulb Replacement

NOTE:

Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric condi-

tions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions

hange t

o allow the condensation to change back into a

vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the

clearing process.

Halogen Headlamps

1. Open hood and support using prop rod.

2. Remo

ve the front grille. Turn the retainers along the top

1/4 tur

n counterclockwise and remove.

3. Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side and

working t

oward the other.

4. Remove the three screws holding the headlamp to the

vehicl

5. Remove lamp from the vehicle.

6. Remo

ve the lamp from the collar.

7. Gras

p the bulb and turn 1/4 turn counterclockwise.

8. Pull

the bulb from the housing.

9. Push

connector locking tab to the unlock position.

10. Rem

ove connector from bulb.

11. Pus

h connector onto new bulb base, and push the

connec

tor locking tab to the lock position.

12. Reinstall bulb housing. Rotate the bulb 1/4 turn clock-

wise.

CAU

TION!

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil

ontamin

ation will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb

comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb

with rubbing alcohol.

420 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Front Park/Turn Signal

1. Remove the front wheel liner fasteners to access bulb

sockets

Wheel Liner

2. Turn the socket assembly 1/4 turn counterclockwise and

remove

from housing. Pull the bulb straight from the

socket to replace.

LED Front Side Marker

1. Remove the front wheel liner fasteners to access side

maker s

crew and electrical connector.

2. R

emove fastening screw in the back of the front side

aker a

ssembly and disconnect electrical connector.

3. Remove and replace LED front side marker light

assemb

ly.

Halogen Front Fog Lamp

1. Reach under the vehicle to access the back of the front fog

lamp.

Disconnect the wire harness connector from the front fog

lamp c

onnector receptacle.

3. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latch features and

squeez

e them together to unlock the bulb from the back

of the front fog lamp housing.

4. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the

housin

g and then connect the replacement bulb.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 421

LED Front Fog Lamp

If your vehicle is equipped with LED fog lamps they are

replace

d as an assembly.

Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup Lamp

1. Remo

ve interior trim panel cap to access single retaining

screw f

or tail lamp assembly.

Trim Cap

2. Remove retaining screw and disconnect electrical

connec

tor, then remove tail lamp assembly from the

vehicle.

CAUTION!

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil

contamin

ation will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb

comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb

with rubbing alcohol.

422 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

NOTE:

If necessary, push in on the assembly tab located inboard

behind

the lamp housing.

Retaining Screw

3. Remove the three screws from assembly bracket to access

bulb s

ockets.

Assembly Bracket

4. Rotate the appropriate socket 1/4 turn counterclockwise,

then r

emove it from the housing.

5. Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 423

(Continued)

Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)

The stop lamp is mounted on a bracket that extends upward

from th

e tailgate behind the spare tire. If service is needed,

obtain the LED Assembly from an authorized dealer.

1. Remove the spare tire.

2. Remo

ve the screws holding the tire carrier cover.

3. Remo

ve two screws from lamp assembly and disconnect

electr

ical connector.

License Plate Lamps

See an authorized dealer to replace these LED assemblies.

FUSES

General Information

The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive

current.

When a device does not work, you must check the fuse

ement

inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.

WARNING!

• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-

priate

replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the

original

fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of

higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with

metal wires or any other material. Failure to use proper

fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or

property damage.

• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is

off and that all the other services are switched off and/

or disengaged.

• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized

dealer.

• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag

system,

braking system), power unit systems (engine

system, gearbox system) or steering system blows,

contact an authorized dealer.

WARNING! (Continued)

424 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Also, please be aware that when using power outlets for

extended periods of time with the engine off may result in

vehicle battery discharge.

Blade Fuses

Power Distribution Center (PDC)

The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine

compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge

fuses, mini fuses, and relays. The PDC top cover is labelled

with each serviceable fuse/relay location, function, and size.

Power Distribution Center

1 — Fuse Element

2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element.

3 — Blade fuse with a NOT functional / BAD fuse element (blown fuse).

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

F01 – – Spare

F02 40 Amp Green – Starter

F03 – 5 Amp Tan Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 425

F04 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump MTR/FPCM

F05 – 5 Amp Tan Security Gateway

F06

–

– Spare

F07 – 15 Amp Blue Low Temp Radiator Cooling Pump (LTR) — If Equipped

F08 – 15 Amp Blue Trans Control Module TCM-8HP CYGNUS

F09 – – Spare

F10 – 15 Amp Blue

Key Ignition Node (KIN)/Radio Frequency Hub

(RF HUB)/Electric Steering Column Lock (ESCL)

F11 – 10 Amp Red UCI Port (USB & AUX)

F12 – 25 Amp Clear HIFI Amplifier

F13 – – Spare

F14 – – Spare

F15 – 15 Amp Blue

Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)/Switch Bank-Heavy

uty Ele

ctrical Pkg (SWITCH BANK-HD ELEC)

F16 – – Spare

F17 – – Spare

F18 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch (AC CLUTCH)

F19 – – Spare

F20 30 Amp Pink – Central Body Controller (CBC) 1-INTERIOR LIGHTS

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

426 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

F21 – 20 Amp Yellow REAR WIPER

F22 – 10 Amp Red

Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control

Module

(PCM)/Motor Generator Unit (MGU) WAKE

UP/Power Pack Unit (PPU) WAKE UP

F23 – 10 Amp Red

Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/Engine Control

odule

(ECM)

F24 – – Spare

F25 – 10 Amp Red Module Shift By Wire (MOD_SBW)

F26 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 2-EXTERIOR LIGHTS #1

F27 30 Amp Pink – Front Wipers

F28 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 3-POWER LOCKS

F29 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 4-EXTERIOR LIGHTS #2

F30 – – Spare

F31 – 10 Amp Red DIAGNOSTIC PORT

F32 – 10 Amp Red

Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning Mod (HVAC

TRL MO

D)/Steering Column Lock (SCL)/Occupant

Classification Module (OCM)/Driver Presence Detection

Module (DPDM)

F33 – 10 Amp Red

ParkTronics System (PTS)/Infrared Camera Module

(

IRCM)/A

irbag Disable Lamps (AIRBAG DISABLE

LMPS)

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 427

F34 – 10 Amp Red

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Electric Hydraulic

Power St

eering (EHPS)/Smart Bar Control Module

(SBCM) WAKE UP

F35 30 Amp Pink – BRAKE VAC PMP — If Equipped

F36 30 Amp Pink – TRAILER TOW MOD — If Equipped

F37 30 Amp Pink – TRAILER TOW CONN 7W — If Equipped

F38 20 Amp Blue – Engine Control Module ECM

F39 – – Spare

F40 – 15 Amp Blue

DriveTrain Control Module (DTCM)/Axle Lock (AXLE

OC) FT_

F41 – 15 Amp Blue

Instrument Cluster (IC)/Security GateWay (SGW)

WAKE UP

2 – 10 Amp Red

Power Control Relay Control Feed (Electric Stop/Start)/

Spare (

Belt Starter Generator) -- If Equipped

F43 - 20 Amp Yellow PWR OUTLET (CARGO) BATT

F44 – 10 Amp Red InfraRed Camera (IRCAM) HEATERS

F45 – 20 Amp Yellow PWR OUTLET (CARGO) IGN*

F46 – 10 Amp Red AUTO HDLP LVL MOD/LVL MTR/HDLP SW

F47 – – Spare

F48 – – Spare

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

428 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

F49 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller ORC

F50 – 10 Amp Red HD ACC — If Equipped

F51 – 10 Amp Red

Digital TV (DSRC)/USB/InSide RearView Mirror

(ISRVM)

/ Compass Module (CSGM)

F52 – 20 Amp Yellow CIGAR LTR

F53 – – Spare

F54 – – Spare

F55 – – Spare

F56 – 10 Amp Red IN-CAR TEMP SENSOR

F57 – 20 Amp Yellow Frt Drvr Htd Seat

F58 – 20 Amp Yellow Frt Pass Htd Seat

F59 – – Spare

F60 – 15 Amp Blue

Comfort Steering Wheel Module (CSWM) (HTD STR

HEEL)

F61 – 1

0 Amp Red

Left Blind Spot Sensor (LBSS)/Right Blind Spot Sensor

(RBSS)

F62 – – S

pare

F63 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

F64 – – Spare

F65 – – Spare

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 429

F66 40 Amp Green – HVAC BLOWER MTR FRT

F67 – – Spare

F68 – – Spare

F69 – 5 Amp Tan

Motor Generator Unit MGU Belt Starter Generator (BSG)

— If Eq

uipped

F70 – 25 Amp Clear INJ/IGN COIL (GAS)/GLO PLUG MOD (DSL)

F71 – – Spare

F72 – 10 Amp Red HD ELEC ACC PKG — If Equipped

F73 20 Amp Blue – PWR TOP LT

F74

20 Amp Blue

– PWR TOP RT

F75 – 10 Amp Red

Power Pack Unit - Battery Pack Control Module &

Auxilia

ry Power Module (PPU-BPCM & APM) Belt

Starter Generator (BSG) — If Equipped

F76 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM (GAS)/PCM (DSL)

F77 – 10 Amp Red HTD MIRRORS

F78 – 10 Amp Red COMP/INTRUSION/SIREN/INTRUSION SENSORS

F79 – 20 Amp Yellow SMART BAR CTRL MOD

F80 – 15 Amp Blue Powertrain Control Module (PCM)

F81 30 Amp Pink – REAR DEFROSTER (EBL)

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

430 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

F82 30 Amp Pink – FUEL HTR — If Equipped

F83 60 Amp Yellow –- GLOW PLUG — If Equipped

F84 30 Amp Pink – UREA HTR CTRL UNIT — If Equipped

F85 – 10 Amp Red PM SENSOR — If Equipped

F86 30 Amp Pink – BRAKE VAC PMP 2 — If Equipped

F87 – 10 Amp Red SUPPLY/PURGING PMP — If Equipped

F88 20 Amp Blue – NOx SENSOR #1/ #2 — IF Equipped

F89 – 10 Amp Red

Steering Column Control Module (SCCM)/ Cruise

ontrol

(CRUISE CTL)/Digital TV (DTV)

F90 20 Amp Blue – TRAILER TOW PARK LMP — If Equipped

F91 – 20 Amp Yellow HORN

F92 40 Amp Green – HD ACCY #2 — If Equipped

F93 40 Amp Green – HD ACCY #1 — If Equipped

F94 – 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)/RF Hub system (CORAX)

F95 – – Spare

F96 – 10 Amp Red PWR MIRROR SW

F97

–

20 Amp Yellow RADIO/TBM

F98 – 10 Amp Red SW BANK-HD ELEC/OFF ROAD

F99 – – Spare

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 431

* Customer can select to switch the Cargo Power Outlet from

F43 battery fed power to this position F45 which is fed when

the ignition in ON.

F100 30 Amp Pink – ESC-ECU & VALVES

F101 30 Amp Pink – DriveTrain Control Module (DTCM)

F102 – 15 Amp Blue DUAL USB PORT

F103 – 15 Amp Blue HD ACCY #3 — If Equipped

F104 – 15 Amp Blue PPU COOL PUMP — If Equipped

F105 – 10 Amp Red

Integrated Center Stack (ICS)/Heat Ventilation Air

Conditi

oning (HVAC)

F106 40 Amp Green – Electronic Speed Control (ESC)-PUMP MTR

F107 – 20 Amp Yellow TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN LT — If Equipped

F108 – 15 Amp Blue HD ACCY #4 — If Equipped

F109 – 20 Amp Yellow TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN RT — If Equipped

F110 30 Amp Pink – POWER INVERTER

F111 20 Amp Blue – TRAILER TOW BACKUP — If Equipped

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

432 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

CAUTION!

• When installing the power distribution center cover, it

is imp

ortant to ensure the cover is properly positioned

and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to

get into the power distribution center and possibly

result in an electrical system failure.

• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use

only a f

use having the correct amperage rating. The use

of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result

in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly

rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in

the circuit that must be corrected.

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle

close t

o moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to

avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack

or changing the wheel.

• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The

vehicle

could slip off the jack and fall on you. You

could be crushed. Never put any part of your body

under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get

under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where

it can be raised on a lift.

• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a

jack.

• T

he jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing

tires

only. The jack should not be used to lift the

vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be

jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slip

pery areas.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 433

Jack Location

The jack and lug wrench are located in the rear cargo area. To

remove jack and tools proceed as follows:

1. Lift the load floor in the cargo area.

Load Floor

OTE:

The load floor can be removed for easier access by pulling

the load

floor directly rearward.

2. Remove the hardware storage cover by pinching the latch

on the

left side and pulling upward.

Hardware Storage Cover Latch

434 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Jack And Lug Wrench

3. Turn the black plastic wing nut counterclockwise to

loosen

the jack from the storage bin.

Plastic Wing Nut Location

4. Remove tool kit and assemble tools.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 435

Spare Tire Removal

1. To remove the spare tire from the carrier, remove the tire

cover, if equipped.

2. Remove the Rear Camera Cover by turning the lock bolt

to the

left with the #T40 Torx head driver and ratchet

from the

supplied tool kit.

Unlock Rear Camera Cover

3. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench turning them

counter

clockwise. If equipped, remove the locking lug

nut with the lock key (located in the glove box) turning it

counterclockwise.

Stowing The Replaced Spare Tire

1. Mount the spare tire onto the carrier. Torque down lug

nuts an

d locking lug nut.

2. R

eturn the lock bolt to the lock position on the camera

over b

y turning the lock to the right using the provided

#T40

Torx head driver and ratchet. Then, reinstall the

camera c

over by slipping it over the camera/tire carrier

until it snaps into place.

3. Reinstall the tire cover if applicable.

NOTE:

you have added aftermarket accessories to the spare tire

ounted

carrier, it cannot exceed a gross weight of 85 lbs

(38.5 kg) including the weight of the spare tire.

436 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

(Continued)

Preparations For Jacking

1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery areas.

2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

3. Appl

y the parking brake.

4. Shif

t the automatic transmission into PARK, or a manual

transm

ission into REVERSE.

5. Turn the ignition OFF.

6. Bloc

k both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally

opposi

te the jacking position. For example, if the right

front wheel is being changed, block the left rear wheel.

NOTE:

Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the

ehicle

is being jacked.

Jacking Instructions

WARNING!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle

close to

moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to

avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the

wheel.

WARNING!

Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help

prevent

personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the

edge of

the roadway as possible before raising the

vehicle.

• Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.

• Block t

he wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be

raised

• Apply the parking brake firmly and shift an automatic

transm

ission in PARK; a manual transmission to

REVERSE.

• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack.

• Do not l

et anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack.

• Do not ge

t under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If you

need t

o get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service

center where it can be raised on a lift.

• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for

liftin

g this vehicle during a tire change.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 437

Jack Warning Label

1. Remove the spare tire, jack and tools from the stored location.

2. Loose

n (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by turning

them to

the left one turn while the wheel is still on the

ground.

3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools. Connect the jack

handle

driver to the extension, then to the lug wrench.

Assembled Jack And Tools

• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful

of motor t

raffic.

• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely

stowed,

spares must be stowed with the valve stem

facing the ground.

WARNING! (Continued)

CAUTION!

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on

locations

other than those indicated.

438 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

4. Operate the jack from the front or the rear of the vehicle.

Place the jack under the axle tube, as shown. Do not raise

the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.

Front Jacking Location

Rear Jacking Location

5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.

Raise t

he vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface

and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire.

Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.

WARNING!

Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the

vehicle l

ess stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt

someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to

remove the tire.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 439

6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.

7. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install

the lu

g nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the wheel.

Lightly tighten the lug nuts clockwise.

8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left,

and re

move the jack.

9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench

while t

ightening for increased leverage. Alternate nuts

until each nut has been tightened twice. Refer to “Torque

Specifications” in “Technical Specifications” for correct

lug nut torque.

10. Remove the jack assembly and wheel blocks.

11. Sec

ure the jack and tools in their proper locations.

12. Sec

ure the damaged wheel/tire on the spare tire carrier.

Torque

down lug nuts and locking lug nut.

13. Return the lock bolt to the lock position on the camera

cover

by turning the lock to the right using the provided

#40

Torx head driver and ratchet. Then, reinstall the

camera

cover by slipping it over the camera/tire carrier

until it snaps into place.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do

not tight

en the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has

been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result

in serious injury.

WARNING!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard

stop, cou

ld endanger the occupants of the vehicle.

Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the

places provided.

440 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Road Tire Installation

1. Mount the road tire on the axle.

2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end

of the

nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.

3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack

handle

counterclockwise.

4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench

while

at the end of the handle for increased leverage.

Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been

tightened twice. For the correct lug nut torque refer to

“Torque Specifications” in “Technical Specifications”. If in

doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with

a torque wrench by an authorized dealer or service station.

5. After 25 miles

(40 km), check the lug nut torque with a

torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly

seated against the wheel.

MANUAL PARK RELEASE

To push or tow the vehicle in cases where the transmission

will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery), a Manual

Park Release is available.

Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Remo

ve the manual park release cover, located above the

gear se

lector, to access the release tether strap.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do

not tight

en the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has

been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result

in serious injury.

WARNING!

Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the

parking

brake before activating the Manual Park

Release. In addition, you should be seated in the driver’s

seat with your foot firmly on the brake pedal when

activating the Manual Park Release. Activating the

Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away

if it is not secured by the parking brake, or by proper

connection to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park

Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious

injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 441

Manual Park Release Cover

3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, fish the tether

strap u

p through the opening in the console base.

Tether Strap

4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.

5. Pull the tether strap up and to the left until the release

lever l

ocks into place in the vertical position. The vehicle

is now out of PARK and can be moved. Release the

parking brake only when the vehicle is securely

connected to a tow vehicle.

442 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

To Reset The Manual Park Release:

1. Pull upward on the tether strap, releasing it from the

“locked

” position.

2. L

ower the Manual Park Release lever downward and to

he ri

ght, into its original position.

3. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console, and

reinst

all the cover.

JUMP STARTING

If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump

started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another

vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump

starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please

follow the procedures in this section carefully.

NOTE:

When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the

anufac

turer's operating instructions and precautions.

WARNING!

Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It

could ru

pture or explode and cause personal injury.

CAUTION!

Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other

ooster

source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or

damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical

system may occur.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 443

Preparations For Jump Start

Supplemental Battery — If Equipped

WARNING!

• Only use the positive battery post on the main battery

to jump

start your vehicle. Serious injury or death

could result if you attempt to jump start using the

supplemental battery.

• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or

sparks

away from the battery. Do not use a booster

battery or any other booster source with an output

greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to

touch each other.

• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain

lead an

d lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.

• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the

vehicle,

disconnect both vehicle battery cables before

connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast

charger” to provide starting.

444 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

The battery in your vehicle is located in the right rear of the

engine compartment, behind the Power Distribution Center.

Positive Battery Post

NOTE:

The positive battery post is covered with a protective cap.

ift up

on the cap to gain access to the post.

If your vehicle is equipped with a Stop/Start system, it will

be equip

ped with two batteries. Refer to “Stop/Start System

— If Equipped” in “Starting and Operating” for further

information.

1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmis-

sion in

to PARK (manual transmission in NEUTRAL) and

turn the

ignition OFF.

2. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmis-

sion in

to PARK and turn the ignition OFF.

3. T

urn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical

accesso

ries.

4. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park the

vehicle

within the jumper cable’s reach, apply the

parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!

• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever

the hood

is raised. It can start anytime the ignition

switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades.

• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands

and bra

celets that could make an inadvertent electrical

contact. You could be seriously injured.

• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin

or eyes a

nd generate hydrogen gas which is flammable

and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from

the battery.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 445

Jump Starting Procedure

NOTE:

Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper cables are

not con

tacting each other or either vehicle while making

connections.

Connecting The Jumper Cables

1. Connect the positive (+) end

of the jumper cable to the

remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.

2. C

onnect the opposite end of the positive (

+) jump

er cable

to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

3. Connect the negative end (-) of

the jumper cable to the

negative (-) post of the booster battery.

4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jum

per cable

to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the

discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and

the fuel injection system.

WARNING!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could

establi

sh a ground connection and personal injury could

result.

WARNING!

Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could

result

in personal injury or property damage due to

battery explosion.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these procedures could result in

damage t

o the charging system of the booster vehicle or

the discharged vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post

of the d

ischarged battery. The resulting electrical spark

could cause the battery to explode and could result in

personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do

not use any other exposed metal parts.

446 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery,

let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the

engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.

6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in

the re

verse sequence:

Disconnecting The Jumper Cables

1. Disconnect the negative (-) end

of the jumper cable from

the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged

battery.

2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jum

per

cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

3. Disconnect the positive (+) end

of the jumper cable from

the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jump

cable from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged

vehicle.

5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive (+)

post

of the discharged vehicle.

If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you

should

have the battery and charging system tested at an

authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

Do not run the booster vehicle engine above 2,000 rpm

since i

t provides no charging benefit, wastes fuel, and

can damage booster vehicle engine.

CAUTION!

Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw

power fr

om the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use

(i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long

enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery

will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or

prevent the engine from starting.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 447

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

In any of the following situations, you can reduce the poten-

tial for overheating by taking the appropriate action.

• O

n the highways — slow down.

• In cit

y traffic — while stopped, shift transmission into

NEUTRA

L, but do not increase engine idle speed.

NOTE:

There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending

verhea

t condition:

• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C

system

adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning

the A/C off can help remove this heat.

• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum

heat,

the mode control to floor and the blower control to

high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to

the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine

cooling system.

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can

often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering

wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels.

For vehicles with automatic transmission, push and hold the

lock button on the gear selector. Then, shift back and forth

between DRIVE and REVERSE (with automatic transmission)

or SECOND GEAR and REVERSE (with manual transmission),

while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of

accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking

motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your

vehicle.

If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull

over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air

conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into

the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT (H),

and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off

immediately and call for service.

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant

(antifr

eeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or

hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the

hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to

open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or

coolant bottle is hot.

448 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

NOTE:

• For vehicles with automatic transmission: Shifts between

DRIVE

and REVERSE can only be achieved at wheel

speeds of 5

mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmis-

sion remains in NEUTRAL for more than 2 seconds, you

must pr

ess the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.

• Push the “ESC Off” switch to place the Electronic Stability

Contro

l (ESC) system in “Partial Off” mode before rocking

the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in

“Safety” for further information. Once the vehicle has been

freed, push the “ESC Off” switch again to restore “ESC

On” mode.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated

by exces

sive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even

failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and

injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster

than 30

mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds

continuou

sly without stopping when you are stuck and

do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what

the speed.

CAUTION!

• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to

transm

ission overheating and failure. Allow the engine

to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least

one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This

will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of clutch

or transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free

a stuck vehicle.

• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between

DRIVE/

SECOND GEAR and REVERSE, do not spin

the wheels faster than 15

mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain

damage m

ay result.

• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may

lead t

o transmission overheating and failure. It can also

damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30

mph

(48 km/h

) while in gear (no transmission shifting occur-

ring).

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 449

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmission and

drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under “Recreational Towing” in the “Starting And

Operating” section.

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent

damage t

o your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equip-

ment designed for this purpose, following equipment manu-

facturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.

ttach

a tow bar or other towing device to main structural

members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated

brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow

must be observed.

If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)

while be

ing towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN

position, not the ACC position.

If the vehicle's battery is discharged, refer to “Manual Park

Release

” in this section for instructions on shifting the auto-

matic transmission out of PARK in order to move the vehicle.

Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground 4WD MODELS

Flat Tow NONE

See instructions under “Recreational Towing” in

“

Starti

ng And Operating”.

• Automatic Transmission in PARK

• Man

ual Transmission in gear ( NOT in N

EUTRAL)

• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL

•

Tow in forward direct

ion

Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow

Front NOT ALLOWED

Rear NOT ALLOWED

Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD

450 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Four–Wheel Drive Models

The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFF

the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a

flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite

end on a towing dolly.

If flatbed equipment is not available and the transfer case is

operabl

e, the vehicle may be towed (in the forward direction,

with ALL wheels on the ground), IF the transfer case is in

NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission is in PARK (for auto

matic transmissions) or in gear (N

OT in NE

UTRAL, for

manual transmissions). Refer to “Recreational Towing” in

“Starting And Operating” for detailed instructions.

Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped

If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, they are

mounted in the front and the rear.

NOTE:

For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use both of the

ront t

ow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the

vehicle. Always use an appropriately rated tow strap.

CAUTION!

• D

o not use sling type equipment when towing. Vehicle

damage

may occur.

• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not

attach

to front or rear suspension components. Damage

to your vehicle may result from improper towing.

CAUTION!

• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the

remain

ing wheels are on the ground). Internal damage

to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front

or rear wheel lift is used when towing.

• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-

ments

can cause severe transmission and/or transfer

case da

mage. Damage from improper towing is not

covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 451

ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS)

This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident

Response System.

Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for

further

information on the Enhanced Accident Response

System (EARS) function.

EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR).

The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that will assist

in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed under

certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag

deployment or hitting a road obstacle.

Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for

further

information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).

WARNING!

• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains

may bre

ak, causing serious injury or death.

• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks.

Tow str

aps may become disengaged, causing serious

injury.

CAUTION!

Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a

vehicle

stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for tow

truck hookup or highway towing. You could damage

your vehicle. Tow straps are recommended when towing

the vehicle, chains may cause vehicle damage.

452

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING

Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator

system. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it

is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.

Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator

message

will illuminate. This means that service is required for

your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips,

trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will influ

ence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message is

isplay

ed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil

message to illuminate as early as 3,500

miles (5,600 km) since last

reset.

Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the

next 500

miles (805 km).

On vehicles equipped with instrument cluster display, “Oil

Change R

equired” will be displayed and a single chime will

sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.

On non-instrument cluster display equipped vehicles,

“Change

Oil” will flash in the instrument cluster odometer

and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change

is necessary.

An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator

message

after completing the scheduled oil change. If a

scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than an

authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to

the steps described under “Instrument Cluster Display” in

“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further infor

mation.

NOTE:

Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed

0,000 m

iles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350 hours of

engine r

un time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of

engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet

customers.

Severe Duty All Models

Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of

engine r

un time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off

road environment or is operated predominately at idle or

only very low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is

considered Severe Duty.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 453

Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:

• Check engine oil level

• Check wi

ndshield washer fluid level

• Check t

he tire inflation pressures and look for unusual

wear or

damage, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear

• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake

master

cylinder, and power steering, and fill as needed

• Check function of all interior and exterior lights

Maintenance Plan

Required Maintenance Intervals

Refer to the maintenance plan on the following pages for the

require

d maintenance intervals.

At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:

• C

hange oil and filter

• Rotate

the tires

• Rotate

at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on

• Inspec

t battery and clean and tighten terminals as required

• Inspec

t brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake

• Inspec

t engine cooling system protection and hoses

• Inspec

t exhaust system

• Inspec

t engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions

• Inspec

t all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary.

454 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Mileage or time passed

(whichever comes first)

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,

000

60,000

70,

000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,

000

96,000

112,

000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Additional Inspections

Inspect the CV/Universal joints.

X X X X X X X

Inspect front suspension, tie rod

ds, an

d replace if necessary.

X X X X X X X

Inspect the front and rear axle

fluid.

X X X X

spect the brake linings, replace

as necess

ary

X X X X X X X

Adjust parking brake on vehicles

equipped

with four wheel disc

brakes.

X X X X X X X

Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X

Additional Maintenance

Replace engine air cleaner filter.

X X X X X

Replace air conditioning/cabin

air fil

ter.

X X X X X X X

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 455

Replace Spark Plugs –

2.0L Engine

X X

Replace spark plugs –

3.6L Engine

Flush and replace the engine,

intercoo

ler (if equipped), battery

(if equipped), and Motor

Generator Unit (MGU) (if

equipped) coolant at 10 years or

150,000

miles (240,000 km)

whichever

comes first.

X X

Mileage or time passed

(whichever comes first)

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

456 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Change the manual transmission

fluid if using your vehicle for

any of the following: trailer

towing, snow plowing, heavy

loading, taxi, police, delivery

service (commercial service),

off-road, desert operation or

more than 50% of your driving is

at sustained high speeds during

hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).

X X X X X

Change transfer case fluid if

using you

r vehicle for any of

the following: police, taxi, fleet,

or frequent trailer towing.

X X

Inspect and replace PCV valve

if nece

ssary.

Mileage or time passed

(whichever comes first)

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 457

Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle

Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of

engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off

road environment or is operated predominately at idle or

only very low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is

considered Severe Duty.

Change front and rear axle

fluid i

f using your vehicle for

police, taxi, fleet, off-road or

frequent trailer towing.

X X X

1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.

2. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.

Mileage or time passed

(whichever comes first)

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

WARNING!

• You can be badly injured working on or around a motor

vehicle

. Do only service work for which you have the

knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any

doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take

your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could

result

in a component malfunction and effect vehicle

handling and performance. This could cause an accident.

458 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

2.0L Engine

1 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Power Pack Unit Pressure Cap — If Equipped

2 — Battery 9 — Power Pack Unit Pressure Reservoir — If Equipped

3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

4 — Engine Oil Fill

11 — Intercooler/Motor Generator Unit Coolant Pressure Cap — If Equipped

5 — Engine Coolant Reservoir

12 — Intercooler/Motor Generator Unit Coolant Reservoir — If Equipped

6 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 13 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir

7 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 14 — Engine Air Cleaner

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 459

3.6L Engine

1 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Power Pack Unit Pressure Cap — If Equipped

2 — Battery 9 — Power Pack Unit Pressure Reservoir — If Equipped

3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

4 — Engine Oil Fill 11 — Motor Generator Unit Coolant Pressure Cap — If Equipped

5 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 12 — Motor Generator Unit Coolant Reservoir — If Equipped

6 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 13 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir

7 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 14 — Engine Air Cleaner

460 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Checking Oil Level

To ensure proper lubrication of your vehicle's engine, the

engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. The engine

oil level should be checked five minutes after a warmed up

engine has been shut off.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will

improve

the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always main-

tain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick.

dding 1

quart (0.95 liters) of oil when the reading is at the

bottom of the crosshatch zone will result in a reading at the

top of the crosshatch zone on these engines.

Adding Washer Fluid

The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear

window washer (if equipped) is shared. The fluid reservoir

is located in the engine compartment. Be sure to check the

fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with wind

shield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). When

efilli

ng the washer fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid

and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper

blades; this will help blade performance.

To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in

cold wea

ther, select a solution or mixture that meets or

exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating

information can be found on most washer fluid containers.

CAUTION!

Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause

eration

or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your

engine.

WARNING!

Commercial windshield washer solvents are flammable.

They coul

d ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised

when filling or working around the washer solution.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 461

(Continued)

Maintenance-Free Battery

Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.

You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainte-

nance required.

WARNING!

• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn

or even

blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact

your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery

when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on

skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of

water. Refer to “Jump Starting Procedure” in “In Case

Of Emergency” for further information.

• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or

sparks

away from the battery. Do not use a booster

battery or any other booster source with an output

greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to

touch each other.

• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain

lead a

nd lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.

• Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be equipped

with t

wo batteries. Bot the main and the supplemental

batteries must be disconnected to completely de-ener

gize the 12 volt electrical system.

• Serious injury or death could result if you do not

disconnect both batteries. To learn how to properly

disconnect, see your authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

• It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery

that t

he positive cable is attached to the positive post and

the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery

posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are

identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be

tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion.

• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the

vehicle

, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before

connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast

charger” to provide starting voltage.

• Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be equipped

with t

wo batteries. Both the main and the supplemental

batteries must be disconnected to completely de-ener

gize the 12 volt electrical system.

• I

f the negative battery cables are not isolated properly it

can ca

use a potential power spike or surge in the system,

resulting in damage to essential electrical components.

WARNING! (Continued)

462 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

DEALER SERVICE

An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,

special tools, and equipment to perform all service opera-

tions in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available

ich in

clude detailed service information for your vehicle.

Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any proce

dure yourself.

NOTE:

Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may

oid you

r warranty and could result in civil penalties being

assessed against you.

Engine Oil

Change Engine Oil — Gasoline Engine

Refer to “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper

mainten

ance intervals.

NOTE:

Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed

0,000 m

iles (16,000 km), 12 months or 350 hours of engine

run tim

e, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run

or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers.

Engine Oil Selection — 2.0L Engine

For best performance and maximum protection under all

types of

operating conditions, the manufacturer only recom-

mend engine oils that are API SN PLUS certified and meet

he req

uirements of FCA Material Standard MS-13340. An

equivalent full synthetic engine oil can be used if it meets

API SN PLUS Certification. If SN PLUS or equivalent oil is

unavailable then please contact your local dealership for

recommendation.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor

vehicle.

Only do service work for which you have the

knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any

doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take

your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 463

Engine Oil Selection 3.6L Engine

For best performance and maximum protection under all

types of

operating conditions, the manufacturer only recom-

mends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the

equire

ments of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.

American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil

tification

Symbol

This symbol means that the oil has been certified by

the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manu-

facturer only recommends API Certified engine oils.

This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and

0W-30

engine oils.

Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.0L Engine

Mopar

API SN PLUS Certified SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic

Engine O

il which meets the requirements of FCA Material

Standard MS-13340 is recommended for all operating

temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature

starting and vehicle fuel economy.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine

oil vis

cosity for your engine. For information on engine oil

filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illus

tration in this section.

Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifica-

tion mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number

hould

not be used.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the

hemica

ls can damage your engine. Such damage is not

covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

CAUTION!

Failure to use the recommended SN PLUS or equivalent

oil can

cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle

warranty.

464 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.6L Engine

Mopar SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material

Standar

d MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equiva-

lent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This

ngine o

il improves low temperature starting and vehicle

fuel economy.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine

oil vis

cosity for your engine. For information on engine oil

filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illus

tration in this section.

Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifica-

tion mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number

hould

not be used.

Synthetic Engine Oils

You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-

mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-

mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are

ollowed

Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil

certifi

cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade

number should not be used.

Materials Added To Engine Oil

The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-

tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the

ngine o

il. Engine oil is an engineered product and its perfor-

mance may be impaired by supplemental additives.

Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters

Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil

ilters

from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscrimi-

nately discarded, can present a problem to the environment.

ontact

an authorized dealer, service station or govern-

mental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil

ilters

can be safely discarded in your area.

Engine Oil Filter

The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at

every engine oil change.

Engine Oil Filter Selection

This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow type disposable oil

ilter.

Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of

replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters

should be used to assure most efficient service. Mopar engine oil

filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 465

Engine Air Cleaner Filter

Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper

maintenance intervals.

NOTE:

Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions” maintenance

nterval

if applicable.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection

The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies

consider

ably. Only high quality filters should be used to

assure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner filters

are a high quality filter and are recommended.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and Replacement —

Gasoline Engine

llow the recommended maintenance intervals as shown in

the Main

tenance Schedule in this section.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal

1. L

oosen the retainers from the air cleaner cover using a

uitabl

e tool.

Air Cleaner Filter Cover

WARNING!

The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can

provide a

measure of protection in the case of engine

backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air

cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for

repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the

engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the

air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed.

Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury.

1 — Retainers

2 — Air Filter Cover

466 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

2. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter.

Air Cleaner Filter Cover

3. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing

assembl

Air Cleaner Filter

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation

NOTE:

Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is present

before r

eplacing the air filter element.

1. I

nstall the air cleaner filter element into the housing

ssembl

y with the air cleaner filter inspection surface

facing downward.

2. Tighten air cleaner cover retainers using a suitable tool.

1 — Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface

2 — Air Cleaner Filter

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 467

Accessory Drive Belt Inspection

When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that run

across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are considered

normal. These are not a reason to replace belt. However,

cracks running along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any

belt with cracks running along a rib must be replaced. Also

have the belt replaced if it has excessive wear, frayed cords

or severe glazing.

Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)

Conditions that would require replacement:

• R

ib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt body)

• Rib or

belt wear

• Longitud

inal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)

• Belt sl

ips

• “Groove

jumping" (belt does not maintain correct position

on pull

ey)

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt with

vehicle

running.

• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-

nect th

e fan motor lead. The fan is temperature

controlled

and can start at any time regardless of igni-

tion mode. You could be injured by the moving fan

lades.

• Y

ou can be badly injured working on or around a motor

vehicle.

Only do service work for which you have the

knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any

doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take

your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

468 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

• Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before new

belt is installed)

• Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is heard or

felt wh

ile drive belt is in operation)

Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such

as a be

lt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected for

damage and proper alignment.

Belt replacement on some models requires the use of special

tools,

we recommend having your vehicle serviced at an

authorized dealer.

Air Conditioner Maintenance

For best possible performance, your air conditioner should

be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start

of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of

the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension

should also be checked at this time.

WARNING!

• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants

approved

by the manufacturer for your air condi-

tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are

lammab

le and can explode, injuring you. Other unap-

proved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system

o fail,

requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Infor-

mation Book, located in your owner’s information kit,

or furt

her warranty information.

• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under

high pr

essure. To avoid risk of personal injury or

damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair

requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by

an experienced technician.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning

system a

s the chemicals can damage your air

conditioning components. Such damage is not covered

by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 469

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-134a — If

Equipped

R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon

(HFC) th

at is an ozone-friendly substance. The manufacturer

recommends that air conditioning service be performed by

an authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery

and recycling equipment.

NOTE:

Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG

compres

sor oil and refrigerants.

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — R–1234yf

R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluo-

roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental

rotect

ion Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with a

low global-warming potential. The manufacturer recom

mends that air conditioning service be performed by an

authori

zed dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE:

Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG

ompres

sor oil, and refrigerants.

Air Conditioning Filter Replacement (A/C Air Filter)

The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the

glove co

mpartment. Perform the following procedure to

replace the filter:

1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.

WARNING!

Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is

running

, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN

mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the blower

operating, the blower can contact hands and may propel

dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in personal

injury.

470 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

2. Push up on the glove compartment travel stop and lower

the door.

Glove Compartment Travel Stop

3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.

4. Disen

gage the two retaining tabs that secure the air filter

access

door to the HVAC housing.

Air Filter Retaining Tabs

5. Remove the air filter from the HVAC air inlet housing.

Pull th

e filter elements out pinching them to the right for

clearance.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 471

Air Filter

6. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position indica-

tors po

inting in the same direction as removal.

7. Close A/C Air Filter access door and secure retaining

tabs.

8. R

otate the glove compartment door back into position

ensurin

g you have properly engaged the travel damper.

Travel Dampener

Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper

aintena

nce intervals.

CAUTION!

The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate

airflow d

irection through the filter. Failure to properly

install the filter will result in the need to replace it more

often.

1 — Travel Dampener Housing

2 — Travel Dampener Rod

472 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Body Lubrication

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat

tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate,

decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated

periodically with a lithium based grease, such as Mopar Spray

White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect

against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant,

the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and

grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.

Particular attention should also be given to hood latching

components to ensure proper function. When performing other

underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and

safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year,

prefera

bly in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small amount of a

high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubri

cant directly into the lock cylinder.

Windshield Wiper Blades

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the wind-

shield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild

nonabra

sive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt

or road film.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may

cause d

eterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer

fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry

windshield.

Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the

windshie

ld. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petro-

leum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

NOTE:

Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on

ographi

cal area and frequency of use. Poor performance of

blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or

wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the

wiper blades or replace as necessary.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 473

The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected peri-

odically, not just when wiper performance problems are

experien

ced. This inspection should include the following

points:

• Wear or uneven edges

• Foreign m

aterial

• Hardeni

ng or cracking

• Deforma

tion or fatigue

If a wip

er blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the

affected

wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not attempt

to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.

Wiper Blade Removal/Installation

1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the glass,

until t

he wiper arm is in the full up position.

Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position

CAUTION!

Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the

ass wit

hout the wiper blade in place or the glass may

be damaged.

1 — Wiper Blade

2 — Cover

3 — Wiper Arm

4 — Release Tab

474 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, raise

the cover, press the release tab on the wiper blade and

while holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the

wiper blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.

Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position

3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper

blade from the wiper arm.

4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.

Install

ing The Front Wipers

1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm is

in the

full up position.

2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the

wiper ar

3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the opening

in the

wiper blade.

4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm,

latch e

ngagement will be accompanied by an audible

click then close the cover.

5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.

1 — Wiper Blade

2 — Wiper Arm J Hook

3 — J Hook Retainer

4 — Cover

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 475

Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation

1. Open tailgate to access the wiper arm.

Rear Wi

per Assembly

2. Lift wiper arm off of the glass and rotate wiper blade

outward

to disengage the wiper blade from the wiper

arm.

Wiper Blade And Wiper Arm

1 — Wiper Arm

2 — Wiper Blade

1 — Wiper Arm

2 — Wiper Blade

476 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

(Continued)

3. Gently set the arm on the glass.

Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm

Installing The Rear Wiper

1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass.

2. Inser

t the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on the

end of the wiper arm and rotate the wiper in to place.

3. Place with wiper on the glass and close the tail gate.

Exhaust System

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the

vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust

system.

If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or

if the e

xhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or

when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have

an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust

system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, dete

riorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose

connecti

ons could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the

passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust

system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrica

tion or oil change. Replace as required.

1 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin

2 — Wiper Arm Receptacle

WARNING!

• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon

monoxide

(CO), which is colorless and odorless.

Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventu

ally poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to “Safety

Tips” in

“Safety” for further information.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 477

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter

will not require maintenance. However, it is important to

keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst

operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.

NOTE:

Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can

esult

in civil penalties being assessed against you.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning

engine o

peration, a scorching odor may suggest severe and

abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the

vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,

including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should

be obtained immediately.

To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:

• D

o not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in

gear an

d the vehicle is in motion.

• Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the

vehicl

• Do not idle the engine with any ignition components

discon

nected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing,

or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or

malfunctioning operating conditions.

• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over

materi

als that can burn. Such materials might be grass

or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system.

Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your

exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.

CAUTION!

• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded

fuel on

ly. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-

ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and

ay seri

ously reduce engine performance and cause

serious damage to the engine.

• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your

vehicle

is not kept in proper operating condition. In the

event of engine malfunction, particularly involving

engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance,

have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued opera

tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could

cause t

he converter to overheat, resulting in possible

damage to the converter and vehicle.

WARNING! (Continued)

478 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Cooling System

Coolant Checks

Check the engine, battery (if equipped), intercooler (if

equippe

d), and Motor Generator Unit (MGU) (if equipped)

coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12

months (before the

onset o

f freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine,

battery (if equipped), intercooler (if equipped), and MGU (if

equipped) coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in appear

ance, the system should be drained, flushed and refilled with

resh O

AT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an autho-

rized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser (if

quippe

d) or radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,

etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden

hose vertically down the face of the A/C condenser (if

equipped) or the back of the radiator core.

Check the engine, battery (if equipped), intercooler (if

equippe

d), and MGU (if equipped) cooling system hoses for

brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the

connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator.

Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE

COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING

SYSTEM IS HOT.

WARNING!

• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine

coolant

(antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you

see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not

open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.

Never open a cooling system pressure cap when the

radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from the

radiat

or cooling fan when the hood is raised. The fan

starts automatically and may start at any time, whether

the engine is running or not.

• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-

nect t

he fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the OFF

mode. Th

e fan is temperature controlled and can start at

any time the ignition is in the ON mode.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 479

Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill

NOTE:

Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly.

Failure

to fill these systems properly could lead to severe

internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added

to the system please contact an authorized dealer.

If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible

sedimen

t, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with

OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).

Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper

mainten

ance intervals.

Selection Of Coolant

Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica-

tions” for further information.

NOTE:

• M

ixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified

Organic

Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (anti-

freeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease

orrosi

on protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT)

engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with

Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine

coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant

(antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is

introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the

cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and

refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032),

by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant

(antif

reeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors

or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with

the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.

• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene

glycol-b

ased engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene

glycolbased engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom

mended.

• S

ome vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-

erly. Fa

ilure to fill these systems properly could lead to

severe

internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to

be added to the system please contact an authorized

dealer.

480 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Adding Coolant

Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant

(OAT co

olant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended

maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can

be used up to ten years or 150,000

miles (240,000 km) before

replace

ment. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-

nance period, it is important that you use the same engine

oolant

(OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout

the life of your vehicle.

Please review these recommendations for using Organic

Additiv

e Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) that

meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.

When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):

• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/

150,00

0 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive

Technol

ogy) that meets the requirements of FCA Material

Standard MS.90032.

• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant that

meets

the requirements of FCA Material Standard

MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations

(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)

are anticipated. Please contact an authorized dealer for

assistance.

• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized

water wh

en mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze)

solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the

amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling

system.

NOTE:

• It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper level

of pro

tection against freezing according to the tempera-

tures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated.

• S

ome vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-

erly. Fa

ilure to fill these systems properly could lead to

severe

internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to

be added to the system, please contact a local authorized

dealer.

• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-

mended

and can result in cooling system damage. If

HOAT an

d OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have

a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT

coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 481

Cooling System Pressure Cap

The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine

coolant

(antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant (anti-

freeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant expansion

ottle/r

ecovery tank if so equipped.

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accu-

mulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

Disposal Of Used Coolant

Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a regu-

lated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your

ocal a

uthorities to determine the disposal rules for your

community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do

not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers or

allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a

child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean

up any ground spills immediately.

Coolant Level

The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for deter-

mining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine OFF

and col

d, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the

bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no

need to

remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap unless

checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or

replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As

long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the

coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.

WARNING!

• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add

engine

coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-

heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an over-

heated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the

ooling sys

tem. To prevent scalding or injury, do not

remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or

under pressure.

• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified

for your

vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may

result.

482 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to

maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the

requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 should be

added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.

Engine Coolant Level — 2.0L

With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant

should be within the OK range between the ADD and FULL

range on the dipstick.

1. Remove the cap with level dipstick from the engine

coolan

t bottle.

2. C

lean off the coolant from the dipstick.

. Rest

the cap on the opening of the coolant bottle without

tighten

ing the cap.

4. Remove the cap with dipstick and check the coolant level

on the

dipstick.

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no

need to

remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap unless

checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or

replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this. As

long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the

coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.

When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to

maintai

n the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the

requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 should be

added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.

WARNING!

• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add

engine

coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-

heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an over-

heated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the

ooling sys

tem. To prevent scalding or injury, do not

remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or

under pressure.

• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified

for your

vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may

result.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 483

Points To Remember

NOTE:

When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilometers of

operati

on, you may observe vapor coming from the front of

the engine compartment. This is normally a result of mois

ture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the

radiato

r and being vaporized when the thermostat opens,

allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.

If an examination of your engine compartment shows no

evidenc

e of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely

driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.

• Check t

he coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the

coolan

t expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)

needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion

bottle must also be protected against freezing.

• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are

requir

ed, the cooling system should be pressure tested for

leaks.

• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a

minimu

m of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032)

and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your

engine which contains aluminum components.

• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow

hoses

are not kinked or obstructed.

• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is

equipp

ed with air conditioning, keep the front of the

condenser clean.

• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter oper-

ation.

If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the

correct

type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsat-

isfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor

s mile

age, and increased emissions.

484 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

(Continued)

Brake System

In order to assure brake system performance, all brake

system components should be inspected periodically. Refer

to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper

maintenance intervals.

Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder

The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked when-

ever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the brake system

warning

light is on. If necessary, add fluid to bring level within

the designated marks on the side of the reservoir of the brake

master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder

area before removing cap. With disc brakes, fluid level can be

expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level

should be checked when pads are replaced. If the brake fluid is

abnormally low, check the system for leaks.

Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica-

tions” for further information.

WARNING!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly

a collis

ion. Driving with your foot resting or riding on

the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake

temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake

damage. You would not have your full braking capacity

in an emergency.

WARNING!

• Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid.

Refer

to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Speci-

fications” for further information. Using the wrong

ype of b

rake fluid can severely damage your brake

system and/or impair its performance. The proper type

of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the

original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder

reservoir.

• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-

ture,

use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in

a tightl

y closed container. Keep the master cylinder

reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open

container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a

lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpect

edly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in

sudden

brake failure. This could result in a collision.

• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in

spilli

ng brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the

brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage

painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to

avoid its contact with these surfaces.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 485

Front/Rear Axle Fluid

For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not

required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the

exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected. If

gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer to

“Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for

further information.

Fluid Level Check

Lubricant should be approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm) below

the bot

tom edge of the oil fill hole.

NOTE:

Make sure that the vehicle is level and supported by the axles

Adding Fluid

Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level spec-

ified above.

Selection Of Lubricant

Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid. Refer to

“

Fluids

And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for

further information.

Transfer Case

Selection Of Lubricant

Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid. Refer to

“Fluids

And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for

further information.

• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the

brake

fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged,

causing partial or complete brake failure. This could

result in a collision.

WARNING! (Continued)

486 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Fluid Level Check

The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill hole

(A) when

the vehicle is in a level position.

Transfer Case

Drain And Refill

Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper

maintena

nce intervals.

Manual Transmission

Selection Of Lubricant

Use only manufacturer's recommended manual transmis-

sion fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical

Specific

ations” for further information.

Fluid Level Check

Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid

evel sh

ould be between the bottom of the fill hole and a

point not more than 3/16 of an inch (4.76

mm) below the

bottom o

f the hole.

Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.

Frequency Of Fluid Change

Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the

actory wi

ll give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the

vehicle. If the fluid becomes contaminated with water, it

should be changed immediately. Otherwise, change the fluid

as recommended in the Maintenance Plan. Refer to the

“Maintenance Plan” for the proper maintenance intervals.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 487

Automatic Transmission

Selection Of Lubricant

It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure

optimum

transmission performance and life. Use only the

manufacturer's specified transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids

And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for fluid spec

ifications. It is important to maintain the transmission fluid

t the

correct level using the recommended fluid.

NOTE:

No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission;

nly the

approved lubricant should be used.

Special Additives

The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any

special

additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmis-

sion Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its perfor-

mance may be impaired by supplemental additives.

herefo

re, do not add any fluid additives to the transmis-

sion. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may

dverse

ly affect seals.

CAUTION!

Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s

recomme

nded fluid may cause deterioration in transmission

shift quality and/or torque converter shudder. Refer to “Fluids

And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for fluid

specifications.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the

chemica

ls can damage your transmission components. Such

damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

488 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Fluid Level Check

The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require

adjustm

ent under normal operating conditions. Routine

fluid level checks are not required; therefore the transmis

sion has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your

transmi

ssion fluid level using special service tools. If you

notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit an

authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission

fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper

fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.

Fluid And Filter Changes

Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory

will pr

ovide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle.

Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,

ange t

he fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated

(with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for

any reason.

RAISING THE VEHICLE

In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to an

authorized dealer or service station.

TIRES

Tire Safety Information

Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following infor-

mation: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers, Tire Termi-

nology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.

CAUTION!

If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized

ealer

immediately. Severe transmission damage may

occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust

the fluid level accurately.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 489

Tire Markings

NOTE:

• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design

standar

ds. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded into

the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:

P215/65R15 95H.

• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European

design s

tandards. Tires designed to this standard have the

tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the

section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size

designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.

design s

tandards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires

is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters “LT”

that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size desig

nation. Example: LT235/85R16.

• T

emporary spare tires are designed for temporary emer-

gency use

only. Temporary high pressure compact spare

tires ha

ve the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall

preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18

103M.

• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards

and it

begins with the tire diameter molded into the side-

wall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

1 — U.S. DOT Safety

Standards Code (TIN)

4 — Maximum Load

2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure

3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction

and Temp

erature Grades

490 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:

Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT

= Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or

"....b

lank...." = Passe

nger car tire based on European design standards, or

LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or

T or S =

Temporary spare tire or

31 = Over

all diameter in inches (in)

215, 2

35, 145 = Secti

on width in millimeters (mm)

65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)

• Ratio

of section height to section width of tire, or

10.5 = S

ection width in inches (in)

R = Construction code

•

"R" me

ans radial construction, or

• "D" me

ans diagonal or bias construction

15, 16

, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

Service

Description:

= Load Index

• A nume

rical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 491

H = Speed Symbol

• A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain oper-

ating c

onditions

• T

he maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions

(i.e.,

tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)

Load Identification:

Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:

• X

L = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or

• LL = Light load tire or

• C,

E, F, G = Load

range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

Maximum Load – Maxi

mum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure – Maxi

mum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

EXAMPLE:

492 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white side-

walls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the

outboar

d side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will

find it on the inboard side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT = Department of Transportation

• This s

ymbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is

approv

ed for highway use

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9 = Code

representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD = C

ode used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03 = Numb

er representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

• 03 means the 3rd week

01 = N

umber representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

• 01 means the year 2001

• Pri

or to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was

manufa

ctured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 493

Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition

B-Pillar

The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind

he fro

nt door.

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle

has not

been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile

(1.6 km)

after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is

measure

d in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).

Maximum Inflation Pressure

The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire

nflati

on pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is

molded into the sidewall.

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as

hown on

the tire placard.

Tire Placard

A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s

oading

capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended

cold tire inflation pressures.

494 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

NOTE:

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the

driver’s

side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side

door.

Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the spare

tire (if

equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the recom-

mended pressure for your vehicle.

Example Tire Placard Location (Door)

Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 495

Tire And Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about the:

1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.

2. Tota

l weight your vehicle can carry.

3. Tire

size designed for your vehicle.

4. Cold

tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare

tires.

oading

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the

load ca

rrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will

not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to

the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pres

sures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard

n “Veh

icle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating”

section of this manual.

NOTE:

Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle

weight ra

tings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not

be exceeded.

For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and

trailer

towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting

And Operating” section of this manual.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your

vehicle

, locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-

pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on

he Tir

e and Loading Information placard. The combined

weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue

weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight refer

enced here.

496 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—

(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-

pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.”

on your

vehicle's placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and

passeng

ers that will be riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and

passeng

ers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of

cargo a

nd luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”

amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb

passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo

and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5x150) =

650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo

being l

oaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely

exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity

calculated in Step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your

trailer

will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this

manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo

and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Metric Example For Load Limit

For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will

be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-

able cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340

(

5x68)

= 295 kg) as shown in step 4.

NOTE:

• I

f your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your

traile

r will be transferred to your vehicle. The following

table shows examples on how to calculate total load,

cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with

varying seating configurations and number and size of

occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and

may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity

of your vehicle.

• For the following example, the combined weight of occu-

pants

and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 497

WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can

cause t

ire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase

your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended

load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

498 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

(Continued)

Tires — General Information

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satis-

factory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas are

affecte

d by improper tire pressure:

• Safety and Vehicle Stability

• Econom

• Tread

Wear

• Ride C

omfort

Safety

oth under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability of

the veh

icle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or

over responsiveness in the steering.

NOTE:

• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic

and un

predictable steering response.

• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the

vehicl

e to drift left or right.

WARNING!

• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause

collisi

ons.

• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in

overheat

ing and tire failure.

• Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock.

Object

s on the road and chuckholes can cause damage

that result in tire failure.

• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle

handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of

vehicle control.

• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.

You could lose control of your vehicle.

• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to

the oth

er can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or

left.

• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-

mended

cold tire inflation pressure.

WARNING! (Continued)

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 499

Fuel Economy

Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance

resulti

ng in higher fuel consumption.

Tread Wear

Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal

ar pat

terns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need

for earlier tire replacement.

Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.

Over-in

flation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's

side B-

Pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door.

At least once a month:

• C

heck and adjust tire pressure with a good quality

pocket-

type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judge-

ment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look

roperl

y inflated even when they are under-inflated.

• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.

Inflat

ion pressures specified on the placard are always “cold

tire in

flation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is

defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been

driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1

mile

(1.6 km)

after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold

tire in

flation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-

tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of

utdoor

temperatures, as tire pressures vary with tempera-

ture changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F

(

7°C) o

f air temperature change. Keep this in mind when

checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the Winter.

CAUTION!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always

reinsta

ll the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture

and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could

damage the valve stem.

500 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the outside

temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should

be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every

12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature condition.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)

during o

peration. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure

build up or your tire pressure will be too low.

Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and

within p

osted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions

are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, main

taining correct tire inflation pressure is very important.

Increas

ed tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be

required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to an autho

rized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for

recomme

nded safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire

inflation pressures.

Radial Ply Tires

Tire Repair

If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets

the fol

lowing criteria:

• The tire has not been driven on when flat.

• The da

mage is only on the tread section of your tire (side-

wall da

mage is not repairable).

• T

he puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).

nsult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and addi-

tional information.

Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experi-

enced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately

th ano

ther Run Flat tire of identical size and service

description (Load Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire

pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to be reused.

WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum

load is

dangerous. The added strain on your tires could

cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do

not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at

continuous speeds above 75

mph (120 km/h).

WARNING!

Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on

your vehic

le will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.

The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial

ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other

types of tires.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 501

Run Flat Tires — If Equipped

Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles

(80 km) a

t 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation

pressur

e. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run

Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation

pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire

reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities

and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not

repairable. When a run flat tire is changed after driving with

underinflated tire condition, please replace the TPM sensor

as it is not designed to be reused when driven under run flat

mode (14 psi (96 kPa)) condition.

NOTE:

TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle on a

lat ti

re condition.

It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full

capacit

y or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode.

See the tire pressure monitoring section for more informa-

tion.

Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not

pin you

r vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for

longer t

han 30 seconds continuously without stopping.

Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emer-

gency” for further information.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated

by exces

sive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or

failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not

spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30

mph (48 km/h)

for more

than 30 seconds continuously when you are

stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no

matter what the speed.

502 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to

help you

in determining when your tires should be replaced.

Tire Tread

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread

grooves.

They will appear as bands when the tread depth

becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6

mm). When the tread is worn

to the t

read wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.

Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further information.

Life Of Tire

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors

includin

g, but not limited to:

• Driving style.

• Tire pr

essure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can

cause u

neven wear patterns to develop across the tire

tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life,

resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.

• Distance driven.

• Perform

ance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher,

and Sum

mer tires typically have a reduced tread life. Rota-

tion of these tires per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is

ighly rec

ommended.

1 — Worn Tire

2 — New Tire

WARNING!

Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six

years, re

gardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow

this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could

lose control and have a collision resulting in serious

injury or death.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 503

(Continued)

NOTE:

Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when installing

new tire

s due to wear and tear in existing tires.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little expo-

sure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil,

ease,

and gasoline.

Replacement Tires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many

charact

eristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear

and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer

strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the

originals in size, quality and performance when replacement

is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indica

tors” in this section. Refer to the Tire and Loading Informa-

tion placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size

esignat

ion of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol

for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire

sidewall.

See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety

Informa

tion” section of this manual for more information

relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.

It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear

tires a

s a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect

your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make

sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the orig

inal wheels.

It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or

riginal

equipment dealer with any questions you may have

on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent

replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling,

and ride of your vehicle.

WARNING!

• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed rating

other

than that specified for your vehicle. Some combina-

tions of unapproved tires and wheels may change

uspens

ion dimensions and performance characteristics,

resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of

your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and

stress to steering and suspension components. You could

lose control and have a collision resulting in serious

injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with

load ratings approved for your vehicle.

504 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Tire Types

All Season Tires — If Equipped

All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,

Summer,

Fall, and Winter). Traction levels may vary

between different all season tires. All season tires can be

identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the

tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure

to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your

vehicle.

Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped

Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry condi-

tions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If

ur veh

icle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware these

tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions.

Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient tempera

tures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with ice

r snow.

For more information, contact an authorized dealer.

Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or

mountai

n/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use

Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may

adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,

other t

han what was originally equipped on your

vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could

result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose

control and have a collision.

• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having

adequa

te speed capability can result in sudden tire

failure and loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION!

Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may

result

in false speedometer and odometer readings.

WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING!

Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You

could los

e vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or

death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the

possibility of loss of vehicle control.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 505

Snow Tires

Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires

during th

e Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a “moun-

tain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.

If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size

and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow

ires on

ly in sets of four; failure to do so may

adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was

originall

y equipped with your vehicle and should not be

operated at sustained speeds over 75

mph (120 km/h). For

speeds a

bove 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment

or an au

thorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating

speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and

traction

capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than

that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires;

therefore, local laws should be checked before using these

tire types.

Spare Tires — If Equipped

NOTE:

For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare

tire, pl

ease refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emer-

gency” for further information.

Refer to the “Towing Requirements - Tires” in “Starting And

peratin

g” for restrictions when towing with a spare tire

designated for temporary emergency use.

Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel

— If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel

equivale

nt in look and function to the original equipment

tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle.

This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your

vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized

tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern.

CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take

your vehicl

e through an automatic car wash with a

compact or limited use temporary spare installed.

Damage to the vehicle may result.

506 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped

The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.

You can

identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact

spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and

Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side

door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare

tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding

the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

T, S = Temporary Spare Tire

Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment

tire sh

ould be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your

vehicle at the first opportunity.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conven-

tional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is

designed

specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not

install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the

vehicle at any given time.

Full Size Spare — If Equipped

The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This

tire ma

y look like the originally equipped tire on the front or

rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may

have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread

wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs

to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your original equip

ment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and

einsta

ll on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

WARNING!

Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary

emergenc

y use only. With these spares, do not drive

more than 50

mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have

limited

tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread

wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be

replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to

your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire

failure and loss of vehicle control.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 507

Limited Use Spare — If Equipped

The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use

only. Th

is tire is identified by a label located on the limited

use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations

for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped

tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.

Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle

handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment

tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and rein

stall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care

All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome

plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using mild

(neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and to

prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution

recommended for the body of the vehicle and remember to

always wash when the surfaces are not hot to the touch.

Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,

sodium

chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc.,

and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on

dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to wipe

away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush.

They can damage the wheel’s protective coating that helps

keep them from corroding and tarnishing.

WARNING!

Limited use spares are for emergency use only.

Install

ation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle

handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the

speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep

inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your

Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the

driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side

door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at

the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle.

Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION!

Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic

solutions

or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.

Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car

washes may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such

damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or

equivalent is recommended.

508 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive

brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and

wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage

to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar Chrome

Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or select a

non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome

wheels.

NOTE:

If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an extended

eriod

after cleaning the wheels with wheel cleaner, drive

your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove the water drop

lets from the brake components. This activity will remove the

red rus

t on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle vibration

when braking.

Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss

Clear C

oat Wheels

CAUTION!

Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,

etal p

olishes or oven cleaner. These products may

damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not

covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car

wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is

recommended.

CAUTION!

If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty wheels,

DO NOT

USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or polishing

compounds. They will permanently damage this finish

and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle

Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD

SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a

regular basis; this is all that is required to maintain this

finish.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 509

Tire Chains (Traction Devices)

Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clear-

ance. Follow these recommendations to guard against

damage.

• T

raction device must be of proper size for the tire, as

recomm

ended by the traction device manufacturer.

• Install on Rear Tires Only.

• Due to

limited clearance, the following traction devices are

recomm

ended:

• Original equipment 255/70R18 and LT285/70R17 tire

sizes

are not chainable.

• The use of S-class snow chains is permitted with the use of

245/75R

17 tires on size 17 x 7.5 ET44.45 wheels.

WARNING!

Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)

between

front and rear axles can cause unpredictable

handling. You could lose control and have a collision.

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the

following

precautions:

• Because of restricted traction device clearance between

tires

and other suspension components, it is important

that only traction devices in good condition are used.

Broken devices can cause serious damage. Stop the

vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate

device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the

device before further use.

• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten

after

driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).

• D

o not exceed 30 mph (

48 km/h).

• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large

bumps,

especially with a loaded vehicle.

• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.

• Observe

the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-

tions on

the method of installation, operating speed,

and cond

itions for use. Always use the suggested oper-

ating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less

han 30

mph (48 km/h).

• D

o not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.

510 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Tire Rotation Recommendations

The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at

different loads and perform different steering, handling, and

braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal

rates.

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The

benefit

s of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggres-

sive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road type tires.

otatio

n will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow,

and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet

ride.

Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper maintenance

interva

ls. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should

be corrected prior to rotation being performed.

The suggested rotation method is the “rearward-cross”

shown in

the following diagram.

Tire Rotation

CAUTION!

Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends

on tires

of equal size, type and circumference on each

wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to

the transfer case. Tire rotation schedule should be

followed to balance tire wear.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 511

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM

TIRE QUALITY GRADES

The following tire grading categories were established by

the Nat

ional Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The

specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer

in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on

your vehicle.

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety

require

ments in addition to these grades.

Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on

the wea

r rate of the tire when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified government test course. For

example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half

times as well on the government course as a tire graded

100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the

actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart

significantly from the norm due to variations in driving

habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-

teristics and climate.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,

and C.

These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on

wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions

on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and

concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-

mance.

Temperature Grades

The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,

represe

nting the tire's resistance to the generation of heat

and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under

controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test

wheel.

WARNING!

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on

straight

-ahead braking traction tests, and does not

include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak

traction characteristics.

512 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the

tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive

temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C

corresponds to a level of performance, which all

passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory

test wheel, than the minimum required by law.

STORING THE VEHICLE

WARNING!

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a

tire th

at is properly inflated and not overloaded.

Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading,

either separately or in combination, can cause heat

buildup and possible tire failure.

WARNING!

• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever

the hood

is raised. It can start anytime the ignition

switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades.

• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands

and br

acelets that could make an inadvertent electrical

contact. You could be seriously injured.

• Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be equipped

with t

wo batteries. Both the main and the supplemental

batteries must be disconnected to completely de-ener

gize the 12 volt electrical system.

• S

erious injury or death could result if you do not

disconn

ect both batteries. To learn how to properly

disconnect, see your authorized dealer.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 513

If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we

recommend that you take the following steps to minimize

the drain on your vehicle's battery:

• Disconnect the negative cable from battery.

• If your

vehicle is equipped with Stop/Start system then

disconn

ect both the main and supplemental negative

battery cables.

• Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service

(i.e.,

vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-

tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air

nd high

blower setting. This will ensure adequate system

lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor

damage when the system is started again.

• If assistance is needed to disconnect the battery system, see

your aut

horized dealer.

Battery Cable Disconnect

CAUTION!

If the negative battery cables are not isolated properly it

can caus

e a potential power spike or surge in the system,

resulting in damage to essential electrical components.

1 — Supplemental Negative Battery Cable

2 — Main Negative Battery Cable

3 — Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)

4 — Main Negative Battery Terminal

514 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

NOTE:

• You must isolate the supplemental battery connection

point,

as well as the main battery terminal from the post,

as shown in the image, to fully de-energize both batteries

for storage. If assistance is needed to disconnect the battery

system, see your authorized dealer.

• Do not disconnect the Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS), or your

Stop/S

tart system may not function for up to 24 hours, due to

the IBS being set into learn mode.

BODYWORK

Protection From Atmospheric Agents

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to

geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads

passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees

and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive

to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes

your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on

which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather

and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on

paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.

The following maintenance recommendations will enable

you to o

btain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance

built into your vehicle.

What Causes Corrosion?

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint

and pro

tective coatings from your vehicle.

The most common causes are:

• R

oad salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.

• Stone

and gravel impact.

• Insect

s, tree sap and tar.

• Salt i

n the air near seacoast localities.

• Atmosp

heric fallout/industrial pollutants.

Body And Underbody Maintenance

Cleaning Headlights

Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog

lights t

hat are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage

than glass headlights.

Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore

differe

nt lens cleaning procedures must be followed.

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and

reducin

g light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To

remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed

by rinsing.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 515

Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel

wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.

Preserving The Bodywork

Washing

• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in

the sh

ade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap,

and rinse the panels completely with clear water.

• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated

on your

vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar

Remover to remove.

• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner

Wax to

remove road film, stains and to protect your paint

finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.

• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that

may dim

inish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.

Special Care

• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near

the oc

ean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month.

• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the

doors,

rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open.

• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,

touch

them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is

considered the responsibility of the owner.

• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar

cause

that destroys the paint and protective coating, have

your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such

repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.

• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,

de-ice

r salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well pack-

aged and sealed.

• I

f a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or

stone

shields behind each wheel.

• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as

possib

le. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to

match the color of your vehicle.

CAUTION!

• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as

steel

wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal

and painted surfaces.

• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa)

can re

sult in damage or removal of paint and decals.

516 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models

To maintain the appearance of your vehicle's interior trim

and top

, follow these precautions:

• Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with the top down,

as exp

osure to sun or rain may damage interior trim.

• Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching agents on top mate-

rial,

as damage may result.

• D

o not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down and dry on the

paint,

leaving a streak.

• After cleaning your vehicle's fabric top, always make sure

it is

completely dry before lowering.

• Be especially careful when washing the windows by

followi

ng the directions for “Care of Fabric Top

Windows.”

Washing – Use Mo

par Car Wash or equivalent, or mild soap

suds, lukewarm water, and a brush with soft bristles. If extra

cleaning is required, use Mopar Convertible Cloth Top

Cleaner or equivalent, or a mild foaming cleaner on the

entire top, but support the top from underneath.

Rinsing – Be sure to remove all traces of cleaner by rinsing

the to

p thoroughly with clean water. Remember to allow the

top to dry before lowering it.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water

amage,

stains or mildew on the top material:

• Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage

the top

material. Also, increased water pressure may

force past the weather strips.

• It is recommended that the top be free of water prior to

opening

it. Operating the top, opening a door or

lowering a window while the top is wet may allow

water to drip into the vehicle's interior.

• Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure

direct

ed at the weather strip seals may cause water to

leak into the vehicle's interior.

• Careless handling and storage of the removable roof

panels

may damage the seals, causing water to leak into

the vehicle's interior.

• The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to

ensure

sealing. Improper installation can cause water to

leak into the vehicle's interior.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 517

Care Of Fabric Top Windows

Your vehicle's fabric top has pliable plastic windows which

can be

scratched unless special care is taken by following

these directions:

• Never use a dry cloth to remove dust. Instead, use a

micro-

fiber towel or soft cotton cloth moistened with cold or

warm, c

lean water, and wipe across the window, not up

and down. Mopar Jeep Soft Glass Window Cleaner or

equivalent will safely clean all plastic windows without

scratching. It removes fine scratches to improve visibility

and provides UV protection to help prevent yellowing.

• When washing, never u

se hot water or anything stronger

than a mild soap. Never use solvents such as alcohol or

harsh cleaning agents.

• Always rinse thoroughly with cold water, then wipe with

a soft

and slightly moist, clean cloth.

• When removing frost, snow or ice, never u

se a scraper or

de-icing chemicals. Use warm water only if you must

clean the window quickly.

• Debris (sand, mud/dirt, dust, or salt) from off-road

drivin

g will have an impact on plastic retainer operation.

Even normal on-road driving and vehicle washing will

eventually impact window plastic retainer operation. To

maintain ease of use of the window plastic retainers, each

window plastic retainer should be cleaned and lubricated

regularly. Clean them with a mild soap solution and a

small brush. Cleaning products are available through an

authorized dealer.

• Never paste stickers, gummed labels or any tape to the

windows.

Adhesives are hard to remove and may damage

the windows.

518 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

INTERIORS

Carpet Removal

Front Carpets (Two And Four Door Models):

1. Remove the front grommets.

Front Car

pet

2. Pull the carpet out from the front to the rear.

Front Car

pet Pulled Away

1 — Grommets

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 519

3. Remove the grommets under the front seat. First for the

rear carpet and then the front carpet.

Front And Rear Carpet Split

4. Under the back of the front seat, open the carpet split and

then pull out the rear edge and slide the carpet to the front

(do not remove the harness).

Rear Underside Of Front Seat

1 — Harness

2 — Carpet Split

520 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

5. Finally open the carpet split around seat bracket and then

remove the last two grommets.

Front Seat And Floor

6. W

hen reinstalling carpet please preform these steps in

reverse

order making sure that the carpet is tucked under

the scuffs, B pillar, console, and refasten grommets.

Rear Carpet (Four Door Models):

1. Remove the grommets under the front seat (one left and

one righ

t).

2. T

hen pull the carpet out, to the rear and open the carpet

plit a

round the front seats brackets.

Pull Toward The Rear Of Vehicle

1 — Grommets

2 — Carpet Split

1 — Carpet Split

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 521

3. Remove the grommets under the rear seat (one left and

one right). First the grommet for the cargo carpet and

then the rear carpet.

4. Pull the carpet out to the front and open the carpet split

around

the rear seats brackets.

Under Rear Seat

5. W

hen reinstalling carpet please preform these steps in

reverse

order making sure that the carpet is tucked under

the scuffs, B pillar, console, and refasten grommets.

Rear Carpet (Two Door Models):

1. Remove the rear seats.

2. Remov

e the sides grommets (one left and one right). First

the grom

met from the side carpet and then the rear

carpet.

Side Carpet

3. Remove the grommets under the front seat (one left and

one righ

t).

1 — Carpet Split

1 — Grommet

522 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

4. Then pull the carpet out to the rear and open the carpet

split around the front seats brackets.

Pull Carpet To The Rear

5. W

hen reinstalling carpet please preform these steps in

reverse

order making sure that the carpet is tucked under

the scuffs, B pillar, console, and refasten grommets.

Cargo Carpet (Four Door Models):

1. Remove the grommets under the rear seat (one left and

one righ

t).

2. P

ull the carpet out to the rear and open the carpet split

round

the seat belt attachment.

Under Rear Seat

1 — Carpet Split

2 — Rear Carpet

1 — Carpet Split

2 — Rear Carpet

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 523

3. Remove the carpet under the load floor and the side

support and then pull the carpet out.

Rear Load Floor

4. W

hen reinstalling carpet please preform these steps in

reverse

order making sure that the carpet is tucked under

the scuffs, B pillar, console, and refasten grommets.

Cargo Carpet (Four Door Models) With Gap Hider:

1. Remove the grommets under the rear seat (one left and

one righ

t).

2. P

ull the carpet out to the front and open the carpet split

round

the seat belt attachment and under the center seat

bracket.

Under Rear Seat

1 — Side Supports

2 — Load Floor

1 — Carpet Split

2 — Grommets

3 — Rear Carpet

524 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

3. When reinstalling carpet please preform these steps in

reverse order making sure that the carpet is tucked under

the scuffs, B pillar, console, and refasten grommets.

Side Carpet (Four Door Models):

1. Remove the side grommet (one left and one right).

2. Pull

the carpet out starting on the top flange, then all

around

the perimeter and open the carpet split around

the seat belt attachment.

Inside Sidewall

3. When reinstalling carpet please preform these steps in

revers

e order making sure that the carpet is tucked under

the scuffs, B pillar, console, and refasten grommets.

1 — Top Flange

2 — Grommet

3 — Side Carpet

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 525

Side Carpet (Two Door Models):

1. Remove the side grommet and then the lower one (left

and ri

ght).

2. P

ull the carpet out starting on the top flange, then all

round

the perimeter and open the carpet split around

the seat belt attachment.

Inside Sidewall

3. When reinstalling carpet please preform these steps in

revers

e order making sure that the carpet is tucked under

the scuffs, B pillar, console, and refasten grommets.

Seats And Fabric Parts

Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and

carpeting.

Seat Belt Maintenance

Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents

or abra

sive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun

damage can also weaken the fabric.

If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or luke-

warm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to

wash the

m. Dry with a soft cloth.

Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the

buckles

do not work properly.

1 — Top Flange

2 — Side Carpet

3 — Grommets

4 — Carpet Split

WARNING!

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many

are pote

ntially flammable, and if used in closed areas

they may cause respiratory harm.

526 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Plastic And Coated Parts

Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.

Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are

molded

in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must

be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be

used, b

ut do not use high alcohol content or abrasive

cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp cloth.

2. Dry with a soft cloth.

Leather Parts

Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather

upholstery.

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular

cleanin

g with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act

as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and

should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn

soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total

Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather

upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils,

cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based

cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a

leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original

condition.

WARNING!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and

leave you

with no protection. Inspect the belt system

periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.

Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not

disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies

must be replaced after a collision if they have been

damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).

CAUTION!

• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,

suntan

lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,

painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may cause

permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.

• Damage caused by these type of products may not be

covered

by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 527

NOTE:

If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show any

foreign

material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more so than

darker colors. The leather is designed for easy cleaning, and

FCA recommends Mopar total care leather cleaner applied

on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.

Glass Surfaces

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with

Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type

glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use

caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped

with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio

antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments

that may scratch the elements.

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the

towel or

cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner

directly on the mirror.

CAUTION!

Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone

based c

leaning products to clean leather upholstery, as

damage to the upholstery may result.

528

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the left

front corner of the A pillar, visible from outside of the vehicle

through the windshield. This number also appears under

body, on the right side of the frame rail near the center of the

vehicle,

as well as on the Automobile Information Disclosure

Label affixed to a window on your vehicle. Save this label for

a convenient record of your vehicle identification number

and optional equipment.

The VIN is also stamped on either right or left hand side of

the engin

e block.

Vehicle Identification Number

NOTE:

It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 529

BRAKE SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems.

If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capa-

bility, the remaining system will still function. However,

here wi

ll be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You

may notice increased pedal travel during application, greater

pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential activation

of the Brake Warning Light.

In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e., repeated

brake ap

plications with the engine OFF) the brakes will still

function. However, the effort required to brake the vehicle

will be much greater than that required with the power

system operating.

WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that

the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a

wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the

lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated

torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex) deep wall

socket.

Torque Specifications

**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/

bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.

Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the

tire an

d remove any corrosion or loose particles.

Lug Nut/Bolt

Torque

**L

ug Nut/Bolt

Size

Lug Nut/Bolt

Socket Size

130 Ft-Lbs

(176 N·m

)

M14 x 1.50 22 mm

530 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Spare Tire Torque Specifications

Spare tire torque is for the spare tire carrier located on the

tailgate.

heel Mounting Surface

Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/

bolt has

been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is fully

engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it halfway).

Torque Patterns

After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be

sure tha

t all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against

the wheel.

Lug Nut/Bolt

Torque

**Lu

g Nut/Bolt

Size

Lug Nut/Bolt

Socket Size

59 Ft-Lbs (80 N·m) M14 x 1.50 22 mm

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do

not tighte

n the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has

been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result

in personal injury.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 531

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

2.0L Engine

This engine is designed to meet all emission

requirements, and provide satisfactory fuel

economy a

nd performance, when using

high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline having

an octane rating of 87, as specified by the (R+M)/2

method.

The use

of 91 or higher octane “premium” gasoline will

allow these engines to operate to optimal performance. This

increase in performance is most noticeable in hot weather or

other heavier load conditions, such as while towing.

While operating on gasoline with the required octane

number,

hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is

not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard

making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immedi

ately. Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended

ctane n

umber can cause engine failure and may void or not

be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard

starting,

stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these

symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering

service for the vehicle.

3.6L Engine

This engine is designed to meet all emissions regula-

tions and provide satisfactory fuel economy and

performa

nce when using high-quality unleaded

“Regular” gasoline having an octane rating of 87 as specified

by the (R+M)/2

method. The use of higher octane

“Premium

” gasoline will not provide any benefit over

“Regular” gasoline in these engines.

While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,

hearing a

light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause

for concern. However, if the engine is heard making a heavy

knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gaso

line with an octane number lower than 87 can cause engine

ailure

and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard

starting,

stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these

symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering

service for the vehicle.

532 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Reformulated Gasoline

Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning

gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformu-

lated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically

lended

to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.

The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly

ended

reformulated gasoline will provide improved

performance and durability of engine and fuel system

components.

Materials Added To Fuel

Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane

rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and

stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that

have these additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce

emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.

Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a

higher level of detergents to further aide in mini-

mizing engine and fuel system deposits. When avail-

able, the usage of TOP TIER Detergent gasoline is

ecommen

ded. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP

TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.

Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be

voided.

Many of these materials intended for gum and

varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar

ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and

diaphragm materials.

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygen-

ates such as ethanol.

Problems that result from using gasoline containing more

han 15%

ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol are

not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or

not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

CAUTION!

DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or

gasoline

containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of

these blends may result in starting and drivability

problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause

emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause

the Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please

observe pump labels as they should clearly communicate

if a fuel contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 533

(Continued)

Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles

Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline

containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline with

higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,

the engi

ne will have some or all of these symptoms:

• Operate in a lean mode.

• OBD II

Malfunction Indicator Light on.

• Poor e

ngine performance.

• Poor c

old start and cold drivability.

• Increa

sed risk for fuel system component corrosion.

CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications

Modifications that allow the engine to run on Compressed

Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may result in

damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system compo

nents. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are not

the res

ponsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not

be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

MMT In Gasoline

Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a

manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into

some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with

MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline

of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended

with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions

system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer

recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your

vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated

on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your gaso

line retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is

rohibi

ted in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.

Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION!

Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s

performa

nce:

• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal

law. U

sing leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-

mance and damage the emissions control system.

534 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

NOTE:

Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can

result

in civil penalties being assessed against you.

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition

malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to over-

heat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some

ight sm

oke, your engine may be out of tune or

malfunctioning and may require immediate service.

Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.

• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as

octane

enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these

products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel

system damage or vehicle performance problems

resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not

the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or

not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

CAUTION! (Continued)

WARNING!

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.

Follow the

precautions below to prevent carbon

monoxide poisoning:

• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon

monoxide

, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill.

Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage,

and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine

running for an extended period. If the vehicle is

stopped in an open area with the engine running for

more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system

to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.

• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-

nance.

Have the exhaust system inspected every time

the vehi

cle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions

repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side

windows fully open.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 535

FLUID CAPACITIES

U.S. Metric

Fuel (Approximate)

Two Door Models 17.5 Gallons 66 Liters

Four Door Models 21.5 Gallons 81 Liters

Engine Oil with Filter

2.0L Engine 5 Quarts 4.73 Liters

3.6L Engine 5 Quarts 4.73 Liters

Cooling System *

2.0L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/

50,000

Mile Formula or equivalent)

10.3 Quarts 9.7 Liters

2.0L Engine Intercooler without Motor Generator Unit

(MGU) (

Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/

150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)

3.2 Quarts 3.0 Liters

2.0L Engine Intercooler with Motor Generator Unit

(

MGU) (

Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/

150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)

3.5 Quarts 3.3 Liters

2.0L Battery Coolant (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant

0 Year

/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)

2.5 Quarts 2.4 Liters

3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/

150,000

Mile Formula or equivalent)

11.2 Quarts 10.6 Liters

536 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Engine

3.6L Motor Generator Unit (MGU) (Mopar Antifreeze/

Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or

equivalent)

1.9 Quarts 1.8 Liters

3.6L Battery Coolant (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant

0 Year

/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)

2.5 Quarts 2.4 Liters

* Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

U.S. Metric

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Coolant

We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile

rmula

OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the

requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.

Intercooler/Motor Generator Unit

(if equipped)

We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile

rmula

OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the

requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.

Battery Coolant (if equipped)

We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile

rmula

OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the

requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 537

Engine Oil — 2.0L Engine

We recommend you use Mopar API SN PLUS Certified SAE 5W-30 Full

yntheti

c Engine Oil which meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard

MS-13340. Equivalent full synthetic SAE 5W-30 engine oil can be used if it

meets API SN PLUS Certification. If SN PLUS or equivalent oil is unavailable

then please contact your local dealership for recommendation.

CAUTION!

Failure to use the recommended SN PLUS or equivalent oil can cause

engine d

amage not covered by the vehicle warranty.

Engine Oil — 3.6L Engine

We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the

equire

ments of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil,

and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.

Engine Oil Filter

We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.

Spark Plugs

We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.

Fuel Selection — 2.0L Engine

87 Octane Minimum – 91 Octane Recommended, 0-15% Ethanol.

Fuel Selection — 3.6L Engine

87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

538 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

(Continued)

CAUTION!

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-

fied O

rganic Additive Technology (OAT) engine

coolant (

antifreeze), may result in engine damage and

may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive

Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and

should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive

Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any

“globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a

non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into

the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system

will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh

OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an autho

rized dealer as soon as possible.

• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant

(antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhib

itors or antirust products, as they may not be compat-

ible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the

adiator

• This vehicle has not been designed for use with

propyle

ne glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).

Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti

freeze) is not recommended.

CAUTION! (Continued)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 539

Chassis

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Automatic Transmission – If Equipped

Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or

quival

ent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or

performance of your transmission.

Manual Transmission – If Equipped

We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Transfer Case

We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Axle Differential (Front Axles)

We recommend you use Mopar Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W85) (API GL-5)

Axle Differential (Rear M200 Sales Code

RZ)

We r

ecommend you use Mopar Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W140)

(API GL-5).

Axle Differential (Rear M220 Sales Codes

RE/DRF)

recommend you use Mopar Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W85)

(API GL-5). Models equipped with Trac-Lok Limited Slip Differential require

frict

ion modifier additive.

Brake Master Cylinder

We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703.

Power Steering Reservoir

We recommend you use Mopar Electric Steering Pump Fluid.

540

MULTIMEDIA

UCONNECT SYSTEMS

For detailed information about your Uconnect system, refer

to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.

NOTE:

Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only

nd may n

ot reflect exact software for your vehicle.

DRAG & DROP MENU BAR

The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar are

easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow these

steps:

Uconnect 4 Apps Menu

MULTIMEDIA 541

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Apps Menu

1. Press the “Apps ” butto

n to open the App screen.

2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an

existin

g shortcut in the main menu bar.

The new shortcut will now be an active App/shortcut on

the main

menu bar.

CYBERSECURITY

Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be

equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These

networks allow your vehicle to send and receive informa

tion. This information allows systems and features in your

vehicle

to function properly.

Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features

to reduc

e the risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to

vehicle systems and wireless communications. Vehicle soft

ware technology continues to evolve over time and FCA US

LLC, worki

ng with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appro-

priate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other

evices,

your vehicle may require software updates to

improve the usability and performance of your systems or to

reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful

access to your vehicle systems.

The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle

systems m

ay still exist, even if the most recent version of

vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is installed.

542 MULTIMEDIA

NOTE:

• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you directly

regardi

ng software updates.

• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize the

potent

ial risk of a security breach, vehicle owners should:

• Routinely check www.drive

uconnect.com (U.S. Resi-

dents) or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents)

to learn about available Uconnect software updates.

• O

nly connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.

person

al mobile phones, USBs, CDs).

Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot

be assu

red. Third parties may unlawfully intercept informa-

tion and private communications without your consent. For

urther

information, refer to “Data Collection & Privacy” in

your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement or “Onboard

Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To

Know Your Instrument Panel”.

WARNING!

• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the

possibl

e outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are

breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,

including safety related systems, could be impaired or

a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in

an accident involving serious injury or death.

• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into

your vehi

cle if it came from a trusted source. Media of

unknown origin could possibly contain malicious soft

ware, and if installed in your vehicle, it may increase

the poss

ibility for vehicle systems to be breached.

• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior,

take you

r vehicle to your nearest authorized dealer

immediately.

MULTIMEDIA 543

UCONNECT SETTINGS

The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the

touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the

center of the instrument panel that allow you to access and

change the customer programmable features. Many features

can vary by vehicle.

Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect

touchscr

een.

Buttons on the faceplate are located below, and beside the Ucon-

nect system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,

here is

a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side.

Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change

settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the control knob one

or more times to select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).

Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off and Mute

buttons

on the faceplate.

Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn off the

Uconnect

screen. Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate

a second time to turn the screen on.

Push the Back Arrow button on the faceplate to exit out of a

Menu or

certain option on the Uconnect system.

Customer Programmable Features —

Uconnect 3 Settings

Uconnect 3 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons On

The Faceplate

Push the “Settings” button on the touchscreen to display the

settings

menu screen. In this mode the Uconnect system

allows you to access all of the available programmable

features.

1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen

2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate

544 MULTIMEDIA

NOTE:

Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.

When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen

to ente

r the desired mode. Once in the desired mode, press and

release the preferred setting and make your selection. Once the

setting is complete, either press the back arrow/Done button

on the touchscreen or the Back button on the faceplate to return

to the previous menu. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons

on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or

down through the available settings.

NOTE:

All settings should be changed with the ignition in the

“RUN” p

osition.

The following tables list the settings that may be found

hin t

he Uconnect 3 radio, along with the selectable

options pertaining to each setting.

Language

After pressing the “Language” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Display

After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Language English Espanol Francais

Setting Name Selectable Options

Display Mode Auto Manual

MULTIMEDIA 545

Units

After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Brightness + -

NOTE:

The “Brightness” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “-” buttons on the

touchsc

reen.

Touchscreen Beep On Off

Setting Name Selectable Options

Units US Metric Custom

NOTE:

• The “Metric” option changes the instrument cluster display to metric units of measure.

• The “C

ustom” option allows setting the “Fuel Consumption” (L/100km, or km/L) and “Pressure” (kPa, or bar) units of

measur

e independently.

546 MULTIMEDIA

Clock & Date

After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Safety/Assistance

After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Set Time and Format

12 hr 24 hr

AM PM

NOTE:

Within the “Set Time and Format” setting, press the corresponding arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the correct

time.

Show

Time Status — If Equipped On Off

Sync Time — If Equipped On Off

Setting Name Selectable Options

Forward Collision Warning —

If Equi

pped

Off Warning Only Warning & Braking

Forward Collision Warning

Sensiti

vity — If Equipped

Near Med Far

ParkView Backup Camera

Delay

On Of

MULTIMEDIA 547

NOTE:

The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen displays the rear view image with

dynamic

grid lines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay is canceled if the vehicle’s

speed exceeds 8

mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.

ParkView Backup Camera

Active G

uide Lines

On Off

NOTE:

The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” setting overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or

ynamic,

grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the steering wheel posi-

tion when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or

ligning

to a hitch/receiver.

ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound & Display

Rear ParkSense Volume — If

Equippe

Low Medium High

Blind Spot Alert — If

Equippe

Off Lights Lights & Chime

NOTE:

If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the

ensor

may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is

misaligned results in the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) not operating to specification.

Hill Start Assist On Off

Setting Name Selectable Options

548 MULTIMEDIA

Lights

After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Headlight Off Delay

0 sec 30 sec

60 sec 90 sec

NOTE:

When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on

after t

he engine is shut off.

Automatic High Beam Headlamps —

If Equi

pped

On Off

Daytime Running Lights On Off

NOTE:

When the “Daytime Running Light” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is

only all

owed by law in the country of the vehicle purchase.

Flash Lights With Lock — If Equipped On Off

Interior Ambient Lights + -

NOTE:

The “Interior Ambient Lights” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “-”

buttons

on the touchscreen.

MULTIMEDIA 549

Doors & Locks

After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Auto Door Locks — If Equipped On Off

NOTE:

When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).

Auto Unlock On Exit On Off

NOTE:

When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or

NEUTRAL

position and the driver's door is opened.

Flash Lights With Lock On Off

Horn With Lock On Off

Horn With Remote Start — If

Equippe

On Off

Remote Door Unlock/Door Unlock Driver All

NOTE:

When “Driver” is selected, only the driver's door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button, you must push

the key f

ob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger's doors. When “All” is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the

first press of the key fob unlock button. If “All” is programmed, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry

equipped door handle is grasped. If “Driver” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is

grasped. Touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door opening once. If the driver’s door is

opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).

550 MULTIMEDIA

Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped

After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort Systems” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Engine Off Options

After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Auto-On Driver Heated Seat

& Steer

ing Wheel With

Vehicle Start — If Equipped

Off Remote Start All Starts

NOTE:

When this feature is selected, the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when tempera-

tures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C), the driver vented seat will turn on.

Setting Name Selectable Options

Headlight Off Delay

0 sec 30 sec

60 sec 90 sec

NOTE:

When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.

MULTIMEDIA 551

Audio

After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Equalizer Bass Mid Treble

NOTE:

When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–”

setting

buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.

Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the

desired setting.

Balance/Fade

Up Arrow

Button

wn Arrow

Button

Left Arrow

Button

Right Arrow

Button

Center “C”

Button

NOTE:

When in this display you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by using the “Arrow” button on the touchscreen to

djust

the sound level from the front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the “Center ‘C’ Button” on the touchscreen

to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting.

Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3

Surround Sound — If Equipped On Off

Loudness On Off

NOTE:

The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.

552 MULTIMEDIA

Phone/Bluetooth

After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped

After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped + -

NOTE:

The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the

AUX inp

ut.

Setting Name Selectable Options

Paired Phones List of Paired Phones

NOTE:

This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect

Owner’s M

anual Supplement.

Setting Name Selectable Options

Channel Skip List of Channels

NOTE:

SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesir-

able channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.

MULTIMEDIA 553

Restore Settings

After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Clear Personal Data

After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Subscription Info Sirius ID

NOTE:

New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio.

llowing

the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information

screen to re-subscribe.

1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.

2. Writ

e down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen

or vis

it the provider online.

Setting Name Selectable Options

Restore Settings OK Cancel

NOTE:

When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected, it will reset all settings to their default settings.

Setting Name Selectable Options

Clear Personal Data OK Cancel

NOTE:

When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets.

554 MULTIMEDIA

Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 4

Settings

Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Touchscreen and Face-

plate Buttons

Press the “Settings” button on the bottom bar, or press the

“Apps ” b

utton, then press the “Settings” button on the

touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In this mode

he Ucon

nect system allows you to access all of the available

programmable features.

NOTE:

• O

nly one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.

• Dependi

ng on the vehicles options, feature settings may

vary.

When

making a selection, press the button on the touch-

screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode,

ress an

d release the preferred setting “option” until a

check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting

has been selected. Once the setting is complete, either press

the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the

previous menu, or press the “X” button on the touchscreen

to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down

Arrow button on the right side of the screen will allow you

to toggle up or down through the available settings.

The following tables list the settings that may be found

within th

e Uconnect 4 with 7-inch display radio, along with

the selectable options pertaining to each setting.

1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen

2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate

MULTIMEDIA 555

Language

After pressing the “Language” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Display

After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Language English Espanol Francais

Setting Name Selectable Options

Display Mode Auto Manual

Display Brightness Headlights On + -

Display Brightness Headlights Off + -

Auto-Show Smartphone Display Upon

onnecti

On Off

Touchscreen Beep On Off

Control Screen Timeout On Off

Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster On Off

556 MULTIMEDIA

Units

After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Voice

After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Units US Metric Custom

NOTE:

• T

he “Metric” option changes the instrument cluster display to metric units of measure.

• The “C

ustom” option allows setting the “Distance, Fuel Consumption” (MPG (US), MPG(UK), L/100km, or km/L),“Pres-

sure”

(kPa, or bar) and “Temperature” (C, or F) units of measure independently.

Setting Name Selectable Options

Voice Response Length Brief Detailed

Show Command List Always With Help Never

MULTIMEDIA 557

Time & Date

After pressing the “Time & Date” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Set Time Hours + -

NOTE:

The “Set Time Hours” feature allows you to adjust the hours.

Set Time Minutes + -

NOTE:

The “Set Time Minutes” feature allows you to adjust the minutes.

Time Format

12hrs 24hrs

AM PM

558 MULTIMEDIA

Camera

After pressing the “Camera” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off

NOTE:

The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with

dynamic

grid lines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the

vehicle’s speed exceeds 8

mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF posi-

tion.

ParkView Backup Camera Active

Guide L

ines

On Off

NOTE:

The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or

ynamic,

grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the steering wheel posi-

tion when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or

ligning

to a hitch/receiver.

ParkView Backup Camera Fixed

Guide L

ines

On Off

MULTIMEDIA 559

Safety/Driving Assistance — If Equipped

After pressing the “Safety/Driving Assistance” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped Off Warning Only Warning & Braking

NOTE:

Applies brakes to slow the vehicle in case of potential forward collision, or applies brakes and a warning.

Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — If

Equippe

Near Med Far

NOTE:

Sets the distance in which a Forward Collision Warning occurs.

ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Sound & Display

Rear ParkSense Volume

Low Medium High

Hill Start Assist On Off

Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Off Lights Lights & Chime

560 MULTIMEDIA

Lights

After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Interior Ambient Lights + -

NOTE:

The “Interior Ambient Lights” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “-”

buttons

on the touchscreen.

Headlight Off Delay

0 sec 30 sec

60 sec 90 sec

NOTE:

When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on

after t

he engine is shut off.

Daytime Running Lights On Off

NOTE:

When the “Daytime Running Light” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is

only all

owed by law in the country of the vehicle purchase.

Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped On Off

NOTE:

When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights activate/deactivate automatically under

certain

conditions.

Flash Lights With Lock — If Equipped On Off

MULTIMEDIA 561

Doors & Locks

After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Engine Off Options — If Equipped

After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Auto Unlock On Exit On Off

NOTE:

When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or

NEUTRAL

position and the driver's door is opened.

Flash Lights With Lock On Off

Remote Door Unlock Driver Door All Doors

Setting Name Selectable Options

Auto Door Locks — If Equipped On Off

NOTE:

When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).

Setting Name Selectable Options

Doors On Engine Off Power Delay + -

Doors Off Engine Off Power Delay + -

Headlight Off Delay + -

562 MULTIMEDIA

Aux Switches

After pressing the “Aux Switches” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Audio

After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Aux 1-4

Type Latching Momentary

Power Source Battery Ignition

Recalled Last State

NOTE:

Holding last state conditions are met when switch type is set to latching and power source is set to ignition.

Setting Name Selectable Options

Balance & Fade Speaker Icon

NOTE:

When in this display you may adjust the “Balance & Fade” of the audio by pressing and dragging the “Speaker Icon” toward

any loca

tion in the box.

Equalizer Bass Mid Treble

NOTE:

When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–”

setting

buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.

Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the

desired setting.

MULTIMEDIA 563

Speed Adjusted

Volume

Off 1 2 3

Loudness Yes No

NOTE:

The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.

AUX Volume Offset —

f Equi

pped

+ -

NOTE:

This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.

Auto Play On Off

NOTE:

The “Auto Play” feature automatically starts playing audio when a USB device is connected and turned on.

Setting Name Selectable Options

564 MULTIMEDIA

Phone

After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped

After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb Options

Paired Phones And Audio Devices List Of Paired Phones And Audio Devices

NOTE:

This feature shows which phones and audio devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer

o the

Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.

Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster On Off

Setting Name Selectable Options

Channel Skip List Of Channels

NOTE:

SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesir-

able channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.

MULTIMEDIA 565

Restore Settings

After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Clear Personal Data

After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Subscription Info Sirius ID

NOTE:

New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio.

Following

the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information

screen to re-subscribe.

1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.

2. Writ

e down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen

or vis

it the provider online.

Setting Name Selectable Options

Restore Settings OK Cancel

NOTE:

When this feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings.

Setting Name Selectable Options

Clear Personal Data OK Cancel

NOTE:

When this feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets.

566 MULTIMEDIA

Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 4C/

4C NAV Settings

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Touchscreen and Faceplate Buttons

Press the “Apps ” button, then press the “Settings ”

button on the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen.

n this

mode the Uconnect system allows you to access all of

the available programmable features.

NOTE:

• O

nly one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.

• Dependi

ng on the vehicles options, feature settings may

vary.

When

making a selection, press the button on the touch-

screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode,

ress an

d release the preferred setting “option” until a

check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting

has been selected. Once the setting is complete, either press

the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the

previous menu, or press the “X” button on the touchscreen

to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down

Arrow button on the right side of the screen will allow you

to toggle up or down through the available settings.

The following tables list the settings that may be found

within th

e Uconnect 4C/4C NAV radio, along with the

selectable options pertaining to each setting.

1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen

2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate

MULTIMEDIA 567

Language

After pressing the “Language” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Display

After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Set Language English Español Français

NOTE:

When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Español) for all

display

nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set Language” button

on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the

language, showing that setting has been selected.

Setting Name Selectable Options

Display Mode Manual Auto

Display Brightness With Headlights

+ -

NOTE:

make changes to the "Display Brightness with Headlights ON" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer

witch m

ust not be in the "party" or "parade" positions.

568 MULTIMEDIA

Display Brightness With Headlights

OFF

On Off

NOTE:

To make changes to the "Display Brightness with Headlights OFF" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer

witch m

ust not be in the "party" or "parade" positions.

Theme Set Theme

NOTE:

When in this display, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection, press the "Set Theme" button

on the

touchscreen, then select the desired theme option button until a check-mark appears showing that the setting has been

selected.

Touchscreen Beep On Off

Control Screen Time-Out On Off

NOTE:

When the “Control Screen Time-Out” feature is selected, the Controls Screen will stay open for five seconds before the screen

times o

ut. With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.

Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups

Displaye

d in Cluster

On Off

NOTE:

When the “Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear

n the

Instrument Cluster Display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.

Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster On Off

Setting Name Selectable Options

MULTIMEDIA 569

Units

After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Voice

After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Units US Metric Custom

NOTE:

• T

he “Metric” option changes the instrument cluster display to metric units of measure.

• The “C

ustom” option allows setting the “Fuel Consumption” (L/100km, or km/L), “Pressure” (kPa, or bar), and

“Tempe

rature” (°C or °F) units of measure independently.

Setting Name Selectable Options

Voice Response Length Brief Detailed

Show Command List Always With Help Never

570 MULTIMEDIA

Clock

After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped On Off

Set Time Hours + -

NOTE:

The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must

be unch

ecked.

Set Time Minutes + -

NOTE:

The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen

must be

unchecked.

Time Format 12hrs 24hrs

Show Time in Status Bar — If

Equippe

On Off

MULTIMEDIA 571

Camera

After pressing the “Camera” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off

NOTE:

The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with

dynamic

grid lines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the

vehicle’s speed exceeds 8

mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF posi-

tion.

ParkView Backup Camera Active

Guide L

ines

On Off

NOTE:

The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or

ynamic,

grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the steering wheel posi-

tion when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or

ligning

to a hitch/receiver.

ParkView Backup Camera Fixed

Guide L

ines

On Off

572 MULTIMEDIA

Safety & Driving Assistance

After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Forward Collision Warning

— If Eq

uipped

Off Warning Only Warning & Braking

NOTE:

Applies brakes to slow the vehicle in case of potential forward collision, or applies brakes and a warning.

Forward Collision Warning

Sensiti

vity — If Equipped

Near Med Far

NOTE:

Sets the distance in which a Forward Collision Warning occurs.

ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound & Display

Rear ParkSense Volume Low Medium High

Blind Spot Alert — If

Equippe

Off Lights Lights & Chime

NOTE:

If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the

ensor

may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is

misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification.

Hill Start Assist On Off

MULTIMEDIA 573

Mirrors and Wipers

After pressing the “Mirrors and Wipers” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Lights

After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Headlights With Wipers — If

Equippe

On Off

Setting Name Selectable Options

Headlight Off Delay

0 sec 30 sec

60 sec 90 sec

NOTE:

When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut

off.

Dayti

me Running Lights On Off

NOTE:

When the “Daytime Running Light” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is

only all

owed by law in the country of the vehicle purchase.

Flash Lights With Lock — If Equipped On Off

574 MULTIMEDIA

Doors & Locks

After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Interior Ambient Lights + -

NOTE:

The “Interior Ambient Lights” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “-”

buttons

on the touchscreen.

Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped On Off

NOTE:

When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights activate/deactivate automatically under

certain

conditions.

Setting Name Selectable Options

Auto Door Locks — If

Equippe

On Off

NOTE:

When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).

Auto Unlock On Exit On Off

NOTE:

When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is

n the

PARK or NEUTRAL position, and the driver's door is opened.

Flash Lights With Lock On Off

MULTIMEDIA 575

Sound Horn With Lock — If

Equipped

Off 1st Press 2nd Press

Sound Horn With Remote

Start —

If Equipped

On Off

1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door All Doors

NOTE:

When "Driver Door" is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver's door will unlock with the first press of

the key f

ob unlock button. You must press the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger's doors. When "All Doors"

is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If the vehicle

is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock, no matter which Passive Entry equipped

door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock

when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed,

touching the handle more than once will result in only the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver

door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).

Passive Entry — If Equipped On Off

NOTE:

The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or

unlock b

uttons. To make your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears

next to the setting, showing that the setting has been selected.

Setting Name Selectable Options

576 MULTIMEDIA

Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped

After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort Systems” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Aux Switches — If Equipped

After pressing the “Aux Switches” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Auto-On Driver Heated Seat

& Steer

ing Wheel With

Vehicle Start — If Equipped

Off Remote Start All Starts

NOTE:

When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when tempera-

tures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn on.

Setting Name Selectable Options

Aux 1-4

Type Latching Momentary

Power Source Battery Ignition

Recalled Last State

NOTE:

Holding last state conditions are met when switch type is set to latching and power source is set to ignition.

MULTIMEDIA 577

Engine Off Options

After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Audio

After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Doors On Engine Off Power Delay + -

Doors Off Engine Off Power Delay + -

Headlight Off Delay + -

Setting Name Selectable Options

Balance/Fade Speaker Icon

NOTE:

When in this display you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by pressing and dragging the “Speaker Icon” toward

any loca

tion in the box.

Equalizer Bass Mid Treble

NOTE:

When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–”

setting

buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.

Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the

desired setting.

578 MULTIMEDIA

Phone

After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Speed Adjusted

Volume

Off 1 2 3

UX Volume Offset —

If Equi

pped

+ -

NOTE:

This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.

Setting Name Selectable Options

Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb Options

Paired Phones And Audio Devices List Of Paired Phones And Audio Devices

NOTE:

This feature shows which phones and audio devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer

to the

Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.

Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster On Off

MULTIMEDIA 579

SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped

After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Channel Skip List Of Channels

NOTE:

SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesir-

able channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.

Subscription Info Sirius ID

NOTE:

New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio.

llowing

the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information

screen to re-subscribe.

1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.

2. Writ

e down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen

or vis

it the provider online.

SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription.

580 MULTIMEDIA

Reset

After pressing the “Reset” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Reset App Drawer OK Cancel

Restore Apps Back Next

NOTE:

Restoring Apps will delete all installed apps. This feature is used if there is an issue using or installing apps. To restore apps,

press t

he “Next” button in the pop-up screen. Then Press “Yes” on the confirmation screen. To keep installed apps, press

“Cancel.”

Restore Settings OK Cancel

NOTE:

When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings.

Clear Personal Data Yes Cancel

NOTE:

When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets.

MULTIMEDIA 581

System Information

After pressing the “System Information” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Software Licenses Software Information Screen

NOTE:

When this feature is selected, a “Licensing Information” screen will appear, displaying a licensing information website for

the rad

io.

Map Update Download System Information To USB Generate Request Code

NOTE:

The “Download System Information To USB” will create a special USB required for Map updates of the radio. Whereas the

“Genera

te Request Code” will display a code for the user to input online when downloading the maps.

582 MULTIMEDIA

STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS

The remote sound system controls are located on the rear

surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to

access the switches.

Audio Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)

The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a

push-but

ton in the center and controls the volume and mode

of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch

increases the volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker

switch decreases the volume.

Pushing the center button will make the radio switch

between t

he various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/CD/

USB/AUX, etc.).

The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a

push-but

ton in the center. The function of the left-hand

control is different depending on which mode you are in.

The following describes the left-hand control operation in

each mod

Radio Operation

Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next

listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will

“Seek” down for the next listenable station.

The button located in the center of the left-hand control will

tune to

the next preset station that you have programmed in

the radio preset button.

Media Mode

Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next track on

the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth). Pushing the

bottom of the switch once goes to the beginning of the

current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it is

within eight seconds after the current track begins to play.

MULTIMEDIA 583

AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

The Media Hub is located on the Instrument Panel, below the

Climate Controls. Behind the Media Hub access door

contains one AUX port, a Type C USB Port and one standard

USB Port. Both USB Ports allow you to play music from

iPod/MP3 players or USB devices through your vehicle’s

sound system.

The Smart Charging USB ports provide power to your device

up to an

hour after the vehicle is turned off.

NOTE:

• T

he Type C USB port is the primary media port for the

radio.

Two devices can be plugged in at the same time and

both ports provide charging capabilities, but only one port

can transfer data to the head unit at a time.

• Both ports share a single data connection. However, the

user ca

nnot switch between Type A or Type C.

For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A USB port

and anot

her device is plugged into the Type C port, connec-

tion to the Type A port will be lost. Alternatively, if a device

s plugged

into the Type C port and another device is

plugged into the Type A port, the Type C device maintains

primary connection.

USB Connection

1 — Type A Plugged In

2 — Type C Plugged In

3 — Type A And Type C Plugged In

584 MULTIMEDIA

Media Hub

Located inside the center console, a second USB Port allows

you to pl

ay music from iPod/MP3 players or USB devices

through your vehicle’s sound system.

Center Console USB

A third and fourth USB Ports are located behind the center

console,

above the Power Inverter. One is a charge only port,

and can only charge USB devices. The other USB Port allows

you to play music from iPod/MP3 players or USB devices

through your vehicle’s sound system.

1 — AUX Port

2 — Type C USB Port

3 — Type A USB Port

MULTIMEDIA 585

USB On The Back Of The Center Console

Device Plugged In Message Screen

1 — Type C And Standard USB Ports

2 — Type C And Standard Charge Only USB Ports

586 MULTIMEDIA

Phone Plugged In Message Screen Phone or USB Plugged In Message Screen

NOTE:

Plugging in a phone or another USB device may cause the

nnecti

on to a previous device to be lost.

WARNING!

Do not plug in or remove the iPod or external device

while dr

iving. Failure to follow this warning could result

in a collision.

MULTIMEDIA 587

RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES

Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your

vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your

radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relo

cating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is not

harmful

to the radio. If your radio performance does not

satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is

recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off

during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect (if

equipped).

Regulatory And Safety Information

USA/CANADA

Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation

The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is

far bel

ow the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits.

Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a

manner that the radio is 8

in (20 cm) or further from the

human b

ody.

The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines found

in radi

o frequency safety standards and recommendations,

which reflect the consensus of the scientific community.

The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio

is safe

for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is

far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless

devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of wireless

radios may be restricted in some situations or environments,

such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions,

you are encouraged to ask for authorization before turning

on the wireless radio.

The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio

Frequenc

y (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with

Industr

y Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This

device must accept any interference received,

includ

ing interference that may cause undesired opera-

tion.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the

arty re

sponsible for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

588 MULTIMEDIA

NOTE:

• This equipment has been tested and found to comply with

the li

mits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15

of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide

reasonable protection against harmful interference in a

residential installation. This equipment generates, uses

and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not

installed and used in accordance with the instructions,

may cause harmful interference to radio communications.

However, there is no guarantee that interference will not

occur in a particular installation.

• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio

or tel

evision reception, which can be determined by

turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged

to try to correct the interference by one or more of the

following measures:

1. Increase the separation between the equipment and

receiv

er.

2. Consult an authorized dealer or an experienced radio

techni

cian for help.

UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS

Introducing Uconnect

Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful

quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips you

need to know to control your Uconnect 3, Uconnect 4, or

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV system.

Uconnect 3

MULTIMEDIA 589

Uconnect 4

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV

If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in the Apps

menus of

your 8.4-inch touchscreen, you have the Uconnect

4C NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect 4C with 8.4-inch

display system.

590 MULTIMEDIA

Get Started

All you need to control your Uconnect system with your

voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.

1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to ch

eck mobile device and

feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instruc-

tions.

2. R

educe background noise. Wind and passenger conver-

sations

are examples of noise that may impact recogni-

tion.

3. S

peak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing

straight

ahead. The microphone is positioned on the rear-

view mirror and aimed at the driver.

4. E

ach time you give a Voice Command, you must first

push ei

ther the Voice Recognition (VR) or Phone button,

wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.

5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by

pushing

the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice

Command from current category.

Uconnect Voice Command Buttons — If Equipped

1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A

Text

2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions. For

8.4-inch

Displays Only: Push To Begin Navigation, Apps And Climate

Functions.

3 — Push To End Call

MULTIMEDIA 591

Basic Voice Commands

The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point

while using your Uconnect system.

Push the VR button . After the beep, say:

• “C

ancel” to st

op a current voice session

• “Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands

• “Repe

at” to li

sten to the system prompts again

Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recogni-

tion system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.

Radio

Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM

Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription

or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)

Push the VR button . After the beep, say:

• “Tune to ninety-

five-point-five FM”

• “Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1

”

TIP:

At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to

earn a

Voice Command, push the VR button and say

“H

elp.” The system provides you with a list of commands.

Uconnec

t 3 Radio

592 MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 4 Radio

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Radio

MULTIMEDIA 593

Media

Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and auxil-

iary ports (if equipped). Voice operation is only available for

connecte

d USB and AUX devices. (Remote CD player

optional and not available on all vehicles.)

Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the

following commands and follow the prompts to switch your

media so

urce or choose an artist.

• “Change source to Blueto

oth”

• “Change source to AUX”

• “C

hange source to USB”

• “P

lay artist Beethoven”; “Play alb

um Greatest Hits”;

“Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”

TIP:

Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the

music on

your USB device. Your Voice Command must

match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre infor

mation is displayed.

Uconnect 3 Media

594 MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 4 Media

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Media

MULTIMEDIA 595

Phone

Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with

Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on

your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check

Uconnect-

Phone.com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing

instructions.

Push the VR button or Phone button . After the beep,

say one of the following commands:

• “C

all John Smith”

• “Dial

123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts”

• “Redi

al (call previous outgoing phone number)”

• “Call

back (call

previous incoming phone number)”

TIP:

When providing a Voice Command, push the VR button

or Phone button and say “Call,” then pronounce the name

exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact has

multipl

e phone numbers, you can say “Call John Smith

work.”

Uconnect 3 Phone

596 MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 4 Phone

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Phone

MULTIMEDIA 597

Voice Text Reply

Uconnect announces incoming text messages. Push the VR

button or Phone button (if enabled) and say “Listen.”

ust have compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect

system.)

Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the

VR butt

on or Phone button (if enabled). After the

beep, say: “R

eply.”

2. L

isten to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat

one of

the pre-defined messages and follow the system

prompts.

NOTE:

Only use the numbering listed, otherwise the system does

not tran

spose the message.

TIP:

Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the

Message A

ccess Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this

feature. For details about MAP, visit

UconnectPhone.com.

PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES

Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.

No. Start without me. I’ll be late.

Okay. Where are you? I will be 5 <or 10,

5, 20,

25, 30, 45,

60> minutes late.

Call me. Are you there yet?

I’ll call you later. I need directions. See you in 5 <or

0, 15,

20, 25, 30,

45, 60> minutes.

I’m on my way.

Can’t talk right

now.

I’m los

t. Thanks.

598 MULTIMEDIA

Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming text

messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple iPhone,

follow these four simple steps:

iPhone Notification Settings

TIP:

Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but if your

vehicle

is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use your

voice to send a text message.

Climate

Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free

and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving

ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)

Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the

following commands:

• “S

et driver temperature to 70 degre

es”

• “Set passenger temperature to 70 degre

es”

1 — Select “Settings”

2 — Select “Bluetooth”

3 — Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle

4 — Turn On “Show Notifications”

MULTIMEDIA 599

TIP:

Voice Command for Climate may only be used to adjust the

interior

temperature of your vehicle. Voice Command will

not work to adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if

equipped.

Uconnect 4 Climate

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Climate

600 MULTIMEDIA

Navigation (4C NAV) — If Equipped

The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and

become more productive when you know exactly how to get

to where you want to go.

1. To enter a destination, push the VR button . After

the

beep, say: “Find addr

ess 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn

Hills, Michigan.”

2. Then follow the system prompts.

TIP:

To s

tart a POI search, push the VR button . After the beep,

say: “Fi

nd nearest coffee

shop.”

Uconnect 4C NAV Navigation

MULTIMEDIA 601

SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV) — If Equipped

NOTE:

Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the

subscri

ber.

An included trial and/or subscription is required to take

advanta

ge of the SiriusXM Guardian services in the next

section of this guide. To register with SiriusXM Guardian,

press the Apps button on the Uconnect 4C/4C NAV touch

screen to get started.

NOTE:

SiriusXM Guardian is available only on equipped vehicles

urchas

ed within the continental United States, Alaska,

Hawaii and Canada. Services can only be used where

coverage is available; see coverage map for details.

SOS Call

Theft Alarm Notification

Remote Door Lock/Unlock

Send & Go

Vehicle Finder

Stolen Vehicle Assistance

Remote Vehicle Start**

Remote Horn & Lights

Roadside Assistance Call

Vehicle Health Reports**

Vehicle Health Alert**

Performance Pages Plus**

**If vehicle is equipped.

CAUTION!

Some SiriusXM Guardian services, including SOS Call

nd Road

side Assistance Call will NOT work without an

operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network

connection compatible with your device.

602 MULTIMEDIA

To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian in your

vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM Guardian services.

1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-vehicle

touchsc

reen.

2. S

elect the Activate Services icon from your list of apps.

. Selec

t “Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM

Guardia

n Customer Care agent who will activate services

in your vehicle, or select “Enter Email” to activate on the

web.

• U.S. residents visit: www.sirius

xm.com/guardian.

• Canadian residents visit: www.sirius

xm.ca/guardian.

Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C NAV)

Your vehicle will send you a monthly email report, which

summarizes the performance of your vehicle’s key systems

so you can stay on top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs

if you are registered for SiriusXM Guardian. Your vehicle

will also send you Vehicle Health Alerts when it detects

issues with its key systems that need your attention. For

further information, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual

Supplement.

Mobile App (4C/4C NAV)

You’re only a few steps away from using remote commands

and sending a destination from your phone to your vehicle.

Mobile App

To use the Uconnect Mobile App:

1. Once you have registered your SiriusXM Guardian

service

s, download the Uconnect App to your mobile

device. Use your Owner Account login and password to

open the app.

MULTIMEDIA 603

2. Once on the “Remote” screen, you can begin using

Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and

activate your horn and lights remotely, if equipped.

3. Press the “Location” button on the bottom menu bar of

the app

to bring up a map to locate your vehicle or send a

location to your Uconnect Navigation using Vehicle

Finder and Send & Go , if equipped.

4. Press the “Settings” side menu in the upper left corner of

the app

to bring up app settings.

NOTE:

For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com

(U.S. Residents) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).

SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV)

Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check a

sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast? SiriusXM Travel

Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of information

right to your Uconnect 4C NAV system. (Not available for

Uconnect 4 system.)

Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the

following commands:

• “S

how fuel prices”

• “Show 5

- day weather forecast”

• “Show e

xtended weather”

TIP:

Traf

fic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.

SiriusXM Travel Link

604 MULTIMEDIA

Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped

Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select

media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your

natural language to understand what you mean and

responds back to confirm your requests. The system is

designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands on

the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.

To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the Uconnect

Voice Re

cognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After

you hear a double beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts and

music, get directions, read text messages and many other

useful requests.

Uconnect 4 Siri Eyes Free Available

MULTIMEDIA 605

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Siri Eyes Free Available

Using Do Not Disturb

With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from

incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes on

the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience,

there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls

and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb.

Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text message,

a call,

or both, when declining an incoming call and send it

to voicemail.

Automatic reply messages can be:

• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”

• Create

a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters.

While i

n Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected so

you can still place a second call without being interrupted by

incoming calls.

NOTE:

• Only the beginning of your custom message will be seen

on the

touchscreen.

• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones.

• Auto re

ply with text message is only available on phones

that su

pport Bluetooth MAP.

606 MULTIMEDIA

Android Auto — If Equipped

NOTE:

Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile

phone ma

nufacturer. Some Android Auto features may or

may not b

e available in every region and/or language.

Android Auto allows you to use your voice to interact with

droid’s

best-in-class speech technology through your

vehicle’s voice recognition system, and use your smart

phone’s data plan to project your Android powered smart-

phone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect

ouchscr

een. Connect your Android 5.0 (Lollipop), or higher,

to one of the media USB ports, using the factory-provided

USB cable, and press the new Android Auto icon that

replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin

Android Auto. Push and hold the VR button on the steering

wheel, or press and hold the “Microphone” icon within

Android Auto, to activate Android’s VR, which recognizes

natural voice commands, to use a list of your smartphone’s

features:

• Maps

• Music

• Ph

one

• Te

xt Me

ssages

• Additio

nal Apps

Android

Auto On 7-inch Display

MULTIMEDIA 607

Android Auto On 8.4-inch Display

Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for

further

information.

NOTE:

Requires compatible smartphone running Android 5.0

ollipo

p or higher and download app on Google Play.

Android, Android Auto, and Google Play are trademarks of

Google Inc.

Apple CarPlay — If Equipped

NOTE:

Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile

phone m

anufacturer. Some Apple CarPlay features may or

may not

be available in every region and/or language.

Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to interact with

ri th

rough your vehicle’s voice recognition system, and use

your smartphone’s data plan to project your iPhone and a

number of its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect

your iPhone 5, or higher, to one of the media USB ports,

using the factory-provided Lightning cable, and press the

new CarPlay icon that replaces your “Phone” icon on the

main menu bar to begin Apple CarPlay. Push and hold the

VR button on the steering wheel, or press and hold the

“Home” button within Apple CarPlay, to activate Siri, which

recognizes natural voice commands to use a list of your

iPhone’s features:

• Phone

• Music

• M

essage

• Maps

• Ad

diti

onal Apps

608 MULTIMEDIA

Apple CarPlay On 7-inch Display

Apple CarPlay On 8.4-inch Display

Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for

further

information.

NOTE:

Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for phone

ompatib

ility. Data plan rates apply. Vehicle user interface is a

product

of Apple. Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc.

iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the US and other

countries.

Apple terms of use and privacy statements apply.

MULTIMEDIA 609

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio

Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with

Industr

y Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This

device must accept any interference received,

includ

ing interference that may cause undesired opera-

tion.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the

arty re

sponsible for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

Additional Information

nect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner Connect is

a trade

mark of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark of

Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are

trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.

Uconnect System Support:

• U

.S. residents visit www.Drive

Uconnect.com or call:

1-877-855-8400(24 hou

rs a day 7 days a week)

• Canadian residents visit www.Drive

Uconnect.ca or call:

1-800-465-2001(English

) or 1-800-387-9983(French)

SiriusXM Guardian services support:

• U.S. residents visit www.siriu

sxm.com/guardian or call:

1-844-796-4827

• C

anadian residents visit www.siriu

sxm.ca/guardian or

call: 1-877-324-9091

610 MULTIMEDIA

CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE

To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following

precautions:

• Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.

• If the

disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,

wiping f

rom center to edge.

• Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the

disc.

• D

o not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, or

anti-s

tatic sprays.

• Store the disc in its case after playing.

• Do not

expose the disc to direct sunlight.

• Do not

store the disc where temperatures may become too

high.

NOT

If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it

ay be d

amaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating removed,

a hair, moisture or dew on the disc), oversized, or have

protection encoding. Try a known good disc before consid

ering disc player service.

611

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR

YOUR VEHICLE

Prepare For The Appointment

If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the

right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work

to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.

Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a

maintenance log of your vehicle's service history. This can

often provide a clue to the current problem.

Prepare A List

Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the specific

work you want done. If you've had an accident or work done

that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor

know.

Be Reasonable With Requests

If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle

by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service

advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many autho

rized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal

daily ch

arge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make

these arrangements when you call for an appointment.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally inter-

ested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our

product

s and services.

Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We

strongly

recommend that you take the vehicle to an autho-

rized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most

oncern

ed that you get prompt and high quality service. The

manufacturer's authorized dealer have the facilities,

factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest infor

mation to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely

anner.

612 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer

service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this

process.

• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the

general

manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They

want to know if you need assistance.

• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,

you may

contact the manufacturer's customer center.

Any communication to the manufacturer's customer center

should

include the following information:

• Owner's name and address

• Owner's

telephone number (home and office)

• Author

ized dealer name

• Vehicl

e Identification Number (VIN)

• Vehicl

e delivery date and mileage

FCA US LLC Customer Center

P.O. Box 21–8004

Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004

Phone: (877) 426-5337

FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center

P.O. Box 1621

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French

In Mexico Contact

Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240

Sante Fe C.P. 05109

Mexico, D. F.

In Mexico City: 800-505-1300

Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568

Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands

FCA Caribbean LLC

P.O. Box 191857

San Juan 00919-1857

Phone: (877) 426-5337

Fax: (787) 782-3345

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 613

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech

Impaired (TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manu-

facturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication

Devices

for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any

hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a

TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United

States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing

1-800-380-CHRY.

Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require

assista

nce can use the special needs relay service offered by

Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for

Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay

Service operator.

Service Contract

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to

help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs

after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty

expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufac

turer's service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer's

ervice

contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an

Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of

the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the

service contract, call the manufacturer's Service Contract

National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian resi

dents, call (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract

hat is

not the manufacturer's service contract. It is not

responsible for any service contract other than the manufac

turer's service contract. If you purchased a service contract

that is

not a manufacturer's service contract, and you require

service after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited

Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents,

and contact the person listed in those documents.

We appreciate that you have made a major investment when

you purc

hased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also

made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to

assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership

experience. You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to

resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.

614 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

WARRANTY INFORMATION

See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and

provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this

vehicle and market.

MOPAR PARTS

Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available

from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your

vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could

cause a

crash or cause injury or death, you should imme-

diately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety

Adminis

tration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA

US LLC.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an

investi

gation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a

group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in

individual problems between you, an authorized dealer

or FCA US LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline

toll fr

ee at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to

http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,

NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,

Washing

ton, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other informa-

tion about motor vehicle safety from http://

www.safercar.gov.

WARNING!

Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),

some of i

ts constituents, and certain vehicle components

contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other

reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained

in vehicles and certain products of component wear

contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other

reproductive harm.

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 615

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you

should

contact the Customer Service Department imme-

diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety

defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-

port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and

Recalls

at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/

roadsafety/.

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS

To order the following manuals, you may use either the

website or the phone numbers listed below.

Service Manuals

These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the informa-

tion that students and professional technicians need in diag-

nosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining,

ervici

ng, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A complete

working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or compo

nents is written in straightforward language with illustra-

tions, diagrams, and charts.

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,

harts

and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals

make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix

problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and

features. They show exactly how to find and correct prob

lems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and

drivabi

lity procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a

complete list of all tools and equipment.

Owner's Manuals

These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the assis-

tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you

with spe

cific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are starting,

operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well

as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.

Call toll free at:

• 1

-800-890-4038 (U.S.)

• 1-800-

387-1143 (Canada)

Visit

us on the Worldwide Web at:

• www.techauthority.com (U.S.)

616

INDEX

About Your Brakes .......

..........................................................529

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) .......

......354

Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .......

............................480

Adding Fuel.......

......................................................................385

Additives, Fuel .......

.................................................................532

Air Bag

Air Bag Operation.

......

........................................................265

Air Bag Warning Light.......

........................................262, 266

Enhanced Accident Response .......

............................280, 451

Event Data Recorder (EDR).......

........................................451

Front Air Bag .......

........................................................263, 266

If Deployment Occurs .......

.................................................279

Knee Impact Bolsters .......

...................................................276

Maintaining Your Air Bag System.......

.............................281

Maintenance.......

..................................................................281

Redundant Air Bag Warning Light.......

...........................263

Transporting Pets.......

.........................................................304

Air Bag Light .......

....................................................203, 262, 305

Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) .......

.........465

Air Conditioner Maintenance .......

........................................468

Air Conditioner Refrigerant .......

...................................468, 469

Air Conditioner System .......

..................................................468

Air Conditioning.......

................................................................83

Air Conditioning Filter.......

..............................................86, 469

Air Conditioning System .......

..................................................84

Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......

...................................84

Air Filter ...................................................................................465

Air Pr

essure

Tires.

......................................................................................499

Alarm

m The System.

......

.............................................................30

Disarm The System .......

........................................................31

Security Alarm.......

........................................................30, 207

Alterations/Modifications

Vehicle.

....................................................................................15

Androi

d Auto .......

...................................................................606

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant).......

...................................479, 535

Disposal ................................................................................481

Anti-L

ock Brake System (ABS) .......

......................................219

Anti-Lock Warning Light.......

................................................208

Apple CarPlay .......

..................................................................607

Assist, Hill Start.......

................................................................222

Audio Systems (Radio).......

....................................................540

Auto Down Power Windows .......

...........................................87

Auto Unlock, Doors.......

.........................................................327

Automatic Dimming Mirror.......

.............................................62

Automatic Door Locks .......

......................................................40

617

Automatic Headlights..............................................................66

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC).......

.........................84

Automatic Transmission.......

.................................................322

Adding Fluid .......

................................................................488

Fluid And Filter Change .......

.............................................488

Fluid Change.......

.................................................................488

Fluid Level Check .......

................................................487, 488

Fluid Type .......

.............................................................487, 539

Gear Ranges .......

..................................................................324

Special Additives.......

..........................................................487

Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode.......

...............327

Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet).......

...................182

Auxiliary Power Outlet.......

...................................................182

Auxiliary Switches.......

...........................................................185

Axle Fluid.................................................................................539

Axle L

ock

................................................................................................338

Battery.

..............................................................................205, 461

Char

ging System Light.......

................................................205

Keyless Key Fob Replacement .......

.....................................20

Belts, Seat .................................................................................305

Blind

Spot Monitoring.......

.....................................................231

Body Mechanism Lubrication.......

........................................472

Brake Assist System.......

.........................................................221

Brake Control System.......

......................................................220

Brake Fluid.......

................................................................484, 539

Brake System.......

.............................................................484, 529

Anti-Lock (ABS).......

............................................................529

Fluid Check .......

...................................................................484

Master Cylinder.......

............................................................484

Parking..................................................................................315

Warnin

g Light.......

...............................................................204

Brake/Transmission Interlock .......

.......................................322

Bulb Replacement .......

....................................................417, 419

Bulbs, Light .......

...............................................................307, 417

Bumper End Cap Removal .......

.............................................402

Camera, Rear............................................................................3

Capac

ities, Fluid.......

...............................................................535

Caps, Filler

Fuel.

.......................................................................................385

Oil (E

ngine) .......

...................................................................458

Radiator (Coolant Pressure).......

........................................481

Car Washes .......

.......................................................................515

Carbon Monoxide Warning.......

....................................304, 534

Cargo Area Cover .......

............................................................171

Cargo Area Features.......

........................................................171

Cargo Load Floor .......

.............................................................171

Cargo Tie-Downs .......

.............................................................171

Carpeting..................................................................................518

Cellul

ar Phone .......

..................................................................587

618

Center High Mounted Stop Light.........................................423

Certification Label.......

............................................................387

Chains, Tire.......

.......................................................................509

Changing A Flat Tire.......

.......................................................488

Chart, Tire Sizing .......

.............................................................490

Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) .......

....217

Checking Your Vehicle For Safety.......

.................................304

Checks, Safety.......

...................................................................304

Child Restraint .......

.................................................................282

Child Restraints

Booster Seats .

......

.................................................................286

Child Seat Installation .......

.................................................299

How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .......

..................296

Infant And Child Restraints .......

.......................................285

Locating The LATCH Anchorages .......

............................292

Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .......

..............288

Older Children And Child Restraints.......

.......................285

Seating Positions .......

..........................................................287

Clean Air Gasoline.......

...........................................................532

Cleaning

Wheels.

..................................................................................507

Climat

e Control

Automatic.

......

........................................................................77

Manual....................................................................................73

Cold W

eather Operation.......

.................................................312

Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance .......

..................................610

Compact Spare Tire .......

.........................................................506

Connector

UCI .

.......................................................................................583

Univer

sal Consumer Interface (UCI).......

.........................583

Console .....................................................................................179

Floor ..

....................................................................................179

Contra

ct, Service......................................................................613

Cooli

ng Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap).......

...........................481

Cooling System.......

.................................................................478

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze).......

......................................480

Coolant Level.......

........................................................481, 482

Cooling Capacity.......

..........................................................535

Disposal Of Used Coolant.......

...........................................481

Drain, Flush, And Refill .......

..............................................479

Inspection .......

......................................................478, 481, 482

Points To Remember.......

....................................................483

Pressure Cap .......

.................................................................481

Radiator Cap .......

.................................................................481

Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .......

..............479, 535, 536

Corrosion Protection.......

........................................................514

Cruise Control (Speed Control) .......

.....................................354

Cruise Light .......

......................................................214, 215, 216

Customer Assistance .......

.......................................................611

Customer Programmable Features.......

................543, 554, 566

Cybersecurity.......

....................................................................541

619

Daytime Running Lights .......

..................................................65

Dealer Service.......

...................................................................462

Defroster, Windshield .......

.....................................................305

Delay (Intermittent) Wipers .......

.............................................70

Diagnostic System, Onboard.......

..........................................216

Dimmer Switch

Headlight.

...............................................................................66

Dipsti

cks

Oil (Engine).

......

...................................................................460

Disable Vehicle Towing .......

..................................................449

Disposal

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant).

......

.......................................481

Do Not Disturb.......

.................................................................605

Door Ajar..........................................................................205, 207

Door

Ajar Light .......

........................................................205, 207

Door Frame.......

.......................................................................104

Installation.......

.....................................................................104

Removal................................................................................104

Door L

ocks

Automatic.

......

........................................................................40

Door Opener, Garage .......

......................................................171

Doors...........................................................................................32

Remova

l............................................................................40, 44

Remov

al, Front .......

...............................................................40

Removal, Rear.......

.................................................................44

Drag And Drop Menu.......

.....................................................540

Driver’s Seat Back Tilt .......

.................................................47, 48

Driving......................................................................................400

Dual T

op.....................................................................................88

Electr

ic Brake Control System.

......

........................................220

Anti-Lock Brake System.......

..............................................219

Electronic Roll Mitigation .......

...................................223, 227

Electric Remote Mirrors .......

....................................................64

Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet).......

..................182

Electrical Power Outlets.......

..................................................182

Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control).......

...................350

Electronic Stability Control (ESC).......

..................................223

Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .......

..................205

Emergency

In Case Of .

......

......................................................................412

SOS Emergency Call .......

....................................................412

Emergency Brake .......

.............................................................315

Emergency, In Case Of

Jacking.

..........................................................................432, 488

Jump

Starting.......

................................................................442

Tow Hooks .......

....................................................................450

Emission Control System Maintenance .......

........................217

Engine .......................................................................................458

Air Cl

eaner .......

....................................................................465

Block Heater.......

..................................................................314

620

Break-In Recommendations ..............................................314

Compartment.......

........................................................458, 459

Compartment Identification.......

...............................458, 459

Coolant (Antifreeze) .......

....................................................536

Cooling .................................................................................478

Exhaus

t Gas Caution .......

...........................................304, 534

Fails To Start .......

.................................................................313

Flooded, Starting.......

..........................................................313

Fuel Requirements .......

...............................................531, 535

Jump Starting.......

................................................................442

Oil ..........................................................................462, 535, 53

Oil Filler Cap.......

.................................................................458

Oil Filter................................................................................464

Oil Re

set................................................................................196

Oil Se

lection .......

..................................................462, 463, 535

Oil Synthetic.......

..................................................................464

Overheating .......

..................................................................447

Starting..........................................................................308, 309

Engin

e Oil Viscosity .......

................................................463, 464

Engine Oil Viscosity Chart .......

.....................................463, 464

Enhanced Accident Response Feature.......

..................280, 451

Ethanol......................................................................................532

Exhaus

t Gas Caution .......

.......................................................304

Exhaust Gas Cautions .......

.....................................................534

Exhaust System .......

........................................................304, 476

Exterior Lights.......

............................................................65, 307

Fabric Care .......

........................................................................516

Fabric Top.......

..........................................................................516

Filters

Air Cleaner .

......

....................................................................465

Air Conditioning .......

....................................................86, 469

Engine Oil.......

..............................................................464, 536

Engine Oil Disposal .......

.....................................................464

Flashers

Hazard Warning.

......

...........................................................412

Turn Signal.......

....................................................................307

Turn Signals .......

..................................................214, 420, 421

Flash-To-Pass.......

......................................................................66

Flooded Engine Starting.......

..................................................313

Fluid Capacities.......

................................................................535

Fluid Leaks.......

........................................................................307

Fluid Level

Manual Transmission .

......

..................................................486

Fluid Level Checks.......

...........................................................485

Brake......................................................................................484

Engine

Oil.......

......................................................................460

Fluid, Brake.......

.......................................................................539

Fluids And Lubricants.......

.....................................................536

Fog Lights.......

..........................................................................420

Fog Lights, Service.......

...........................................................420

Fold And Tumble Rear Seat .......

.............................................52

621

Fold-Flat Seats ...........................................................................47

Folding Rear Seats .......

.............................................................51

Folding Windshield.......

.........................................................165

Forward Collision Warning .......

...........................................239

Four Wheel Drive.......

.............................................................330

Operation..............................................................................330

Shifti

ng..................................................................................330

System.

..................................................................................330

Four Wh

eel Drive Operation.......

..........................................333

Four-Way Hazard Flasher .......

..............................................412

Freedom Panels.......

............................................................95, 97

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle.......

..................................................447

Front Axle (Differential).......

..................................................485

Fuel............................................................................................531

Adding

..................................................................................385

Additi

ves..............................................................................532

Clean

Air ..............................................................................532

Ethano

l..................................................................................532

Filler

Cap (Gas Cap) .......

....................................................385

Gasoline................................................................................531

Materi

als Added.......

...........................................................532

Methanol...............................................................................532

Octane

Rating .......

.......................................................531, 536

Requirements.......

................................................................535

Specifications .......

................................................................536

Tank Capacity.......

...............................................................535

Fueling ......................................................................................385

Fuses..

........................................................................................423

Garage

Door Opener (HomeLink).

......

.................................171

Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap).......

........................................385, 386

Gasoline, (Fuel).......

.................................................................531

Gasoline, Clean Air.......

..........................................................532

Gasoline, Reformulated.......

...................................................532

Gear Ranges .......

..............................................................319, 324

Glass Cleaning.......

..................................................................527

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.......

..........................................389

GVWR.......................................................................................387

Hard T

op .

...................................................................................95

Hazard

Warning Flashers.......

...............................................412

Head Restraints .......

..................................................................55

Headlights

Automatic.

......

........................................................................66

Bulb Replacement.......

.........................................................419

Cleaning................................................................................514

High Be

am/Low Beam Select Switch .......

.........................66

Lights On Reminder.......

.......................................................67

Passing ....................................................................................66

Replac

ing ..............................................................................419

Heated

Mirrors .......

...................................................................64

Heated Steering Wheel.......

......................................................61

622

High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch .................66

Hill Descent Control.......

........................................................228

Hill Descent Control Indicator.......

.......................................228

Hill Start Assist.......

.................................................................222

Hitches

Trailer Towing.

......

..............................................................391

HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .......

................................171

Hood Prop.......

.........................................................................169

Hood Release.......

....................................................................169

Ignition .

......................................................................................22

Switch.

.....................................................................................22

In Cas

e Of Emergency.......

.....................................................412

In Vehicle Help

Vehicle User Guide .

......

........................................................16

Inside Rearview Mirror.......

.....................................................62

Installation .......

..........................................................................95

Instrument Cluster.......

...........................................................189

Descriptions .......

..................................................................214

Display..................................................................................193

Engine

Oil Reset .......

...........................................................196

Menu Items .......

...................................................................196

Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .......

...................................526

Integrated Power Module (Fuses) .......

.................................424

Interior And Instrument Lights .......

.......................................68

Interior Appearance Care .......

...............................................518

Interior Lights.......

.....................................................................68

Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers).......

................................70

Introduction .......

........................................................................12

Inverter

Power .

...................................................................................184

Jack Lo

cation.

......

.....................................................................433

Jack Operation .......

..........................................................436, 488

Jacking Instructions .......

.........................................................436

Jump Starting.......

....................................................................442

Key Fob

Arm The System.

......

.............................................................30

Disarm The System .......

........................................................31

Programming Additional Key Fobs .......

............................21

Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry).......

..........20

Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry).......

............21

Key-In Reminder.......

................................................................24

Keyless Enter-N-Go .......

...........................................................34

Passive Entry.......

...................................................................34

Keys.............................................................................................18

Replac

ement.......

..............................................................21, 29

Lane Change Assist.

......

............................................................67

Lap/Shoulder Belts.......

..........................................................253

Latches ......................................................................................307

623

Hood .....................................................................................169

Leaks, Fluid.......

.......................................................................307

Life Of Tires .......

......................................................................502

Light Bulbs.......

................................................................307, 417

Lights ........................................................................................307

Air Ba

g..................................................................203, 262, 30

Automatic Headlights .......

...................................................66

Brake Assist Warning .......

..................................................226

Brake Warning.......

..............................................................204

Bulb Replacement .......

................................................417, 419

Center Mounted Stop .......

..................................................423

Cruise....................................................................214, 215, 21

Daytime Running.......

...........................................................65

Dimmer Switch, Headlight.......

...........................................66

Electronic Stability Program(ESP) Indicator .......

............206

Engine Temperature Warning.......

....................................206

Exterior ...........................................................................65, 307

Fog..

.......................................................................................420

Hazard

Warning Flasher.......

.............................................412

Headlights.......

.....................................................................419

High Beam.......

.......................................................................66

High Beam/Low Beam Select .......

......................................66

Hill Descent Control Indicator.......

...................................228

Interior ....................................................................................68

Lights

On Reminder .......

......................................................67

Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine).......

......................209

Park........................................................................................214

Passin

g ....................................................................................66

Rear S

ervicing.......

...............................................................421

Rear Tail Lamps.......

............................................................421

Seat Belt Reminder.......

.......................................................207

Security Alarm.......

..............................................................207

Service...........................................................................417, 419

Side

Marker.......

...................................................................421

Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS).......

..............................243

Traction Control .......

...........................................................226

Turn Signal.......

....................................................................307

Turn Signals .......

..................................................214, 420, 421

Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions .......

.......206, 214

Load Floor, Cargo .......

............................................................171

Load Shed Battery Saver Mode.......

......................................201

Load Shed Battery Saver On.......

...........................................201

Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction .......

...........................201

Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor.......

............................201

Loading Vehicle.......

................................................................387

Tires.......................................................................................494

Locking

xle .

......................................................................................338

Locks

Aut

omatic Door.

......

..............................................................40

Child Protection.......

..............................................................39

Power Door .......

.....................................................................33

624

Low Tire Pressure System .....................................................243

Lowering ..........................................................................110, 136

Lower

ing Four Door.......

................................................110, 136

Lowering Two Door .......

................................................110, 136

Lubrication, Body .......

............................................................472

Lug Nuts/Bolts .......

................................................................529

Luggage Carrier .......

...............................................................187

Maintenance.

......

......................................................................157

Maintenance Free Battery .......

...............................................461

Maintenance Schedule .......

....................................................452

Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine).......

...............209

Manual

Park Release.

......

..................................................................440

Service...................................................................................615

Manual

Transmission.......

..............................................317, 486

Fluid Level Check .......

........................................................486

Lubricant Selection .......

..............................................486, 539

Shift Speeds.......

...................................................................319

Methanol ..................................................................................532

Mirror

s........................................................................................62

Automa

tic Dimming.......

......................................................62

Electric Powered.......

.............................................................64

Electric Remote.......

...............................................................64

Heated.....................................................................................64

Outsid

e ...................................................................................63

Rearvi

ew.................................................................................62

Vanity

......................................................................................64

Modifi

cations/Alterations

Vehicle.

....................................................................................15

Monito

r, Tire Pressure System.......

.......................................243

Mopar Parts.......

.......................................................................614

New Vehicle Break-In Period.

......

.........................................314

Occupant Restraints.

......

.........................................................250

Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel).......

...............................531, 536

Oil Filter, Change .......

.............................................................464

Oil Filter, Selection.......

...........................................................464

Oil Pressure Light .......

............................................................206

Oil Reset....................................................................................196

Oil, E

ngine.......

.................................................................462, 536

Capacity................................................................................535

Change

Interval .......

............................................................462

Dipstick.................................................................................460

Dispos

al ................................................................................464

Filter .

.............................................................................464, 536

Filte

r Disposal.......

...............................................................464

Identification Logo.......

.......................................................463

Materials Added To .......

.....................................................464

Pressure Warning Light .......

..............................................206

Recommendation .......

.........................................462, 463, 535

625

Synthetic ...............................................................................464

Viscosity ...............................................................463, 464, 53

Onboard Diagnostic System.......

...........................................216

Opener, Garage Door (Homelink).......

.................................171

Operating Precautions............................................................216

Opera

tor Manual

Owner's Manual.

......

.....................................................14, 615

Outside Rearview Mirrors.......

................................................63

Overheating, Engine.......

........................................................447

Paddle Shifters.

......

..................................................................328

Paint Care.................................................................................514

Parking

Brake .......

...................................................................315

ParkSense System, Rear .......

..................................................375

Passive Entry .......

......................................................................34

Personalized Main Menu.......

................................................540

Pets............................................................................................304

Placar

d, Tire And Loading Information.......

.......................494

Power

Brakes.

...................................................................................529

Door L

ocks .......

......................................................................33

Inverter .................................................................................184

Mirror

s....................................................................................64

Steeri

ng.................................................................................340

Windows

................................................................................86

Power S

liding Top .......

...........................................................157

Operation..............................................................................157

Pinch

Protect .......

.................................................................157

Quarter Window Removal.......

..........................................161

Power Steering Fluid .......

.......................................................539

Power Top Quarter Windows .......

........................................161

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts.......

...................................258

Preparation For Jacking.......

...................................................436

Pretensioners

Seat Belts.

..............................................................................259

Radial

Ply Tires .

......

................................................................500

Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap).......

...........................481

Radio Frequency

General Information.

......

.....................................22, 28, 30, 38

Radio Operation.......

...............................................................587

Raising ..............................................................................110, 136

Rais

ing Four Door.......

....................................................110, 136

Raising Two Door .......

....................................................110, 136

Rear Axle (Differential) .......

...................................................485

Rear Camera.......

......................................................................382

Rear Cross Path .......

................................................................236

Rear ParkSense System .......

...................................................375

Rear Swing Gate.......

...............................................................170

Rear Wiper/Washer .......

..........................................................72

Recreational Towing.......

........................................................397

Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N).......

....................398

626

Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) .....................399

Reformulated Gasoline .......

...................................................532

Refrigerant .......

........................................................................469

Release, Hood.......

...................................................................169

Reminder, Seat Belt.......

..........................................................251

Remote Control

Starting System.

......

...............................................................25

Remote Keyless Entry

Arm The Alarm .

......

..............................................................30

Disarm The Alarm .......

.........................................................31

Programming Additional Key Fobs .......

............................21

Remote Sound System (Radio) Control.......

........................582

Remote Starting

Exit Remote Start Mode .

......

................................................27

Uconnect Customer Programmable Features .......

............28

Uconnect Settings.......

...........................................................28

Remote Starting System .......

....................................................25

Removable Doors.......

.........................................................40, 44

Front........................................................................................40

Rear ..

.......................................................................................44

Remova

ble Top .......

................................................................157

Removal......................................................................................95

Removi

ng ...................................................................................88

Replac

ement Bulbs .......

..........................................................417

Replacement Keys.......

........................................................21, 29

Replacement Tires.......

............................................................503

Reporting Safety Defects.......

.................................................614

Restraints, Child.......

...............................................................282

Restraints, Head .......

.................................................................55

Roll Over Warning.......

.............................................................13

Roof Type Carrier.......

.............................................................187

Rotation, Tires.......

...................................................................510

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle.

......

..........................................305

Safety Checks Outside Vehicle.......

.......................................307

Safety Defects, Reporting.......

................................................614

Safety Information, Tire .......

..................................................488

Safety Tips.......

.........................................................................304

Safety, Exhaust Gas.......

..........................................................304

Schedule, Maintenance.......

....................................................452

Seat Belt Reminder.......

...........................................................207

Seat Belts...........................................................................251, 305

Adju

stable Shoulder Belt.......

.............................................257

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage.......

....................257

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage.......

............257

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) .......

.........................259

Child Restraints .......

............................................................282

Energy Management Feature .......

.....................................259

Extender................................................................................258

Front S

eat..............................................................251, 253, 25

Inspection .......

......................................................................305

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation.......

.....................................255

627

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting .........................................256

Lap/Shoulder Belts.......

......................................................253

Operating Instructions .......

................................................255

Pregnant Women.......

..........................................................258

Pretensioners.......

.................................................................259

Rear Seat ...............................................................................253

Remind

er..............................................................................251

Seat B

elt Extender .......

........................................................258

Seat Belt Pretensioner.......

..................................................259

Untwisting Procedure .......

.................................................256

Seat Belts Maintenance.......

....................................................525

Seats ............................................................................................47

Adjust

ment.......

......................................................................47

Fold And Tumble Rear.......

..................................................52

Height Adjustment .......

........................................................48

Rear Folding.......

....................................................................47

Tilting......................................................................................47

Securi

ty Alarm .......

...........................................................30, 207

Arm The System.......

.............................................................30

Disarm The System.......

........................................................31

Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze).......

..................................536

Sentry Key (Immobilizer) .......

.................................................29

Sentry Key Replacement.......

.............................................21, 29

Service Assistance .......

............................................................611

Service Contract .......

...............................................................613

Service Manuals .......

...............................................................615

Shifting......................................................................................321

Automa

tic Transmission .......

.....................................321, 322

Manual Transmission .......

..................................................317

Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer Case

Neutral (N) .

......

....................................................................398

Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer Case

Neutral (N) .

......

....................................................................399

Shoulder Belts.......

...................................................................253

Side Step Removal .......

...........................................................401

Signals, Turn .......

.............................................214, 307, 420, 421

Siri..............................................................................................604

Sirius

XM Guardian

Vehicle Health Alert .

......

....................................................602

Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .......

.............................................509

Snow Tires.......

.........................................................................505

Soft Top...............................................................88, 110, 12

3, 136

Soft Top Windows .......

...........................................................123

Spare Tires.......

.................................................435, 505, 506, 507

Spark Plugs .......

.......................................................................536

Specifications

Fuel (Gasoline).

......

..............................................................536

Oil ..........................................................................................536

Speed

Control

Accel/Decel.

......

...................................................................353

Accel/Decel (ACC Only) .......

............................................359

Cancel....................................................................................353

628

Resume .................................................................................353

Speed Control (Cruise Control) .......

.............................350, 354

Starting .............................................................................308, 309

Auto

matic Transmission.......

.............................................309

Button......................................................................................22

Cold W

eather.......

................................................................312

Engine Block Heater .......

....................................................314

Engine Fails To Start.......

....................................................313

Manual Transmission.......

..................................................308

Remote....................................................................................25

Starti

ng And Operating .......

..................................................309

Starting Procedures .......

.........................................................309

Steering.......................................................................................60

Power ..

..................................................................................340

Tilt C

olumn.......

.....................................................................60

Wheel, Heated .......

................................................................61

Wheel, Tilt .......

.......................................................................60

Steering Wheel Audio Controls.......

.....................................582

Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls.......

......582

Stop/Start.........................................................................341, 346

Stor

age................................................................97, 123, 16

1, 178

Behind the Seat.......

.............................................................180

Storage, Vehicle.......

..........................................................85, 512

Storing Your Vehicle .......

.......................................................512

Stuck, Freeing .......

...................................................................447

Sun Roof ...................................................................................157

Sway Bar

Disconnect

Electronic ..............................................................................339

Sway Con

trol, Trailer .......

......................................................227

Swing Gate, Rear.......

..............................................................170

Synthetic Engine Oil .......

........................................................464

System, Remote Starting .......

...................................................25

Telescoping Steering Column .

......

..........................................60

Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .......

........................84

Tie Down Hooks, Cargo.......

..................................................171

Tilt Steering Column .......

.........................................................60

Tire And Loading Information Placard .......

........................494

Tire Markings .......

...................................................................489

Tire Safety Information .......

...................................................488

Tires...................................................................307, 498, 50

5, 511

Aging (Life Of Tires).......

....................................................502

Air Pressure.......

...................................................................498

Chains ...................................................................................509

Changin

g ......................................................................432, 488

Comp

act Spare.......

..............................................................506

General Information.......

.............................................498, 505

High Speed.......

....................................................................500

Inflation Pressure .......

.........................................................499

Jacking...................................................................................488

Life O

f Tires.......

...................................................................502

Load Capacity.......

.......................................................494, 495

629

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).......................210, 243

Quality Grading .......

...........................................................511

Radial ....................................................................................500

Replac

ement.......

..................................................................503

Rotation ................................................................................510

Safety

.............................................................................488, 498

Size

s.......................................................................................490

Snow Ti

res.......

.....................................................................505

Spare Tires.......

.............................................435, 505, 506, 507

Spinning................................................................................501

Tread

Wear Indicators.......

.................................................502

Wheel Nut Torque .......

.......................................................529

To Open Hood.......

..................................................................169

Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight.......

.....................................393

Top

Dual.

........................................................................................88

Freedom

..................................................................................95

Hard ..

......................................................................................95

Power S

liding.......

................................................................157

Removable.......

.....................................................................157

Soft.................................................................................110, 136

Tow H

ooks

Emergency.

......

.....................................................................450

Towing......................................................................389, 392, 44

Disabled Vehicle.......

...........................................................449

Recreational.......

...................................................................397

Weight...................................................................................392

Towing B

ehind A Motorhome .......

.......................................397

Trac-Lok

Rear Axle .

.............................................................................337

Tracti

on Control .......

...............................................................223

Traction Control Switch .......

..................................................223

Trailer Sway Control (TSC) .......

............................................227

Trailer Towing.......

..................................................................389

Cooling System Tips .......

....................................................396

Hitches ..................................................................................391

Traile

r And Tongue Weight.......

................................392, 393

Wiring ...................................................................................394

Traile

r Towing Guide .......

......................................................392

Trailer Weight.......

...................................................................392

Transfer Case .......

....................................................................485

Fluid ......................................................................................539

Four-Wh

eel-Drive-Operation.......

.............................330, 333

Maintenance.......

..................................................................486

Transmission.......

.....................................................................322

Automatic.......

..............................................................322, 487

Fluid ......................................................................................539

Mainte

nance.......

..................................................................487

Manual ..................................................................................317

Shifti

ng..................................................................................321

Transm

itter, Garage Door Opener (Homelink) .......

...........171

Transporting Pets.......

.............................................................304

630

Tread Wear Indicators............................................................502

Turn Signals.......

......................................................214, 420, 421

UCI Connector.

......

..................................................................583

Uconnect

Uconnect Settings.

......

...........................................................28

Uconnect Settings

Customer Programmable Features.

......

28, 34, 543, 554, 566

Passive Entry Programming.......

.........................................34

Uniform Tire Quality Grades.......

.........................................511

Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector.......

.........583

Universal Transmitter .......

.....................................................171

Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt.......

....................................256

Vanity Mirrors.

......

....................................................................64

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .......

...........................528

Vehicle Loading .......

.......................................................387, 495

Vehicle Modifications/Alterations.......

..................................15

Vehicle Storage.......

...........................................................85, 512

Vehicle User Guide

In Vehicle Help.

......

...............................................................16

Navigation.......

.......................................................................16

Operating Instructions .......

..................................................16

Searching User Guide.......

....................................................16

Viscosity, Engine Oil .......

...............................................463, 464

Voice Command.......

...............................................................588

Voice Recognition System (VR) .......

.....................................588

Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Descriptions) .

......

....208

Warnings And Cautions .......

...................................................15

Warnings, Roll Over .......

..........................................................13

Warranty Information .......

.....................................................614

Washers, Windshield.......

.......................................................460

Washing Vehicle.......

...............................................................515

Wheel And Wheel Tire Care.......

...........................................507

Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim .......

..........................................507

Wind Buffeting .......

...........................................................88, 159

Window Fogging.......

................................................................85

Window Storage.......

...............................................................123

Windows ....................................................................................86

Power ..

....................................................................................86

Windsh

ield

Folding.

.................................................................................165

Windsh

ield Defroster .......

......................................................305

Windshield Washers.......

..................................................69, 460

Fluid ......................................................................................460

Windsh

ield Wiper Blades .......

...............................................472

Windshield Wipers .......

............................................................69

Wipers Blade Replacement.......

.............................................472

Wipers, Rear.......

........................................................................72

INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING

EQUIPMENT

Special design considerations are incorporated into this

vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio

frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone

equipment must be installed properly by trained person-

nel. The following must be observed during installation.

The positive power connection should be made directly

to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.

The negative power connection should be made to body

sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.

This connection should not be fused.

Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the

roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used

in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may

affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on

vehicles so equipped.

The antenna cable should be as short as practical and

routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use

only fully shielded coaxial cable.

Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to

ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).

Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than

normal may require special precautions.

All installations should be checked for possible interfer-

ence between the communications equipment and the

vehicle’s electronic systems.

WARNING:

Operating, servicing and maintaining a

passenger vehicle or off-road highway

motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals

including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,

phthalates, and lead, which are known to

the State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproductive harm.

To minimize exposure, avoid breathing

exhaust, do not idle the engine except as

necessary, service your vehicle in a

well-ventilated area and wear gloves or

wash your hands frequently when servicing

your vehicle. For more information go to

www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA

With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name

FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name

FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.

DRIVING AND ALCOHOL

Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of

accidents.

Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood

alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are

drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-

drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-

portation.

WARNING!

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.

Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are

slower, and your judgment is impaired when you

have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

This manual illustrates and describes the operation of

features and equipment that are either standard or op-

tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a

description of features and equipment that are no longer

available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please

disregard any features and equipment described in this

manual that are not on this vehicle.

FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design

and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-

ments to its products without imposing any obligation

upon itself to install them on products previously manu-

factured.

All-New Wrangler

OWNER’S MANUAL

2019

First Edition V4

Printed in the U.S.A.

19JL-126-AA

2019 All-New Wrangler

is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.

Jeep® 2019 Wrangler Moab

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Jeep® 2019 Wrangler Questions and Answers

Related Products

Jeep® Jeep I509-WRA-JL Digital Media Receiver Hi-Res Audio Playback for 2018-Up Wrangler JL and Gladiator

Jeep® Jeep I509-WRA-JK Alpine 9" Digital Media Receiver

Jeep® I407-WRA-JK Alpine 7" Multimedia Receiver

Jeep® Jeep I407-WRA-JL Alpine 7" Multimedia Receiver

Jeep® 2023 Wagoneer Suv

Jeep® 2025 Wagoneer suv 2025 JEEP WAGONEER